Home

SH7751 E8000S Emulator HS7751EBH81H User`s Manual

1. Parameter Type Description lt eml_mode gt Keyword Sets the emulation mode Refer to the next table for settings Pin Mode Description normal Executes the user program normally 6 5us Executes the user program by inputting the RESET signal to the MPU at intervals of 6 5 us 9 8us Executes the user program by inputting the RESET signal to the MPU at intervals of 9 8 us 50us Executes the user program by inputting the RESET signal to the MPU at intervals of 50 us 100us Executes the user program by inputting the RESET signal to the MPU at intervals of 100 us 500us Executes the user program by inputting the RESET signal to the MPU at intervals of 500 us 1ms Executes the user program by inputting the RESET signal to the MPU at intervals of 1 ms 5ms Executes the user program by inputting the RESET signal to the MPU at intervals of 5 ms 10ms Executes the user program by inputting the RESET signal to the MPU at intervals of 10 ms 50ms Executes the user program by inputting the RESET signal to the MPU at intervals of 50 ms 100ms Executes the user program by inputting the RESET signal to the MPU at intervals of 100 ms 500ms Executes the user program by inputting the RESET signal to the MPU at intervals of 500 ms 1s Executes the user program by inputting the RESET signal to the MPU at intervals of 1 s pabreak A break occurs under the timeout condition set by the Performance 1 dialog box
2. Bus Trace Buffer Over Flow X agnER S Time Stamp 20ns we V SDRAM Access Cycle Figure 5 54 Trace Mode Page Bus Trace Group Box Table 5 64 Bus Trace Group Box Options Option Description Time Stamp Selects the minimum time resolution for the time stamping of the measured bus trace information from among the values listed below 20ns Time stamping is in minimum time units of 20 ns initial value 1 6us Time stamping is in minimum time units of 1 627604167 us 614 4 kHz us 52us Time stamping is in minimum time units of 52 0833333 us 19 2 kHz CPU clock Time stamping is in terms of the number of bus clock cycles i e is synchronized with the cycles of the MPU s CKIO signal 1 2 CPU clock Time stamping is in terms of the number of bus clock cycles i e is synchronized with 1 2 cycle of the MPU CKIO signal 1 4 CPU clock Time stamping is in terms of the number of bus clock cycles i e is synchronized with 1 4 cycle of the MPU CKIO signal 1 8 CPU clock Time stamping is in terms of the number of bus clock cycles i e is synchronized with 1 8 cycle of the MPU CKIO signal Note The two types of errors listed below must be considered for time stamping e A margin of error with 1 resolution a margin of error with 20 ns occurs when the resolution is 20 ns 189 RENESAS e Frequency stability of the crystal oscillating module for time stamping 0 01 Click the Apply button to set the min
3. s sssesssessesseeeeseen 3 4 4 PC Interface Board Specifications ISA Bus Specifications eee Installing the System Program eceeeecesecesecssecseecseecseeeseeeaeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeesecsaecsaesnaeesaeenes Initiating the HDI and Checking the E8000S Emulator cee cee cseeereeeneeeeeeees Troubleshoot censonis ia E a ALE see aks stead 3 7 3 7 1 Error Messages from the HDI cece cee eeeeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeseenseeaees 60 3 7 2 Error Messages from the Emulator 0 00 0 esc ceseceecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseenaees 61 3 7 3 Troubleshooting Procedure oo cece ee eeeesecee cece cee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeaees 64 3 7 4 Operating Procedure for the Diagnostic program 0 0 eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 66 38 Win stall atomiesey iesire enne dene cosstesseascesvecisctectegecsececpsngvadgedsavectectentaes KET E A 68 3 8 1 Uninstalling SoftWafe s sesissricinncu inkiss eiea ui eose iiSi ii 68 3 8 2 Uninstalling the Acrobat Reader 0 ccccccssssssesseesseessssessesasessessessecseeseeseeasees 68 Section TUM PI AL sc rasccscesvasesvesaag sdcesdedbenstceqotdelusaedgndaqnsauedacvonnsangonseiebennin snasteanseers 69 4l Introduction at caiit dave E E ease R a ae ess Aiea 69 42 Rumming the FUDD reeeo ieena EE AE E ERE E E R A T RSS 70 4 3 Setting the Configuration csecsen eoi ae n EE EEE E EEE 73 44 Setting the Memory Mapiie csccsceecsevssucstccs sessed cacaecesctceanee ssusceseaces des deevects r EE EEE
4. DREQI DREQO 3VCC IRL3 IRL2 IRLI LVTH16244 x 2 IREO 3VCC LVTH16244 1KQ LVTH16244 x 2 3VCC EPM7256AETC TKQ BREQ BSACK bd BREQ BSACK LVTH16244 x 2 3VCC Y ee EPM7256AETC S ue LVTH16244 x 3 a 7 LVTH16244 LVTH16244 EPM7128 amp 7256AETC EPM7128AETC RESET Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits cont 351 RENESAS SH7751 User system CKIO FCT3807 CS6 CS5 CS4 CS3 CS2 CS1 CS0 RDWR BS BS RAS RAS CAS0 DQMO CAS0 DQMO CAS1 DQM1 CAS1 DQM1 CAS2 DQM2 CAS2 DQM2 CAS3 DQM3 CAS3 DQM3 PCIGNT1 REQOUT EPM7256AETC PCIGNT1 REQOUT PCIGNT2 PCIGNT2 PCIGNT3 PCIGNT3 PCIGNT4 PCIGNT4 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits cont RENESAS SH7751 User system RD CASS FRAME RD CASS FRAME EPM7256AETC WE3 ICIOWR WES ICIOWR WE2 ICIORD WE2 ICIORD WE1 WE1 WEO0 REG EPM7256AETC WEO REG H AO to A25 AO to A25 LVTH16374 _F LVTH16374 DO to D31 DO to D31 LVTH16652 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits cont 353 RENESAS SH7751 SoG User system VDD PLL1 VDD PLL2 VDD CPG Sevres ie ea VDD RTC 0 1 pF 0 1 uF ji pr 1009 1 pF EXTAL2 EXTAL2 777 NC gt XTAL2 32 768 kHz XTAL XTAL2 T 22 pFl 22 pF NC EPM7128AETC PST611W ULVCCDOWN Vv VDD 1 8 V 4702 MAX709R jcpeet UVCCDOWN 3 3 V VDD PLL1 V V vDD PLL2 VDD CPG VSS RTC ane VDD RTC VSSPLLY VSSQ VSS PLL2 me VSS VSS RTC 777 VSS CPG 1 8V
5. YS use Figure 5 12 Example of a Software Break Instruction When memory is accessed in trace halt mode the contents at the specified address are replaced with a break instruction 130 RENESAS Setting a Software Break Place the cursor in the Breakpoints window and click the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu Select Add from the menu and the Break dialog box will appear H Oc000040 D I Virtual Space 4S5ID D 255 Figure 5 13 Point Page Break Dialog Box Click the Add button to open the Break Point dialog box Specify the breakpoint s address a number of passes and the memory space used for the address specification then click the OK button 131 RENESAS Table 5 22 Point Page Options Option Description Break point Displays the specified pass point addresses The pass point and reset point address settings are displayed as follows lt pass point address gt lt number of passes gt lt address space gt lt address space gt is displayed as follows Physical Space Physical space Virtual Space ASID D xxx Virtual space xxx is an ASID value Add Sets software breakpoints Clicking Add opens the Break Point dialog box Edit Allows the user to modify the software breakpoint settings selected in the Break point list box Clicking Edit opens the Break Point dialog box Reset Clears the software breakpoint settings selected i
6. e Install the PC interface card into the host computer e The installed hardware will be detected by the host computer and driver installation will be started automatically e When asked to select how to install the driver select Search for the best driver for my device recommended then select Specify a location for how to locate the driver e Enter lt drive gt 775 1 DRIVERS PCMCIA 2000 for the search location where lt drive gt is the drive letter for the CD ROM drive e Check that the E8000 E6000 PC Card has been found and complete the driver installation When Using the LAN Adapter e Log on as Administrator e Install the provided software select E8000 LAN Driver when asked to select a component e Connect the LAN adapter to the target network and turn the LAN adapter on e Select SH7751 E8000S Emulator Software Tools LAN Adapter Configuration from Start Programs and start the LAN Adapter Configuration e Set the LAN adapter by LAN Adapter Configuration e Turn the LAN adapter off and connect the LAN adapter to the target network and turn the LAN adapter on LAN adapter must be turned off even when the network is not changed Note When using a LAN adapter that has already been set it is unnecessary to set it again Use LAN Adapter Configuration to define only the host computer For details on the usage of the LAN Adapter Configuration refer to the online help of the LAN Adapter Configuration
7. ve Map type Memory x Edit Add Heset ieee Help Figure 4 4 Memory Mapping Dialog Box before Setting The emulator can allocate emulation memory to CS areas in 4 Mbyte units When the optional memory board is installed emulation memory can be allocated in two areas in an 8 Mbyte unit The following two types of memory can be specified When the Add button is clicked the Add Memory Mapping dialog box is displayed In the sample program allocate 32 bit emulation memory to memory range H 00000000 to H 003FFFFF 4 Mbytes in the CSO area 75 RENESAS Add Memory Mapping Eg Memory Mapping From To HOO3FFFFF Setting EMULATION AREA 32 bit Cancel Help Figure 4 5 Add Memory Mapping Dialog Box e Set the From and To edit boxes to H 00000000 and H 003FFFFF respectively set the Setting combo box to EMULATION AREA 32bit and click the OK button The Memory Mapping dialog box will now show the modified ranges Memory Mapping x From To Mapping Target Device configuration System memory resources INTERNAL 1 0 E0000000 FFFFFFFF REMAINING EMULATION MEMORY S Map type ne Memory Edt Add Reset Resetall Help Figure 4 6 Memory Mapping Dialog Box at Setting 76 RENESAS e Click the Close button of the Memory Mapping dialog box to close the dialog box For details on the allocation of emulation memory refer to secti
8. E8000S station HS8000EST11H GQ o lt k External probe s y C socket trigger output pins User system Figure 2 1 Emulator Hardware Components RENESAS 2 1 1 E8000S Station Components The names of the components on the front rear panel of the E8000S station are listed below Front Panel Figure 2 2 E8000S Station Front Panel 1 POWER lamp Is lit up while the E8000S station is supplied with power 2 RUN lamp Is lit up while the user program is running 10 RENESAS Rear Panel D C B A Figure 2 3 E8000S Station Rear Panel 7tENESAS A B C D a b c d e f g h i Optional board slot Control board slot Trace board slot Device control board slot Power switch Fuse box AC power connector PC interface cable connector Host interface switches Station to evaluation chip board interface connector CN1 Station to evaluation chip board interface connector CN2 Trace cable mis insertion inhibiting seal CN1 Trace cable mis insertion inhibiting seal CN2 For installing the optional board expansion slot For installing the control board For installing the trace board For installing the device control board depends on the target device Turning this switch to I input supplies power to the emulator E8000S station and evaluation chip board Contains an AC 100 V power supply fuse 250 V
9. The memory type set for the AREAS area CS6 Memory Type The memory type set for the AREA6 area H UDI JTAG Clock The selected H UDI input clock User system MD10 0 The values set for the mode pins which are input from the user system Clock source The clock that is selected Run status Whether or not a program is being executed Running is displayed during execution and Break is displayed during stop Cause of last break The cause of termination by a break Run Time Count The program execution time Go to Break time measured XXXX H XXM xxS xxxxxxUS xxxNS amp H hour M minute S second US microsecond NS nanosecond x number Condition A Sequential The Condition A sequential points that have been passed Condition B Sequential The Condition B sequential points that have been passed 245 RENESAS Table 5 99 Platform Sheet Configuration cont Item Interval Timer counter Description The resolution of the timer used for measuring the execution time the setting information in the The minimum time to be measured by Go command execution combo box of the Configuration dialog box Bus timeout The timeout detection time setting the setting in the Bus timeout combo box of the Configuration dialog box Multi break PRB1 The setting of the multi break function the setting in the Enable the multi
10. is displayed R W to PRB When the trace type is BRANCH or DESTINATION it is the opcode d When the trace type is MEMORY R it is the read data When the trace type is MEMORY W it is the write data When the trace type is S TRACE it is the data output when the macro was executed When the trace type is LOST is displayed Time Stamp Number of branch instruction repetitions Source The source code line corresponding to the displayed address Clicking in the Source column activates the Source window and jumps to the corresponding line When the trace type is MEMORY R MEMORY W or LOST nothing is displayed When the address does not have 32 bits nothing is displayed Notes 1 When the address information output does not have 32 bits an asterisk is displayed for each four undetermined bits 2 Memory is accessed to display the opcode and operand for the branch address If the MMU is enabled the opcode or operand may be incorrect if the virtual address space from the time when branch information was acquired from the MPU and emulation was halted is different 202 RENESAS Display of Both External Bus Trace and AUD Trace Information Select Bus AUD trace in the Display combo box to display both the external bus trace and AUD trace information The display range can be specified by setting Start and End on the General page of the Trace Filter dialog box 143 records no filter BP AB DB R W IRL
11. lt aud_window_b gt Bus trace and MPU internal trace lt mode gt lt internal_mode gt tm Type Keyword lt internal_type gt Description Specifies the trace information acquisition mode ofbreak Breaks when the trace buffer overflows ofstop Stops tracing when the trace buffer overflows ofoff Continues trace acquisition when the trace buffer overflows lt bus_time gt Keyword Specifies the minimum time interval for time stamping of trace information bus_time 20ns Displays in 20 ns units bus_time 1 6us Displays in 1 6 us 1 627604167 us units bus_time 52us Displays in 52 us 52 0833333 us units bus_time clk Acquires trace in the units of clock cycles bus_time clk2 Acquires trace in units of 1 2 clocks cycles bus_time clk4 Acquires trace in units of 1 4 clocks cycles bus_time clk8 Acquires trace in units of 1 8 clocks cycles lt bus_sdram gt Keyword Specifies whether or not the contents of the address bus and data bus are edited before displaying the trace information when SDRAM has been accessed bus_sdram enable Edits the contents bus_sdram disable Does not edit the contents lt bus_cycle gt Keyword Specifies how trace information is acquired bus_cycle bus Acquires trace information in synchronization with the bus clock 331 RENESAS lt option gt Parameter lt mode gt Description Selects the AUD trace or MPU internal trace
12. mode off Selects nothing mode aud AUD trace mode internal MPU internal trace lt aud_mode gt Specifies the acquisition mode when the AUD trace function is used aud_mode realtime Acquires trace information in realtime mode aud_mode full Acquires trace information in full trace mode lt aud_time gt Specifies the minimum time interval for acquiring AUD trace information aud_time clk Acquires trace information in the units of clock cycles aud_time clk2 Acquires trace information in units of 1 2 clocks cycles aud_time clk4 Acquires trace information in units of 1 4 clocks cycles aud_time clk8 Acquires trace information in units of 1 8 clocks cycles lt aud_type gt Specifies the type of AUD trace information aud_type 1 Acquires trace information on branch instructions aud_type 2 Acquires trace information on memory accesses aud_type 3 Acquires trace information on branch instructions and memory accesses aud_type 4 Acquires software trace information aud_type 5 Acquires trace information on branch instructions and software trace information aud_type 6 Acquires trace information on memory accesses and software trace information aud_type 7 Acquires trace information on branch instructions and memory accesses and software trace information lt aud_window_a gt 332 Specifies window trace on channel A can be specified when lt aud_type gt is aud_type 2 aud_type 3 aud_
13. pages Table 5 63 Trace Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 Dialog Box Pages Page Description General Selects the trace acquisition mode Address Sets address bus conditions Data Sets data bus conditions Bus State Sets read write cycle conditions Probe Sets external probe signal conditions Interrupt Sets external interrupt signal conditions NMI and IRLO to IRL3 Specify the required conditions on the corresponding pages then click the OK button The Trace condition A1 dialog box closes and the display returns to the Condition A page The specified trace conditions will now be displayed as condition 1 in the Condition list box Click the OK button to close the Trace Acquisition dialog box Trace conditions for the other channels are specified in the same way The options on each page are the same as those of the corresponding Break Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 dialog boxes except the General page For details of the options on each page refer to section 5 5 3 Hardware Break Trigger Output A low level pulse is output from the trigger output probe when the conditions specified for Trace Condition B are satisfied during execution of the user program For details refer to section 5 6 1 Trigger Output 187 RENESAS Timeout Trace Stop Trace acquisition can be stopped when execution time or number of passes exceeds the respective conditions timeout or maximum num
14. O x value aa Ox003fffd8 long 10 Figure 4 18 Watch Window Window Displaying the Array 85 RENESAS The user can also add a variable to the Watch Window window by specifying its name e Click the Watch Window window with the right mouse button and select Add Watch from the pop up menu The Add Watch dialog box is displayed Add Watch Ea Variable or eypressi aave Gl Expressigh Gael mar Figure 4 19 Add Watch Dialog Box e Input variable max and click the OK button The Watch Window window will now also show the long type variable max Watch Window l Value s SER Ox003fffd8 long 10 H 008ddd Ox003fffd0 long Figure 4 20 Watch Window Window Displaying the Variable e Double click the symbol to the left of array a in the Watch Window window to expand the variable and watch all the elements in the array 86 RENESAS Watch Window w m i 0x003fffd8 T long 10 w EN 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ax 3 Figure 4 21 Watch Window Window Displaying Array Elements H oo00og0000 H 000053dc H 00002704 H 00005665 H 00000daa H 0000421 H 00003ead H 00004did H 00002f5a H 000020da H 7008ddd t t t t t Ox003 f d8 Ox003fffdc Ox003 ffe0 Ox003fffe4 Ox003f ffe8 Ox003fffec Ox003 f 0 Ox003 ff 4 OxO003 ff 8 Ox003ffffc Ox003f f d0 RENESAS rsrsr nesr herne
15. Profile Chart Displays the relation of calls for a specific function This window is opened from the Profile List or Profile Tree window Clicking the right mouse button on the target function in this window displays the calling relation for the function specified in the Profile List or Profile Tree window opens a pop up menu Selecting View Profile Chart in the pop up menu opens the Profile Chart window and displays the calling relation for the specified function The specified function is displayed in the middle the calling function on the left side and the called function on the right side Values beside the calling and called functions show the number of times the function has been called Measuring Profile Data 1 Downloading a load module Download a load module of DWARF2 format 2 Enabling profile data measurement Select Enable Profiler in the pop up menu in one of the windows shown in table 5 93 to place a check mark to the left of the text and profile data measurement is enabled To disable profile data measurement select Enable Profiler again to remove the check mark 3 Profile List window This window displays the address Address cell and size Size cell of each function the number of times each function is called Times cell and the profile data Cycle cell An example of the display after user program execution is shown below 236 RENESAS Profile List x Function Variable Address Siz
16. To assign the virtual address range from H 4000 to H 4FFF to the physical address range from H 400000 to H 400FFF VS H 4000 H 4FFF H 400000 To enable VP_MAP table settings VE ENABLE To cancel the VP_MAP table with the virtual start address H 4000 VC H 4000 To cancel all VP_MAP tables vce Notes Virtual addresses for the VPMAP_SET command must be set in units of MPU pages 1 kbyte or 4 kbytes A virtual address range that overlaps with a virtual address range which is currently set cannot be specified Cancel the setting and re specify 340 RENESAS Section 7 Error Messages 7 1 Emulator Error Messages of the E8000S Emulator The E8000S system program displays error messages in the format below if an error occurs during emulation command execution Table 7 1 lists error messages descriptions of the errors and error solutions Table 7 1 Error Messages Error Message INVALID COMMAND Description and Solution The specified command is invalid or this command cannot be executed in trace halt mode Correctly enter the command INSUFFICIENT MEMORY The size of emulation memory to be allocated with the MAP_SET command was not available Emulation memory was allocated within the available memory size CANNOT USE THIS MODE The GO command cannot be executed because settings for the execution mode are invalid Correctly specify the settings necessary for the specified execution mo
17. eceeecescssecsecseeceecaeeeseseeeeeeeeeseeeenseeeseeaessaeeaeenaees 36 Allocatable Memory Area of PC Interface Board o 0 eee eeceecesecesecseecseeeeeeneeees 43 PC Interface Board Switch wo cece ee eeceseceecscecseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecesecaecsaessaeeaeeeneeeas 44 Installing the PC Interface Board 0 cece eeeeeeeeeeeceseceseeeaecsaecseecaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeneees 45 Connecting the E8000S Station to the PC Interface Board 00 0 eee ee eee eects 46 Start Menu System Install To0 cee eee eeeeeecsneceeeeeceeeceeneecaeceseeecaeceeneesnaeeeneeees 51 Browse for Folder Dialog BOX ee ceecceesseceseeecsseceseeeceaeceeneecnaeceneesaeseeneeeaeeeeee 52 E8000 Load Files Dialog Box SH775 1 cece eeceeeeecceseceeceseeeseteseteeteneenaeenaes 53 System Install Completed Dialog Box SH7751 00 eeeceeeeeeesteceeeeereneeceteeeeenees 54 E8000 Load Files Dialog Box SH7751 0 0 ceeceeseeeeeeceseceecsseeeseeeaeeeeeenseenaeenaes 55 Start Menu Initiating the HDI 0 cece eeeeesseceeeeeceseceeneecaeeeeneeceaeeeeneessaeesenees 56 Select Session Dialog BoX cissie eerie reenn rekor rea Ee reire rE VES HEr Es EEn 57 Driver Details Dialog Box When ISA Bus is Selected ceeeeeeseceeeeeeseeeeenees 57 Status Bar during the HDI Initiation eee eeeeeeeeeeceecesecaecaecaeesaeeeneeees 58 Status Bar at the HDI Initiation Completion eee eee eee cseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenens 58 CPU Operating Mode Modification Message Mode 1 ee ce
18. lt datahi gt corresponds to the data value of data buses D6331 to D320 H is specified when omitted lt datahi gt cannot be specified for the SH7751R lt datalo gt corresponds to the data value of data buses D31 to DO It cannot be omitted Always specify a 32 bit data size Specify a mask value if the user wants the emulator to stop the user program execution at a data size equal to or smaller than a 32 bit data size Add not to the specification to break the user program when the data bus holds a value other than the specified value lt r wopt gt Specifies read or write condition This parameter can be used when lt type gt is a or b To break the user program with the read cycle direction read To break the user program with the write cycle direction write 274 RENESAS Parameter Description lt prbopt gt Specifies external probe signal condition This parameter can be used when lt type gt is a or b To specify external probe signal condition prb lt bit specification gt Specify each bit as follows PRB1 to PRB4 signal bit specification 3 2 1 0 Bit location x x x x Value to be specified Specify 0 low level or 1 high level for x 4 3 2 1 PRB number When is specified the condition of its bit location is not cared lt nmiopt gt Specifies NMI signal condition This parameter can be used when lt type gt is a or b To break the user program when the NMI signal is high nmi hi
19. 1 To set a software sequential breakpoint in which user program execution stops when the user program has passed the pass points in the order of physical addresses H C010000 and H C020000 and the analysis for the pass sequence is reset when the user program has passed address H C030000 in the virtual address space that has ASID H FE BSS H C010000 H C020000 SPACE PHYSICAL RESET H C030000 SPACE VIRTUAL asid H fe 291 RENESAS 2 To set a software sequential breakpoint in which user program execution stops when the user program has passed the pass points in the order of H C010000 H C020000 and H C030000 BSS H C010000 H C020000 H C030000 3 Enables the software sequential breakpoints that have been set BSE ENABLE 4 Disables the software sequential breakpoints that have been set BSE DISABLE 5 Clears the software sequential breakpoints that have been set BSC Notes e While the emulator halts trace if the user executes commands that refer to memory and the emulator stops the execution of user program due to satisfaction of software sequential breakpoints the user will not be able to execute this command In this case the emulator will display error message EMULATOR BUSY so the user must enter the command again e When the user sets pass points or a reset point by this command the emulator stops the user program every time a software sequential breakpoint is passed and analyzes the pass order Therefore the emulator cannot
20. 41 RENESAS 3 4 4 PC Interface Board Specifications ISA Bus Specifications PC Interface Board Specifications ISA Bus Specifications Table 3 1 lists the ISA bus PC interface board specifications For the PCI bus and PCMCIA bus interface boards refer to their description notes Table 3 1 PC Interface Board Specifications Item Specifications Available personal computer ISA bus specifications PC or compatible machine System bus ISA bus specifications Memory area 16 kbytes Memory area setting Can be set at every 16 kbytes in the range from H C0000 to H EFFFF with a switch 42 RENESAS Switch Settings of the PC Interface Board Memory Area Setting The PC interface board uses a 16 kbyte memory area on the personal computer The memory area to be used must be allocated to the memory area on the personal computer with a switch on the PC interface board Any 16 kbytes in the range of H C0000 to H EFFFF can be allocated figure 3 11 Addresses to be allocated must not overlap the memory addresses of other boards An overlap will cause incorrect operation H C0000 H C4000 H C8000 H CC000 H D0000 Setting at shipment H D4000 H D8000 H DC000 H E0000 H E4000 H E8000 H EC000 H EFFFF Figure 3 11 Allocatable Memory Area of PC Interface Board 43 RENESAS Switch Setting A rotary switch is installed on the PC interface board figure 3 12 The switch is used to set the memory area allocatio
21. A UBC break must be used to set a hardware break for a user program in the SDRAM memory area E 6 Hardware Sequential Break and Trace Function Six or more external bus cycles are required between the satisfaction of each address condition that is specified E 7 Clock Operating Mode To use a crystal oscillator install the oscillator on the socket on the evaluation chip board so that MD8 0 377 RENESAS E 8 Differences between the Emulator and the SH7751 1 Note that the emulator initializes some general or control registers whenever the system is activated or the MPU is reset by commands Table E 3 Initial Values of Registers in the SH7751 and the E8000S Emulator Emulator SH7751 Register Name Activation Reset CPU Power On Reset PC H A0000000 H A0000000 H A0000000 R8 to R15 H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined RO_BANKO R7_BANKO H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined RO_BANK1 R7_BANK1 H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined SR H 700000F0 H 700000F0 H 00000XFX SSR H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined SPC H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined PR H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined VBR H 00000000 H 00000000 Undefined GBR H 00000000 H 00000000 Undefined RE H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined MOD H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined FPUL H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined FPSCR H 00040001 H 00040001 H 00040001
22. Cancellation This command clears hardware break conditions Break Condition A B C sequential points and reset points Break Condition A B When the user does not specify a channel number all of the specified hardware break conditions are cleared If the user specifies a hardware sequential break the user cannot specify a channel number Display This command displays break conditions Break Condition A B C that have been set When the user does not specify a channel number the emulator displays all of the specified hardware break conditions Break Condition Xn lt Enable Disable gt lt Contents specified gt X A B C N Number from to 8 The following will be shown when a hardware sequential break is specified Break Condition X Sequential lt Enable Disable gt n lt Contents specified gt X A B n Sequential number start from 1 and condition is satisfied at maximum of 7 R indicates a reset point Enable or Disable This command enables or disables break conditions Break Condition A B C sequential points and reset points Break Condition A B that have been set When the user does not specify the channel number the emulator enables or disables all of the specified break conditions When the user specifies a hardware sequential break the user cannot specify a channel number Examples 1 To set the following conditions for channel 2 of Break Condition A Address condition An address bus value from H 1002
23. Data bus The condition is satisfied when the value on the data bus matches the specified value Read Write The condition is satisfied when the RD and RDWR signal levels match a specification External interrupt The condition is satisfied when the NMI and IRL signal levels match a specification External probe The condition is satisfied when the external probe PRB signal levels match a specification Satisfaction count Trace acquisition stops when the above conditions are satisfied the specified number of times Delay Trace acquisition stops the specified number of bus cycles after the above conditions have been satisfied Trace Conditions A B and C Eight channels for each condition 24 channels in total 177 RENESAS Trace stop conditions that can be specified for Trace Conditions A B and C are shown in table 3 57 Table 5 57 Specifiable Trace Stop Conditions Trace Stop Trace Condition A Trace Condition B Trace Condition C Condition 1 to 8 1 to 8 1 to 8 Address bus O O O Data bus O O X Read Write O O X External interrupt O O X External probe O O X Satisfaction count O O X Delay O O X Note O Can be specified X Cannot be specified The delay condition is only available for Trace Conditions A7 and B7 178 RENESAS b Setting Trace Stop Conditions Trace Condition A7 is taken as an example of setting a trace stop condition Place the cursor in the Trace window
24. Description Notes on Using the PC Card Interface HS6000EIP01H for the E6000 E8000 Emulator Description Notes on Using the PCI Interface Board HS6000EICO1H for the E6000 E8000 Emulator Description Notes on Using the PCI Interface Board HS6000EICO2H for the E6000 E8000 Emulator Description Notes on Using the LAN Adapter HS6000ELNO1H for the E6000 E8000 Emulator Hitachi Embedded Workshop User s Manual SuperH RISC engine C C Compiler User s Manual SuperH RISC engine Assembler User s Manual H Series Linkage Editor Librarian Object Converter User s Manual RENESAS SuperH RISC engine C C Compiler Assembler Optimizing Linkage Editor User s Manual Hitachi Debugging Interface User s Manual Hardware Manual supporting each MPU Programming Manual supporting each MPU Notes 1 IBM PC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation 2 Microsoft Windows and WindowsNT 4 0 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or in other countries 3 Pentium III is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States 4 Adobe Acrobat and Acrobat Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or in other countries Abbreviation 1 Windows 95 is an abbreviation for Microsoft Windows 95 operating system 2 Windows 98 is an abbreviation for Microsoft Windows 98 operating system 3 Windows Me is an abbrev
25. ils To set the following conditions to acquire on channel 2 Subroutine time measurement mode 1 Subroutine name SORT1 Start address H 10002E End address H 10015C PS CHANNEL 2 MODE TIME1 NAME SORT1 START H 10002E END H 10015C To set the following conditions to acquire on channel 5 Subroutine time measurement mode 3 Subroutine name TEST1 Start address range H 100000 to H 10002E End address range H 100030 to H 10015C PS CHANNEL 5 MODE TIME3 NAME TEST1 START H 100000 TO H 10002E END H 100030 TO H 10015C 315 RENESAS To clear the performance condition set to channel 2 PC CHANNEL 2 4 To clear all performance conditions PC Notes The emulator can measure the performance analysis of a subroutine by using the address bus value Therefore if the user sets a subroutine end address to an address near to an address next to a branch or delay slot instruction the emulator will not be able to measure the performance analysis correctly Therefore before setting the end address the user must check how the MPU operates after the branch instruction are executed and make sure not to set the subroutine end address to address that will not be executed due to a branch instruction The emulator can continuously measure performance analysis up to 14 minutes when specified as 52 us 26 seconds when specified as 1 6 us or 0 33 second when specified as 20 ns by setting the TIME option in the EXECUTION_MODE command When
26. Apply button to set the trace mode then click the Close button The Apply button must be clicked to set the conditions Notes 1 The emulator accesses memory to get the mnemonic codes for branch instructions If a TLB error occurs at this time the displayed code will be invalid 2 To reduce the amount of information displayed only the IP is incremented when a loop is executed multiple times 3 When trace information is displayed during user program execution the mnemonic codes and operands are not displayed 197 RENESAS 4 When MMU settings are modified or when a user program is modified after Go command completion before trace display the displayed mnemonics operands or source may not be correct 5 Ifthe 32 bit address cannot be displayed the source line is not displayed 6 Some of the AUD trace information may be lost in realtime mode 5 6 4 Trace Display Select the trace display format on the General page of the Trace Filter dialog box Select Filter from the pop up menu of the Trace window to produce this dialog box General Display me C YP MAP Cycl C Patt had Cycle Pattern E Add source Cycle BUS Cycle Start D512 End D 255 AUDAlntemal Cycle Stat f D 512 End 4D 255 Cancel Apply Help Figure 5 59 Trace Filter Dialog Box General Page When there is no trace information the Trace window will initially display nothing but it will display no t
27. Clicking Edit opens the Break Point Sequence dialog box Reset All Clears all software sequential breakpoint settings in the Sequence point list box Click the Edit button to open the Break Point Sequence dialog box Specify pass point addresses in the order of Address 1 to Address 7 a reset point address in Reset Point and the memory space for the specified address when the specified pass points are executed in order from Address 1 to Address 7 the break condition will be satisfied Click the OK button 138 RENESAS H coo0000 H Co00004 Figure 5 18 Break Sequence Dialog Box The display returns to the Sequence page The Sequence point list box will display the specified software sequential break conditions Click the OK button to close the Break dialog box 139 RENESAS Table 5 25 Break Sequence Page Options Option Sequence Point group box Address 1 to Address 7 Description Sets a breakpoint address in the sequence of points to be passed as a number or a symbol One to seven pass points can be set At least two points must be set Normal Address translation is according to the current state of the emulator state When the VP_MAP table is enabled and the address is within the table s range the address is translated according to the VP_MAP table When the address is outside the table s range the address is translated according to the M
28. Figure 5 27 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Count Page Table 5 35 Count Page Options Option Description Don t Care Selects no satisfaction count condition Input area Sets the satisfaction count condition as a number of passes The default is D 1 Any value in the range from D 1 to D 65535 can be set here 150 RENESAS g Delay Page Use this page to specify a delay condition Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Count Delay Delay T Don t Care D0 bus cycles Figure 5 28 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Delay Page Table 5 36 Delay Page Options Option Description Don t Care Selects no delay condition Input area Sets a delay condition values as a number of bus cycles The default is D 1 Any value in the range from D 1 to D 32767 can be set here Notes 1 Break Condition A shares hardware with Trace Condition A Therefore when any channel of Trace Condition A has been specified it is not possible to set or modify Break Condition A 2 Break Condition B shares hardware with Trace Condition B Therefore when any channel of Trace Condition B has been specified it is not possible to set or modify Break Condition B 3 Break Condition C shares hardware with Trace Condition C and Performance Analysis Therefore when any channel of Trace Condition C or a Performance Analysis setting has been specified it is not possible to set or modify Break Condition C 4 When a hardwar
29. SYSTEM FILE E 8000 sys CONFIGURATION FILE s henf 51 sys FIRMWARE FILE Bhdet76t ys L m DIAGNOSTIC FILE Diag sys Figure 3 17 E8000 Load Files Dialog Box SH7751 Click the OK button Installation of the system programs to the flash memory of the E8000S station will commence The file name will be displayed in the status bar as each file is installed Click Cancel to return to the Select Install dialog box When the installation is complete the System Install Completed dialog box will be displayed 53 RENESAS System Install Completed Ed E8000 System File Install was completed Press OK button to exit the application SYSTEM FILE aM e SHE W HdiS E 8000557751 5YSTEMSE 8000 sys CONFIGURATION FILE e HEWAHdiSSES000S SAZ ZSI SYSTEMA Shenf 51 sys FIRMWARE FILE e SHEWHdiS E8000547751 SYSTEM Shdet 51 sys m DIAGNOSTIC FILE e HEWSHdiSSE 80005 47751 SYSTEM Diag sys Figure 3 18 System Install Completed Dialog Box SH7751 Click the OK button The installation of the system program to the flash memory of the E8000S station will be completed and the ESI will terminate Turn off the emulator s power switch Next Custom Install will be described When the Select Install dialog box has been displayed select the Custom Install radio button The E8000 Load
30. System program for the SH7751 E8000S emulator System Shenf751 sys Control program for the SH7751 E8000S emulator System Shdct751 sys Configuration file for the SH7751 E8000S emulator System diag sys Diagnostic and maintenance program Drivers Pci 95 pcihei inf Setup information PCI For Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me Drivers Pci 95 pcihei vxd Virtual driver PCI For Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me Drivers Pci Nt pcihei sys System file PCI For WindowsNT Drivers Pci 2000 pcihei sys System file PCI For Windows 2000 Drivers Pci 2000 pcihei2k inf Setup information PCI For Windows 2000 Drivers lsa Nt emulator sys System file ISA RENESAS For WindowsNT Table 2 1 Contents of CD R cont Directory Name File Name Contents Notes Drivers Pcmcia 95 ulepcc inf Setup information For Windows PCMCIA 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me Drivers Pcmcia 95 ulepcc vxd Virtual driver PCMCIA For Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me Drivers Pcmcia nt ulepccnt sys System file PCMCIA For WindowsNT Drivers Pcmcia 2000 ulepcc2k sys System file PCMCIA For Windows 2000 Drivers Pcmcia 2000 ulepcc2k inf Setup information For Windows PCMCIA 2000 Manuals Japanese HS6400DIIW5Su pdf Hitachi Debugging PDF Interface user s manual documents in Japanese Manuals Japanese HS7751EBH81HJ pdf SH7751 E8000S emulator PDF
31. Trace Mode AUD Intemal Mode Condition A Condition B Condition C C DontCae Ci C AUD Trace r Internal Trace Mode l Realtime trace he Instruction M Branch MV Subroutine Call IV Exceptional Event BUD Trace cru clock z Stark Ho Le E Apply Bance Apply Help Figure 5 57 Trace Acquisition Page AUD Internal Mode Page 193 RENESAS Table 5 67 Internal Trace Group Box Options Option Description Mode Selects one of the following internal trace acquisition modes Realtime trace internal trace in realtime mode Continuous trace internal trace in continuous trace mode Instruction Selects one of the following types of instructions for internal trace Branch acquires information on general branch instructions Subroutine Call acquires information on subroutine calls Exceptional Event acquires information on exception processing Click the Apply button to set the trace mode then click the Close button The Apply button must be clicked to set the conditions Notes 1 When continuous tracing is in use do not issue the INTERRUPT command to enable user interrupts during emulator command wait states or execution of the user program The emulator accesses memory to get the mnemonic codes for branch instructions If a TLB error occurs at this time the code displayed will be invalid It is not possible to acquire trace information on the following
32. Word Sets word data access cycles Long Sets longword data access cycles Quad Sets quadword data access cycles Non user mask Sets no mask conditions User mask Sets mask conditions Mask Sets the mask bits if User mask is selected Masked bits on the data bus satisfy this break condition regardless of their values 167 RENESAS c Bus State Page Use this page to specify conditions for the read write cycle and access type Address Data ASID Bus State Bus oho All C Data gt Read Write Read write C Read White Figure 5 39 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box Bus State Page The bus state access type condition is set under Bus State Table 5 49 Bus State Buttons Option Description All All bus states satisfy this condition Data Instruction execution cycles satisfy this condition The read write cycle condition is set under Read Write Table 5 50 Read Write Buttons Option Description Read Write Sets either read write cycles as satisfying this condition Read Sets read cycles as satisfying this condition Write Sets write cycles as satisfying this condition 168 RENESAS d ASID Page Use this page to specify the ASID conditions Address Data ASID Bus State ASID T Don t Care ASID D 255 Figure 5 40 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box ASID Page Table 5 51 ASID Page Options Option Description Don t Care S
33. after User Program Execution eeceeeseceereeeeteeeeeeees 239 xi RENESAS Figure 5 87 System Status Window 00 eee ecceeceescesecesecesecaecaeecaeeeseseaeeeeseeeeeeeeseesseesaeenaes 243 Figure 5 88 Pulse Output Timing cece cseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeecesecssececesecesecsaecaeeaesaeenaeeaes 248 Figure 5 89 Memory Mapping Dialog BOX 00 eee cee ceeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseceaecaecaecsuecaaeeaeeeaes 249 Figure 5 90 Edit Memory Mapping Dialog BOX ooo eee cece ceeeceeeeeeceseceaeceaeeeeceeeaeeenes 250 Figure 5 91 Address Translation According to VP_LMAP Tables ce ee ceeeesecsseceecseeeneeeees 252 Figure 5 92 Stack Trace Window csccessceesseceeeeeeseecesneeeseeceeeeesaeceseeeeaeeceaeeesaeeceseeeenaeeaees 256 Figure 5 93 Stack Trace Setting Dialog Box eee ceeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeecesecesecaecaecseeeaeeeneeeas 257 Figure 5 94 AWM Window vii icicicssacesscstecca seis cada sceetiessueceoun ceacceessthuas RE A A EEEE Er 258 Figure 5 95 AUM Target Details Dialog BOX oe eee cece ceeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseenseesaeenaes 259 Figure 5 96 Auto update Memory Edit Dialog BOX oo eee eeceeecesecesecesecesecsnecseeeaeeenes 260 Figure 6 1 Address Tramslation s cssecssscssesosesonvenesonevonsscssessenssenssesseesserseesssecseesonvenesenes 339 Figure A 1 Basic Bus Cycle scccsiiciecisses cassssescciciini cas dieses as E E E Gite E EE E eae 348 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits 00 0 0 ceeeseeeee
34. displayed Console connected correctly System defect No Have the diagnosis test of the emulator Check power supply breaker fuse outlet to emulator Connect correctly Get ready to power on Defect in source power or emulator power Failure occurred Fuse fail again System program initiated correctly monitor at power System defect Emulator Power lamp defect fan working on passed Have the diagnosis test of the emulator system program at pwer on passed installed Correct system program Switch defect System defect mm Can emulation commands be entered normally Is it an error generated by register program execution break memory or shared memory Re install correct system program System defect E DCONT error System defect Evaluation chip board correctly connected Connected to the user system command Connect correctly passed Can data be input to the host computer normally System defect Check command Check command passes when User system defect the user system is disconnected Are the connections and settings of the host computer correct Chec
35. es Emulation mode Timeout break of Performance analysis x IV Prohibit RW on the fly T Interrupts during step Memory area Normal Physical C Virtual 451D J Diver Emulator ISA Driver Change Figure 5 45 Configuration Dialog Box General Page Open the Performance 1 dialog box from the Performance window set the conditions on the Time Out page timeout and Count page maximum number of executions then execute the user program When the specified time or number is exceeded a break occurs For details on the Performance 1 dialog box Time Out page and Count page refer to section 5 8 Setting Performance Conditions Note Software break conditions and software sequential break conditions are ignored 174 RENESAS 5 6 Realtime Trace Functions The emulator provides realtime trace functions of two types the external bus trace and the internal trace In the external bus trace information is acquired in bus cycle units Information on up to 131 070 cycles can be acquired to a trace memory In the internal trace information on branches in the user program is acquired Information on up to 1024 branches can be acquired A total of up to 65 535 lines of information can be displayed in the HDI s Trace window For details on the Trace window refer to the manual for the Hitachi Debugging Interface in the CD R 5 6 1 External Bus Trace Function Dedicated hardware is used
36. if you select the range H D8000 to H DBFFF the corresponding switch number will be 6 Define the memory area so that Windows 95 or Windows 98 does not use the area as follows e Click Memory in the Reserve Resources panel and click Add The Edit Resource Setting dialog box will be displayed e Enter the memory area addresses in Start value and End value and click OK e Shut down the host computer do not restart it and turn off the power switch e Power on the host computer e Check that the area selected in the Computer Properties dialog box are displayed as System Reserved in the list The next step prevents the memory area for the PC interface board being accessed by another program Modify the CONFIG SYS file Use the SYSEDIT program to edit the file e Select Run from the Start menu e Type SYSEDIT and click OK The SYSEDIT will start When EMM386 EXE is used in the CONFIG SYS file the CONFIG SYS file must be modified If the CONFIG SYS file is not used or if EMM386 EXE is not used even when the CONFIG SYS file is used go to the following procedure and modify the SYSTEM_INI file e Locate the line in the CONFIG SYS file that reads device C WINDOWS EMM386 EXE RAM 47 RENESAS Change the line so that it reads as shown below device C WINDOWS EMM386 EXE RAM X aaaa bbbb Here aaaa is the upper four digits of Start value and
37. type stop Trace stop lt mode gt Keyword Enables or disables hardware sequential trace stop enable Enabled disable Disabled 324 RENESAS Description of the tas command lt option gt Specify one or more conditions Parameter lt addropt gt Description Specifies an address condition To specify an address as a trace condition address lt address gt not vpmap To specify an address range as a trace condition address lt address1 gt to lt address2 gt not vpmap To mask address data address mask lt maskdata gt not vpmap lt address gt Address numeric lt address1 gt Start address numeric lt address2 gt End address numeric lt maskdata gt Mask value numeric Add not to specify an address or range outside which the user program should be traced However do not add not when lt type gt is c Add vpmap to the specification to trace the user program at the address as translated by the VP_MAP table If the VP_MAP table is disabled or vpmap is not specified the physical addresses will be used lt dataopt gt Specifies a data condition Valid when lt type gt is a or b Specification data lt data gt not lt data gt Specifies a data value numeric lt data gt corresponds to the data value of the data bus D31 to DO Always specify a 32 bit data size To trace the user program at values within a smaller range of bits specify a mask value Add not to the specifi
38. use Hitachi makes every attempt to ensure that its products are of high quality and reliability However contact Hitachi s sales office before using the product in an application that demands especially high quality and reliability or where its failure or malfunction may directly threaten human life or cause risk of bodily injury such as aerospace aeronautics nuclear power combustion control transportation traffic safety equipment or medical equipment for life support Design your application so that the product is used within the ranges guaranteed by Hitachi particularly for maximum rating operating supply voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation conditions and other characteristics Hitachi bears no responsibility for failure or damage when used beyond the guaranteed ranges Even within the guaranteed ranges consider normally foreseeable failure rates or failure modes in semiconductor devices and employ systemic measures such as fail safes so that the equipment incorporating Hitachi product does not cause bodily injury fire or other consequential damage due to operation of the Hitachi product This product is not designed to be radiation resistant No one is permitted to reproduce or duplicate in any form the whole or part of this document without written approval from Hitachi Contact Hitachi s sales office for any questions regarding this document or Hitachi semiconductor products IMPORTANT IN
39. user s manual documents in Japanese Manuals Japanese HS7751TM81HJ pdf Descriptive notes on the PDF i diagnostic program for the documents in SH7751 E8000S emulator Japanese Manuals English HS6400DIIW5SE pdf Hitachi Debugging PDF Interface user s manual documents in English Manuals English HS7751EBH81HE pdf SH7751 E8000S emulator PDF user s manual documents in English Manuals English HS7751TM81HE Descriptive notes on the PDF pdf 4 diagnostic program for the documents in SH7751 E8000S emulator English Pdf_read Japanese Ar500jpn exe Acrobat Reader 5 0 Japanese installer version Pdf_read English Ar500enu exe Acrobat Reader 5 0 English installer version Notes 1 RENESAS Installed on your host computer by the installer 17 2 This is the Japanese version of the manual It cannot be installed by the English language version of the installer 3 indicates a manual revision 4 This is the English version of the manual It cannot be installed by the Japanese language version of the installer 5 Use the Acrobat Reader to see PDF documents 2 3 System Configuration The E8000S emulator must be connected to a host computer via the selected PC interface board 2 3 1 System Configuration Using a PC Interface Board The E8000S emulator can be connected to a host computer via a PC interface board options ISA bus PCI bus or PCMCIA bus Install the PC interfac
40. 1 IC socket _ NQPACK256SE manufactured by Tokyo Eletech Corporation t oa User system Figure C 5 Installing the MPU 369 7tENESAS 370 RENESAS Appendix D MPU Internal Module Support D 1 Memory Space D 1 1 Internal I O Area If an attempt is made to access the internal I O area the internal I O area in the MPU installed in the emulator is accessed To break the user program execution when the internal I O area is written to or accessed use the internal break D 1 2 External Memory Area The MPU external memory area can be set with all memory attributes that the emulator supports 371 RENESAS D 2 Low Power Consumption Modes Sleep and Standby For reduced power consumption the MPU has sleep and standby modes D 2 1 Sleep and Standby Modes e Break The sleep and standby modes can be cleared with either the normal clearing function or with the break condition satisfaction forced break and the user program breaks When restarting after a break the user program will restart at the instruction following the SLEEP instruction e Trace Trace information is not acquired in these modes e Memory access with emulator functions For information on displaying and modifying the contents of memory in the sleep and standby modes refer to section 3 Precautions before Use in the SH7751 E8000S Emulator Notes on Usage D 3 Interrupts During the normal execution and step exe
41. 10 cycles after bus cycles in which hardware break and hardware break conditions were satisfied during emulation The trigger signal is output until the end of the subsequent bus cycle If the conditions are satisfied over consecutive bus cycles the trigger output remains low TIT2 TAT2TAT2T M27 1T2T 127727 127 T2727 127 127 12 WAIT states OWAIT CKIO J UL ULI UU Exernal clock 83 5 MHz a OOCOOOUDOCCaS A TRIG 263 va gt 4 Hardware break condiition trace condition satisfaction cycle Figure 5 88 Pulse Output Timing Note No pulse is output from the trigger output probe when a software break condition is satisfied In addition the timing of the pulse output and the pulse width differ according to the condition 248 7tENESAS 5 12 Memory Spaces and VP_MAP Translation 5 12 1 The Allocation of Emulation Memory In the emulator the user can use 4 Mbytes one of standard emulation memory in memory spaces CSO to CS6 Also by using the optional memory board the user can use a maximum of 16 Mbytes of emulation memory in two 8 Mbyte areas Use the Memory Mapping dialog box to set up this emulation memory Select Memory from Configure Map The Memory Mapping dialog box will be displayed Memory Mapping x From To Mapping QOOUOOU0 OOSFFFFF EMULATION AREA 32 bi
42. 100304 direction write Break Condition A3 Disable Break Condition A4 Disable Break Condition A5 Enable address H 10027c not prb 0101 Break Condition A6 Disable Break Condition A7 Disable Break Condition A8 Disable 9 To enable the condition of Break Condition B3 BCE B CHANNEL 3 ENABLE 10 To disable all conditions of Break Condition A BCE A DISABLE 277 RENESAS 11 To clear the condition set to channel 3 of Break Condition B BCC B CHANNEL 3 12 To clear all conditions of Break Condition A BCC A 13 To set sequential point when a hardware sequential break is set to Break Condition A Address bus value H 100000 BCS A CHANNEL P ADDRESS H 100000 14 To set a reset point when a hardware sequential break is set to Break Condition A Address bus value H 300000 BCS A CHANNEL R ADDRESS H 300000 15 To display the conditions when a hardware sequential break is set to Break Condition A BCD A Display gt BCD A Break Condition A Sequential Enable 1 address H 100000 2 address H 200000 R address H 200000 16 To disable the condition when a hardware sequential break is set to Break Condition A BCE A DISABLE 17 To clear the condition when a hardware sequential break is set to Break Condition A BCC A Notes 1 When a Break Condition is satisfied emulation may stop after two or more instructions have been executed 2 Set an address condition to the external area A break will not occur in the inter
43. 32 bit value When the internal trace type is LDTLB LDTLB is displayed here Time Stamp Number of branch instruction repetitions Source The source code line corresponding to the displayed address Clicking in the Source column activates the Source window and jumps to the corresponding line When the internal trace type is I O nothing is displayed Notes 1 If the MMU is enabled the opcode or operand may be incorrect if the virtual address space from the time when branch information was acquired from the MPU and emulation was halted is different 2 Displays 32 bits of data even when the internal I O address is being accessed in byte units Determine the width of data from the address being accessed 3 The opcode and operand will not be displayed when acquired during program execution 204 RENESAS 5 6 5 Trace Search Functions The emulator has two functions for searching for trace information as shown in table 5 74 Table 5 74 Trace Search Functions Search Function Description Trace Filter Displays all trace information that satisfies the specified conditions Trace Find Jumps to the next record of trace information that satisfies the specified conditions Trace Filter Function This function displays all trace information that satisfies the conditions specified in the Trace window The search conditions can be specified in the Trace Filter dialog box A search in the records of an external bus trace is
44. 73 Memory Mapping Dialog Box before Setting eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceseenaeenaes 75 Add Memory Mapping Dialog BOX sssessessesesrsseesssreesssreerssesreesesresresrenreseeressesreeresre 76 Memory Mapping Dialog Box at Setting s eseessesessseesssresrrsereresrrrrerrrrreresrreresene 76 Load Program Dialog BOX i ceececesceeceeesseceeeeecaeceeneecaeceeeeecaeceeeeeesaeceeeeecnaeeenees 77 HDI Dialog BoXo areena neater Ae ed Geos REEE eee 78 Open Dialog BOX x tcsccsecscasssodatasctceseasusvseracceesean sean cengessesdurevaegaiesesexteperevsmmasterssessueesers 78 Source Window Displaying the Source Program 0 cece eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 79 Source Window Setting a Software Breakpoint eseesseeeseesssersesrsesesesrsesrsseesress 80 Source Window Break State cccccccccsssececseccecesssececseeeeecsneeeeesseeeessaeeesseeeeenes 81 System Status Window ce ceececeseceenceceseceeceeceseeeeneecaeeeeceecaeeesneecsaeeeeaeecsaeeeeneee 82 Breakpoints Window israse ernen haces E e a Aa AEE E ES 83 Open Memory Window Dialog BOX ssssessssesssseesesreesssersresrsrreresreerssrrrreserrresesresese 84 Long Memory WindoW seessssesesseesesreeseserressrsresresreersseerreserresrrsrenteseeereserresresreeree 84 Instant Watch Dialog BOX e seesseeseeseeeseseesserssrssrssserereresssessresstessresseesteseeesessseesse 85 Watch Window Window Displaying the Array cece eeeeeseec
45. AUDCK 234 VSSQ 248 VSSQ 207 VDDQ 221 VDDQ 235 DACKO 249 VDD PLL2 208 VSSQ 222 VSSQ 236 DACK1 250 VSS PLL2 209 VDD 223 AUDATAO 237 DRAKO 251 VDD PLL1 210 VSS 224 AUDATA1 238 DRAK1 252 VSS PLL1 211 MD2 RXD2 225 VDD 239 VDD 253 VDD CPG 212 RXD 226 VSS 240 VSS 254 VSS CPG 213 TCLK 227 AUDATA2 241 STATUSO 255 XTAL 214 MD8 RTS2 228 AUDATA3 242 STATUSI 256 EXTAL RENESAS 357 B 2 Recommended Dimensions for the User System Connector A WARNING The screw holes for fastening this evaluation chip board are connected to the GND of the user system board When designing the user system board check that the spacers nuts and washers do not touch any part of the pattern other than GND or any parts on the user system Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and damage the user system or emulator Also the USER PROGRAM will be LOST Bottom view of HS7751EBH81H Figure B 1 shows the recommended dimensions for the mount pad footprint of the 256 pin QFP IC socket NQPACK256SE manufactured by Tokyo Eletech Corporation and the positions of the holes for fastening the evaluation chip board The holes for fastening the evaluation chip board are connected to GND of the user system board When the grounded pattern runs to the screw hole positions the ground line is reinforced and stable operation can be expected during high speed emulation 358 RENESAS 4 0 External fr
46. BE ENABLE To clear the software breakpoint that has been set at address H C000000 in the virtual address space that has ASID H O BC H C000000 SPACE VIRTUAL ASID H O To clear the software breakpoints that have been set at address H CO00000 in the virtual address space BC H C000000 SPACE VIRTUAL 10 To clear all software breakpoints set at address H C000000 BC H C000000 11 To clear all software breakpoints BC Notes The user cannot execute these commands if the user executes commands that refer to memory and the emulator satisfies the pass count at the same time while the emulator halts trace In this case the emulator will display error message EMULATOR BUSY so the user must enter the command again When the user modifies memory contents by loading user program the emulator will clear breakpoints When the user executes step the execution does not break at software breakpoints and the emulator will not increment the pass count When the emulator executes the instructions set by this command the user cannot use Break Condition U4 Therefore the user must not set a software breakpoint to the instruction that satisfies Break Condition U4 When the user sets a software breakpoint in a slot instruction in a delay branch instruction the emulator will stop the user program execution however the PC value will be incorrect The user must not set a software breakpoint to a slot instructions in a delay branch instruc
47. Configuration Items of the Memory Mapping Dialog BoX eee 250 Configuration Items of the Edit Add Memory Mapping Dialog Box 251 Settings for Memory Type Available in the Setting Combo Box 251 Address Translation Tables eee eeeeecsecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecesesaesaessaeseesaeeas 254 Display Format in Stack Trace WindOw ceeeeseesecesecese cess cee caeeeaeeeneeeeeees 256 Stack Trace Window Pop up Menu Options 000 0 eee eeeeeeeceseceeceeetseeeaeeeee 257 XV RENESAS Table 5 108 Stack Trace Setting Dialog Box Options eee cece esse esac ener cee eeeeeeeeeeeees 257 Table 5 109 Dialog Boxes for Setting Auto Update Memory Items eee eeeeeeeee eens 258 Table 5 110 Address Mask Specification eee cee seeeeeeeeeeeeceeeceecesecsaecsaecsaesseeeseeeaeeeneeeas 264 Table 5 111 BP Column Display Item occ ecceeeeeeecesecesecaeceeceaecaecsaecsuesaeeeaeeeneeees 265 Table 6 1 List of Command s cc 05 sccsesceseveees oeeeesanvunebcacecisn este EE E E EEE ESS 269 Table 7 1 Error MeSSages cscsssccsseccsssdenssizsagasecsedatiscnssonsvss suensedsadeesncobbendbdenseasessodoniedseasesennoienbe 341 Table 7 2 IDE Ertor Messages siccccscceesecsceeees ee ech cules EEE E cues E E E 343 Table A 1 Bus Timing when Using the Emulator Bus Clock 83 5 MHZ c escesseeseeeseees 347 Table B 1 Pin Arrangement on the 256 pin QFP FP 256G IC Socket 0 eeeeeeseeeeneeeneeees 355 Table D 1 Emulator State and Op
48. Description 5 2 Operating mode setting Sets the operating conditions for the emulator 5 3 Realtime emulation Emulates execution in realtime 5 4 Step execution Emulation with step execution 5 5 Break Ten types of break function are provided 5 6 Realtime trace Acquires searches for and displays tracing information 5 7 Execution time Measures the total execution time of the user program measurement 5 8 Performance analysis Displays measurements of the user program s efficiency of execution and measurements of profile data during execution 5 9 Interrupt function Controls interrupts during emulation command input wait state 5 10 Informational display Displays the various items set in each dialog box 5 11 Trigger output Outputs a low level pulse on the trigger output probe 5 12 Memory allocation and Allocation of emulation memory and address translation using VP_MAP translation the VP_MAP tables 5 13 Stack trace Displays the history of function calls 5 14 Auto update memory A display of memory contents is updated every 500 ms during execution of the user program 5 15 MPU control and status Checks the clock inputs to the emulator and the user system check 99 RENESAS 5 2 Setting the Emulator s Operating Conditions The user must set the operating conditions before using the emulator Table 5 2 lists the settings Table 5 2 Setting the Emulator s Operating Conditions Setting Item Description Emulator setting Clock Sele
49. During the HDI initiation the following messages are shown on the status bar of the HDI window 57 RENESAS Driver Link up Check Start NM g a Hardware Register Read Write amp System ID Check Start O NUM J Figure 3 23 Status Bar during the HDI Initiation A message box will be displayed to ask whether to initiate the diagnostic program when Diagnostic Test Program has been selected in the component selection dialog box when the HDI was installed Click the Yes button to initiate the diagnostic program For details refer to section 3 7 4 Operating Procedure for the Diagnostic Program Link up appears on the status bar when the HDI and the emulator have successfully started up E A ee Figure 3 24 Status Bar at the HDI Initiation Completion After Link up has completed and when HDI is started for the first time the following message box will be displayed From hereafter the same message box will not be displayed DI Are you sure you want to modify your CPU Operating Mode settings This will cause your emulator to be reinitialised Figure 3 25 CPU Operating Mode Modification Message Mode 1 Click Yes to display the CPU Operating Mode dialog box In this dialog box the operating mode of the E8000S can be modified When the E8000S cannot be initiated correctly the following message box will be displayed Click Yes to display the CPU Operating Mode dialog box The operating mode must be modif
50. Enable or Disable BREAKSEQUENCE_ENABLE BSE Command syntax and parameters Setting bss lt address1 gt lt address2 gt lt address3 gt space lt space gt asid lt asid gt reset lt address8 gt space lt space gt asid lt asid gt Cancellation bsc Display bsd Enable or Disable bse lt mode gt Parameter Type Description lt address1 gt Numeric Sets the address of the first pass point When the user sets an odd address it is rounded down to an even address lt address2 gt Numeric Sets the address of the second pass point lt address3 gt Numeric Sets the addresses of the third pass point and subsequent points The user can set up to seven pass points lt address8 gt Numeric Sets the address of the reset point lt space gt Keyword Sets the address space of the pass point physical Physical address space virtual Virtual address space lt asid gt Numeric Sets the ASID value of the pass point within the range from H 0 to H FF When the user sets keyword virtual to parameter lt space gt the user must set an ASID value lt mode gt Keyword Enables or disables software sequential breakpoints enable Enables breakpoint setting disable Disables breakpoint setting 290 RENESAS Description Setting This command sets software sequential breakpoints When the emulator executes the user program from the first pass point address the emulator will pass
51. FUnction eceeeecescesecsecssecseecseeeseseeeeeeeseeesseeseeesecaecsaesseeeaeeenes 215 5 8 1 Measuring with E8000S Station Function ee ee ceeeceseceecssecseeceeeeeeseeees 215 5 8 2 MPU Internal Performance Function eee cece eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecssecsaeenaes 231 5 8 3 Profile Data Measurement Function eee ee eecceesceeeceeeceeceseceaecsaeceeeeeeneeees 236 MANGS LUPUS aroei A E a ERRE aE E EEE E EOE A E EOE 242 5 9 1 When No Interrupt is Processed During User Program Execution or in Command Input Wait State eseseseseseeeseeeeeseseereesrsrersrerrsserrrssertenesreereseeereseeees 242 5 9 2 When Interrupts are Processed During User Program Execution or in Command Input Wait State 0 eee cee cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseessecaecaecaessaeeaeeenes 242 Displaying Various Information ee ee ees ceee esse cseeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseceaecsaecsaesneeeaaeeaes 243 Trigger OUP UE iesean reaa E E E E EE E E EE AE E 248 Memory Spaces and VP_MAP Translation sseesssesesseeseeeeesesrrereserreeresreeresrerreserrresesreere 249 5 12 1 The Allocation of Emulation Memory sesssssessereeseeresreserrreresreeresrerrsreerrsresreeres 249 5122 VP MAP Translation a a a E aan aisa 251 Stack Trace MUNCH OMe iississecsessteense suceeded esncs cheostvedatasesexasaseevcebacesensenerseceantusexsapsueecaecceevoeges 256 Auto Update Memory Function 0 ec eceeceescesecesecesecssecseecaeeeaeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeseesaeesaeenaes 258 DATA OVERVIEW meoies nie
52. Group Box Options eee ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecaeeaeraeeaeees 197 External Bus Trace Information Items and Display Format in Trace Window 200 AUD Trace Information Items and Display Format in Trace Window 201 MPU Internal Trace Information Items and Display Format in Trace WdoWa e E E EEE E eee 204 Trace Search PUNCtiOns s ccceccescspsseepesseccevesstsearcssnsvscedeasennsssnsvsnnsotboaeuoreseessSeabeanes 205 General Page Options scrisese en r aer e sei 206 Trace Search Conditions and Pages in the Trace Filter Dialog Box 207 Time Page Optons cneou ieina eioan EEKE a E E ie TEk 209 AUD Internal Page Options s sssisiirsserorriesseerensusessrosiinreivseiieei so veneoeseir isi inoi 210 Measurement M deS nicinesereoensar eena en EEE EE a 216 Modes that are Available in the Performance to 8 Dialog Boxes 219 Pages of the Performance 1 to 8 Dialog BOX eee cece ceseceecneeeneeeneeenes 221 Options on the General Page eee eee eeeeeeeeeeceeeceseceeceeeesecsaecaetaecseeeaeeees 222 Options on the Address Page When Subroutine time measurement mode 1 2 ASO CICCUCC ieee a EAEE wut teeeesiete acetone 223 Options on the Address Page When Subroutine time measurement mode 3 IS SGICCLEC teri ccxses xs sevecelectvveccosetesesstsadysdhesvaidocee ueuenvestedcoecss luc E EEEE E Di 224 Options of the Time Out Page oo eee ee eeceeeceeeceeceaeceaecaecaeecaeeeaeseneeeeeee 225 Opti
53. H 1 lt space gt Keyword Sets the address space of a breakpoint physical Physical address space virtual Virtual address space lt asid gt Numeric Sets the ASID value of a breakpoint within the range from H 0 to H FF When the user specifies keyword virtual for parameter lt space gt the user must set the ASID value lt mode gt Keyword Enables or disables breakpoints enable Enables breakpoint setting disable Disables breakpoint setting Description Setting This command sets software breakpoints The emulator sets a software breakpoint by replacing the contents of the specified address with a break instruction H 003B Up to 255 software breakpoints can be set After the emulator passes the specified number of breakpoints it stops the execution of the user program Do not set software breakpoints to the following addresses 286 RENESAS An address whose memory content is H 003B The address where BREAKSEQUENCE_ SET was set Areas other than CSO through CS6 except for the internal RAM area Instructions that satisfy Break Condition U4 refer to the fourth item in Notes below Slot instruction of the delay branch instruction refer to the fifth item in Notes below Cancellation This command clears software breakpoints that have been set When lt address gt is omitted all of the set breakpoints will be cleared Display This command displays software breakpoints that
54. Hitachi Debugging Interface in the CD R Table 5 21 Break Functions Type Software break Description The contents of the specified address are replaced by a break instruction at dedicated instruction for use with the emulator and the program is then executed When the break instruction is executed a break occurs Break Point is displayed under Type in the Breakpoints window Software sequential break An order for the satisfaction of conditions can be specified for software breakpoints When all of the specified conditions have been satisfied in the specified order a break occurs Up to seven pass points in order of satisfaction and one reset point can be specified Break Sequence is displayed under Type in the Breakpoints window Hardware break This type of break is generated by the dedicated hardware in the emulator Conditions can be specified as Break Condition A B and C and when one of these conditions has been satisfied a break occurs Break Condition Xn X A B or C n number is displayed under Type in the Breakpoints window Hardware sequential break 128 An order of satisfaction can be specified for hardware break conditions too Break Condition A or B When all of the specified conditions have been satisfied in the specified order this kind of break occurs Break Condition X Sequential X A or B is displayed under Type in the Breakpoints window RENESAS Table
55. LDTLB instruction execution Breaks when an LDTLB instruction is executed Note Either an address bus condition or a PC condition can be specified Six channels of Break Condition U can be used in total a maximum of eight channels when the user break controller is used Note that Break Condition U5 is a dedicated condition for breaking on access to the internal I O area and Break Condition U6 is a dedicated condition for breaking on the execution of a LDTLB instruction Internal break conditions that can be specified by Break Condition U1 to U6 are shown in table 5 44 162 RENESAS Table 5 44 Specifiable Internal Break Conditions Break Break Break Break Break Condition Condition U1 Conditions U2 Condition U5 Condition U6 U7 to U4 U8 Address bus o o xX X PC X X Data bus o X X X Read Write oO oO X X ASID O O X X Access type o o X X Internal I O area x X O X access LDTLB instruction X X X O execution Notes O Can be specified X Cannot be specified 1 Either an address bus condition or a PC condition can be specified 2 These conditions are not available when a PC condition has been specified 163 RENESAS Setting an Internal Break The setting of Break Condition U1 is taken as an example Select Add from the pop up menu on the Breakpoints window and the Break dialog box will appear Select the Condition U page Point Sequence Condition 4 ConditionB Condi
56. PAIS PAIC PAD ceeceeeeessseeeeeees 317 6 2 18 REFRESH RE cccccccccecssceceessececesececeesseeecsesaeeeceeeeeesssaeeecsesaeeecsueeeeessnseeeneaaes 321 6 2 19 STATUS STS Jea AE ai EER TAR E E REEERE E AE EAEE EERE 322 6 2 20 Trace Condition Command TAS TAC TAD ccccccsscccececeesssseceeeeeeeees 324 62 21 TRACE DISPLAY TD praene E EE EE 330 6 2 22 TRACE_MODE TM ccccccecesssececessceceesneeecssseececseeecessaeeecsesaeeeseeeeseesaeeeesenaees 331 6 22 23 TRACE SEARCH TS eiia nipaakar AEE EEES 335 6 2 24 Address Translation Table Command VS VC VD VE ssesssssesssssssessesesseseseee 338 vi RENESAS Section 7 Error MESS AGS 8 ccs seicsanacsuccvincunedunasdincecutoantennaeuerneartandendeduesteasnenennenies 341 7 1 Emulator Error Messages of the E8000S Emulator cece eeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseesseesaes 341 7 2 HDI Error Messages Related to the emulator eee ee eeceseceecseeceeecaeecaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneens 343 7 3 Error Messages for the LAN Driver cies cseeseeeeeeeeeeeseeseceseceseceaecaecaecaeesaeeeneeeas 346 Appendix A User System Interface age tectcceteccsscetetasscd nace Rie iedadetindeeeannniies 347 A l User System Interface Circuit 00 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseceseceaecsaecsaecaeecaeecaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseas 347 Appendix B Preparations for Assembling the User System Board 355 B 1 Pin Arrangement on the User Interface 0 0 eceecceeeceeeceeeceseceeeeseenseesaessaecsaeraeeeaeeeas 355 B
57. RENESAS 3 6 Initiating the HDI and Checking the E8000S Emulator The next step is to check that the emulator and the HDI are initiated correctly Turn on the emulator after confirming that the S7 and S8 DIP switches of SW1 on the emulator are turned on Select SH7751 E8000S Emulator Software Hitachi Debugging Interface from Programs of the Start menu Programs Al Hitachi Debugging Interface 09 Z cS H Figure 3 20 Start Menu Initiating the HDI The Select Session dialog box will be displayed Select the target emulator name in the combo box then click the OK button 56 RENESAS Select Session Ed ord SH7751 E8000S Emulator p Exit Previous session file Figure 3 21 Select Session Dialog Box When the HDI is started up for the first time a Driver Details dialog box will be displayed Use Driver to select the right driver for the connected interface PC interface board PCI interface board PC interface card or LAN adapter and click the Close button Refer to table 3 4 Types of Connections and Drivers The example below is when the emulator is to be connected to the PC interface via the ISA bus In this case the Emulator ISA Driver is selected Driver Details Driver Emulator ISA Driver v Octalls e Interface ISA Channel d000 d3 f Configuration Contigure wow ese Figure 3 22 Driver Details Dialog Box When ISA Bus is Selected
58. RENESAS 5 4 5 4 1 Step Functions Step Execution Several types of step execution are available and are shown in table 5 20 Table 5 20 Step Execution Type Executing each instruction of a function as a single step Description Executes each line or instruction as one step When a function is called the call is executed and execution stops at the first line or instruction of the called function Procedure Click the Step In button Select Step In from the Run menu Executing all instructions of a function as a single step Executes each line or instruction as one step until a function is called When a function is called all instructions of the called function are executed as a single step and execution stops at the line or instruction immediately after the calling line or instruction This style of step execution is only possible in the RAM area in the user system or in an area allocated to the emulation memory Click the Step Over button Select Step Over from the Run menu Executing a specified number of steps Executes the specified number of steps Note The specified address must be the start of an instruction If for example the address of the second byte of an instruction is specified execution will not stop and the specified number of steps will still be executed Click the Step dialog button specify the number of steps in Steps in the Step Progr
59. Table 5 111 BP Column Display Item Displayed Item Contents No display Nothing is set Break A software break is set PASS A pass point for a software sequential break is set RESET A reset point for a software sequential break is set Notes 1 When a software breakpoint is set in the BP column the satisfaction count is 1 and the address space is Normal 2 Software sequential breakpoints PASS or RESET can be displayed and cancelled in the BP column but cannot be set in the BP column To set a software sequential breakpoint use the Break window or the BSS command 3 Software and software sequential breakpoints are displayed in the BP column in such a way that the addresses match regardless of the specified address spaces 4 When software breakpoints are cancelled in the BP column all of the software breakpoints that match those addresses are also cancelled regardless of the specified address spaces 265 RENESAS 266 RENESAS Section 6 Command Line 6 1 List Format Section 6 1 explains the format for the command line list Some commands are explained on a single page Some commands are explained over several pages 6 1 1 Description Entries are in the following format Command name abbreviation Command syntax and parameters Shows input format for each command Description Describes the usage and function of each command Examples Example of usage Notes Notes on using the command So
60. Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 5 5 Table 5 6 Table 5 7 Table 5 8 Table 5 9 Table 5 10 Table 5 11 Table 5 12 Table 5 13 Table 5 14 Table 5 15 Table 5 16 Table 5 17 Table 5 18 Table 5 19 Table 5 20 Table 5 21 Table 5 22 Table 5 23 Table 5 24 Environmental Conditions 00 0 0 cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceseceecesecaecsaecaaecaeesseseaeeeeeeeeseeeees 5 Operating Environment cece cece ese cseeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseesecaeeaecsaecsaecsaecneesaeeeneeees 6 E8000S Station Components HS8000EST 11H ou eee eeeceeceteceeeeeenneeceeeeeenaeeeees 7 Device Control Board Components 000 0 ee eee eceesseeeceseceseceseceecesecssecnaecaeceeeaeeenes 7 Evaluation Chip Board Components for the SH775 1 ooo eee ee eee ceee cee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 Optional Component Specifications eee ee ces cese cee cesessecseeceecaeecseeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 Contents Of CIDER siegen aeeoeia aE oana Ae EEE vesusetsctenaces tensions 16 Contents of CD R Cont eeina ERA EE EEA A Eai 17 PC Interface Board Specifications sesessseseeseeseseeesesrertsesreeresrerreserrenrsrenresreerees 42 Switch Settings for Memory Areas esseseeseessesesrereeresreereserrrsrerreeresreeresenrrererreeresre 44 Contents of Emulator System Programs eessssesesseesrseesesrrererrrreersreeresrerresenrreresre 50 Types of Connection and Drivers ec cee eee cseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeceseceseceaeesaeeaeenaeenes 51 DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM Dialog BOX sssssseessssesssseesrsreerer
61. To break the user program when the NMI signal is low nmi low lt irlopt gt Specifies IRLO to IRL3 signal conditions This parameter can be used when lt type gt is a or b To specify IRLO to IRL3 signal conditions irl lt bit specification gt Specify each bit as follows To specify bits IRLO to IRL3 3 2 1 0 Bit location x x x xX Value to be specified Specify 0 low level or 1 high level for x 3 2 1 0O IRL number When is specified the condition of its bit location is not cared lt countopt gt Specifies the pass count that satisfies the break condition This parameter can be used when lt type gt is a or b To specify pass count count lt value gt Any value from 1 to H FFFF can be specified as lt value gt lt delayopt gt Specifies the number of bus cycles to be executed after the break condition is satisfied This parameter can be used when lt type gt is a or b and lt channel_number gt is 7 To specify the number of bus cycles to be executed delay lt value gt Any value from 1 to H 7FFF can be specified as lt value gt 275 RENESAS Description Setting This command specifies hardware break conditions Break Condition A B C The emulator stops program execution when the specified conditions are satisfied For details on conditions refer to the description of lt option gt in the BCS command When the user specifies a hardware sequential break sequential points and reset points can be set
62. U3 gt 2 gt 1 Internal sequential break mode 2 Sequential break mode U4 gt 3 gt 2 gt 1 Internal sequential break mode 3 172 RENESAS 5 5 7 Forced Break A user program can be forcibly terminated by clicking the Stop button or by selecting Halt from the Run menu The system will leave trace halt mode if trace halt mode has been specified 5 5 8 Forced Break on Writing to a Write Protected Area A break occurs when an emulation memory area which the user has specified is write protected and written to during emulation 5 5 9 Break Due to Trace Buffer Overflow A break occurs when the external bus trace buffer overflows Select Break in Buffer Over Flow on the Trace Mode page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box Trace Acquisition x Trace Mode AUD Intemal Mode Condition A Condition B Condition C Bus Trace Buffer Over Flow Time Stamp 20ns v M SDRAM Access Cycle Cancel Apply Help Figure 5 44 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Trace Mode Page 173 RENESAS 5 5 10 Timeout Break A break occurs when the execution time or number of passes exceeds the conditions specified on the respective pages of Performance Analysis 1 Select Timeout break of Performance analysis from Emulation mode in the Configuration dialog box General Execution Model Execution Mode Loading flash memory CPU Operating Mode CPU SH7751 Clock l Emulator Clock 27 8MHz
63. WMI RES SLP VCC PRB Time Stamp Clock a 000005 00000844 23000009 R llll 1 1 1 l 1111 000H00M00S019967U 000002 MEMORY W 00002801 000004 00000848 00430009 R llll 1 l 1 l 1111 000H00M00S019968U 000001 S TRACE 00000848 f 000003 00002801 eragtter W J112 ol l 1 l 1111 000H00M00S019968U 000002 0000084c afe00009 R JIll 1 1 1 l 1111 000H00M00S019969U 000000 BRANCH 0000084c Bl DESTINATION 00000810 MC 000001 00000850 000b0009 R 1111 1 1 1 l 1111 oOOOHOOMOOSO1S969U__y 000000 00000810 60120009 R 12111 1 l 1 l 1111 000H00M00S019969U y WZ Figure 5 62 Trace Window Display of Both External Bus and AUD Trace Information MPU Internal Trace Display Select Internal trace in the Display combo box to display MPU internal trace information The range for display can be specified by setting the start and end pointers in units of branch instructions instruction pointers under Start and End on the General page of the Trace Filter dialog box The header for MPU internal trace display is the same as that of external bus trace display Trace 35 records no filter ojx R W IRL NMI RES SLP VCC PRB DESTINATION 00000834 TRAPA H 00 000005 BRANCH 00000836 NOP DESTINATION 00000100 RTE 000004 BRANCH 00000100 RTE DESTINATION 00000836 NOP 000003 BRANCH 0000084c BRA L00 12 DESTINATION 00000810 MOV L GR1 RO 000002 I o ffso000ze 00000000 000001 Ifo ffs000zc 00000000 000000 LDTLB 00000818 LDTLE Figure 5 63 Trace Wi
64. a Satisfaction Count Condition Specified Figure 5 20 shows an example of the operation of a hardware break when an address bus condition and delay condition have been specified Break condition H 50 bus cycles are executed after the address H 2000 User program prog is accessed Program flow Break condition is satisfied No break occurs t H 50 bus cycles Break occurs H 50 bus ae cycles after the satisfaction of the condition Figure 5 20 Example of a Hardware Break with Delay Condition Specified Break Conditions A B and C Eight channels for each condition 24 channels in total The conditions available for specification as Break Conditions A B and C are shown in table 5 27 142 RENESAS Table 5 27 Specifiable Hardware Break Conditions Break Condition A Break Condition B Break Condition C Break Condition 1 to 8 1 to 8 1 to 8 Address bus O O O Data bus O O X Read Write O O X External probe O O X External interrupt O O X Satisfaction count O O X Delay O O X Note O Can be specified X Cannot be specified The delay condition is only available for Break Conditions A7 and B7 Setting a Hardware Break The setting of Break Condition A7 is taken as an example Place the cursor in the Breakpoints window then click the right hand mouse button to display the window s pop up menu Select Add from the menu and the Break dialog box will appear Select the Con
65. a break occurs when the LDTLB instruction is executed Can only be specified when lt channel_numbers gt is 6 Idtlb Breaks when the LDTLB instruction is executed When omitted break does not occur Description Setting Sets an internal break condition When the specified condition is satisfied the user program execution breaks For conditions that can be set see the description of BCUS command lt option gt A sequential break can be specified by using an internal break Specifying sb1 sb2 or sb3 with the GO_OPTION command can set up to four levels of internal sequential breaks that use Break Condition U1 to U4 Specifying ube sbcu with the EXECUTION_MODE command can set an internal sequential break that uses Break Condition U7 and U8 Cancellation Cancels the current internal breakpoints When the channel number is omitted cancels all internal breakpoints Display Displays set internal breakpoints The internal breakpoints that will be displayed depend on the lt ubc gt setting with the EXECUTION_MODE command When lt ubc gt is set to ube user channels 1 to 6 are displayed and when set to ube bcu or ube sbcu channels 1 to 8 are displayed The display format is as follows Break Condition Un lt Enable Disable gt lt Settings gt n Number 1 to 6 when lt ubc gt is set to ube user and 1 to 8 when set to ube bcu or ubc sbcu Enable Disable Enables or disables current internal breakpoints When the channel number
66. and background colors of the window When Mayfly is selected the color is changed every time the contents of the window is updated To set the display format and display color use the Auto update Memory Edit dialog box After setting the required items click the OK button Auto update Memory Edit x History 7 Address H 00000000 Size D320 byte Format Byte Color Type Change Foreground M Mayfly Background Realtime BusWidth 32Bit YP_MAP OFF Details Cancel Hep Figure 5 96 Auto update Memory Edit Dialog Box 260 RENESAS Notes 1 In the situations listed below the user program will not be executed in realtime When Non Realtime Memory read is selected and more than one auto update memory item is set When an auto update memory item is set or modified while the user program is being executed When Format is modified while the user program is being executed When Non Realtime Memory read is selected the user program will be halted for approximately 10 8 ms at intervals of approximately 500 ms this is so when measured with Clock Mode 3 the JTAG clock running at 5 MHz emulation memory accessed in 32 bits in use and the emulator clock running at 13 9 MHz When an item is set in either of the below address ranges the contents will not be displayed correctly when Realtime parallel monitor is selected Select Non Realtime Memory read SDRAM and internal
67. b AUD Internal Page Use the AUD Internal page to specify the conditions for use in searching for AUD trace and MPU internal trace information General AUD Internal poo q1 T Don t Care Address Range Start Ho H o Nonusermask User mask Figure 5 66 Trace Filter Dialog Box AUD Internal Page Table 5 78 AUD Internal Page Options Option Description Don t Care No address bus conditions are set Address Sets the address bus values specified by Start or Mask as an internal trace search condition Range Sets the range of address bus values set by Start and End as an internal trace search condition Start Sets the start address bus value enter a numerical or symbolic value End Sets the end address bus value enter a numerical or symbolic value when Range is specified Non user mask No mask condition is set User mask Sets a mask condition Mask Sets the mask bits when Address or User mask is selected When a bit is masked it satisfies the condition regardless of its value When Range is selected this setting is disabled If no trace information matches the specified conditions no trace record will be displayed in the Trace window 210 RENESAS Trace Find Function This function makes the display jump to the trace information item that satisfies the specified conditions in the Trace window The search conditions can be spe
68. be satisfied to generate a break is the order in which they were added in the Sequence list box Click the WR button to add a reset point The reset point condition will be displayed to the right of Reset in the Sequence list box Click the OK button to return to the Condition A page and the hardware sequential break conditions will have been set The Sequential Condition list displays the hardware sequential break conditions that have been specified Click the OK button to close the Break dialog box For details on the creation of hardware break conditions refer to the description of the Entry List page under Displaying a History of Hardware Break Conditions and Creating a New Condition in section 5 5 3 Hardware Break 159 RENESAS Condition History Entry List address H 4000 3 address H 3000 Edit address H 2000 address H 1000 Delete Ent gt Duplicate Condition New __Est_ Sequence eset address H 4000 Figure 5 34 Condition Dialog Box Entry List Page Table 5 42 Entry List Page Options Option Description Condition Up to 32 conditions that have previously been created are displayed in a list New The Condition A B dialog box is displayed so that new conditions can be created Edit Selecting a condition to be modified from the Condition list then clicking the Edit button displays the Condition A B dialog box so that the condition can be
69. been selected in the AUD Internal Mode page but no condition has been specified in the AUD Trace group box Specify a condition and click the Apply button no instruction data Although an internal trace was selected in the Trace Mode page no conditions were selected in the Internal Trace group box Set a condition and click the Apply button Invalid parameter An illegal command parameter was input 345 RENESAS 7 3 Error Messages for the LAN Driver When the LAN adapter HS6000ELNO1H is used error messages of the following type may be output due to a network problem WSXXXXXXXX lt error message gt WSXXXXXXXX Error code xxxxxxxx is an alphanumeric string lt error message gt Error message that corresponds to the error code If such an error message is output consult your system manager 346 RENESAS Appendix A User System Interface A 1 User System Interface Circuit The circuits that interface the MPU in the emulator to the user system include buffers and resistors When connecting the emulator to a user system adjust the user system hardware compensating for FANIN FANOUT and propagation delays The AC timing values when using the emulator are shown in table A 1 Note The values with the emulator connected in table A 1 are measurements for reference but are not guaranteed values Table A 1 Bus Timing when Using the Emulator Bus Clock 83 5 MHz MPU Specifications ns It
70. break for External probe No 1 check box of the Configuration dialog box RESET signal Whether the input of a RESET signal is allowed the setting in the RESET signal check box of the Configuration dialog box BREQ signal Whether the input of a BREQ signal is allowed the setting in the BREQ signal check box of the Configuration dialog box RDY signal Whether the input of a RDY signal is allowed the setting in the RDY signal check box of the Configuration dialog box NMI signal Whether the input of an NMI signal is allowed the setting in the NMI signal check box of the Configuration dialog box SLEEP signal Whether the input of a SLEEP signal is allowed the setting in the SLEEP signal check box of the Configuration dialog box Output trigger TRGB The condition for the output of a pulse from the trigger output pin the setting in the TRGB Option group box of the Configuration dialog box User break controller Whether the MPU s on chip user break controller UBC is used by the E8000S the setting in the User break controller combo box of the Configuration dialog box Emulation mode The emulator s operating mode the setting in the Emulation mode combo box of the Configuration dialog box Prohibit R W on the fly Whether or not memory access is inhibited while the user program is being executed the setting in the Prohibit R W o
71. bus trace information in the Trace window 199 RENESAS Table 5 71 External Bus Trace Information Items and Display Format in Trace Window Item Description and Format No Line number in the Trace window Label Label name BP Bus cycle pointer The location of a bus cycle relative to the bus cycle where the delay condition has been satisfied Pointers are usually negative values XXXXXxX but when a delay condition has been specified as a break or trace condition the bus cycles during the delay period are positive XXXXXX AB 32 bit address bus values DB 32 bit data bus values in 4 bit units R W Whether the cycle was for reading or writing R read cycle W write cycle IRL IRLO to IRL3 signal state x3x2x1x0 xn is the state of IRLn 0 low level 1 high level NMI NMI signal state 0 low level 1 high level RES RESET signal state 0 low level 1 high level SLP SLEEP signal state 0 low level 1 high level VCC Voltage on V va 1 2 65 V or more 0 less than 2 65 V PRB External probe PRB signal state x4x3x2x1 xn is the state of PRBn 0 low level 1 high level Time Stamp Time stamp XxxHxxMxxSxxxxxxUxxxN H hour M minute S second U microsecond N nanosecond Clock Number of clock cycles from the end of the previous bus cycle to the end of the current bus cycle xx Hexadecimal value Up to 255 clock cycles can be counted When execution has continued for
72. clock 1 4 CPU clock Sets 1 4 CKIO as the AUD acquisition clock 1 8 CPU clock Sets 1 8 CKIO as the AUD acquisition clock Branch Trace Sets whether the branch trace information is acquired Software Trace Sets whether the software trace information is acquired Window Trace A Sets whether the window trace information is acquired from channel A Read Write Selects one of the following bus cycle conditions for window trace acquisition on channel A Read Trace acquisition of read cycles Write Trace acquisition of write cycles Read Write Trace acquisition of read and cycles Start Sets the start address of the memory range as a numerical or symbolic value for window trace acquisition on channel A End Sets the end address of the memory range as a numerical or symbolic value for window trace acquisition on channel A Window Trace B Sets whether the window trace information is acquired from channel B Read Write Selects one of the following bus cycle conditions for window trace acquisition on channel B Read Trace acquisition of read cycles Write Trace acquisition of write cycles Read Write Trace acquisition of read and cycles Start Sets the start address of the memory range as a numerical or symbolic value for window trace acquisition on channel B End Sets the end address of the memory range as a numerical or symbolic value for window trace acquisition on channel B Click the
73. correctly connected via the PC interface cable 3 7 2 Error Messages from the Emulator The emulator checks its internal RAM and registers from initiation of the HDI until Link up is displayed in the status bar This is a diagnostic function The emulator executes the diagnostic program when its power is turned on or when its system program is initiated After the emulator displays any of the error messages described below the emulator will display the Target Link Down dialog box and terminate the HDI session Internal RAM and registers are being tested The emulator checks its internal RAM and registers at power on If an error occurs either of the following error messages is displayed during HDI operation Error Message Description RAM ERROR ADDR xxxxxxxx The emulator checks its internal RAM and W DATA XxXxXxxxxx R DATA XxxxXxxxx registers at power on If an error occurs the address write data and read data are be displayed in the following form Xxxx REGISTER ERROR The emulator checks the registers of the W DATA xx R DATA xx emulator station and displays the message xxxx Name of the emulator internal register when an error occurs where an error occurs Note Operation continues if an error occurs but the error should be investigated according to section 3 7 Troubleshooting Procedure without loading the emulator system program 61 RENESAS System Program Start Up Next the emulator system program start
74. during execution of 1 6 us or 6 hours with a sampling interval during execution of 20 ns If the user specifies a time other than the available values the emulator will display instead of the setting 5 7 2 Measuring Execution Time between Satisfaction of Specified Conditions Break Condition B or Trace Condition B is used in the measurement of the execution time between the satisfaction of specified conditions The emulator will begin to measure the execution time when one condition set in Break Condition B1 to B8 or Trace Condition B1 to B8 dialog boxes is satisfied and stop measuring when another condition is satisfied The emulator will continue to start and stop measurement whenever the respective conditions are satisfied Example Condition 1 the condition can be set as Break Condition 1 or Trace Condition 1 Condition 2 the condition can be set as Break Condition 2 or Trace Condition 2 gt Condition 1 gt Condition 2 When conditions and 2 are satisfied in the above sequence the emulator will measure the execution of the user program in the following order Condition 1 start measurement Condition 2 end measurement Condition 1 start measurement Condition 2 end measurement The emulator will measure the sum of the periods of execution between satisfaction of conditions 1 and 2 in that order The following is an explanation of how to use this function Set the conditions for the start
75. exception branch instruction The exception branch instruction is the RTE instruction In addition all exception and interrupt operations are traced LDTLB instruction execution trace Traces and displays the addresses on which the LDTLB instruction is executed Internal I O access trace Traces and displays the addresses and data when the internal I O area is accessed MPU internal tracing has the two trace acquisition modes shown in table 5 66 192 RENESAS Table 5 66 MPU Internal Trace Acquisition Modes Acquisition Mode Description Realtime Acquires the trace information within up to eight branches in the trace buffer in realtime Continuous trace Continuously acquires trace information Execution of the user program is suspended for about 100 ms Then trace information is stored in the trace buffer Execution is then restarted Therefore emulation in realtime is not possible Information on up to 1024 branches can be acquired in continuous trace mode The internal I O access trace and LDTLB instruction execution trace are only possible in the continuous trace mode However Break Conditions U5 internal I O area access break and U6 LDTLB instruction execution break do not operate in continuous trace mode Select the Internal Trace radio button in the AUD Internal Mode page The options in the Internal Trace group box in the AUD Internal Mode page are described below Trace Acquisition x
76. execute the user program in realtime e When the emulator executes the user program from the instruction of the address set by this command the user cannot use Break Condition U4 immediately after the emulator executes the user program Therefore the emulator does not stop the user program execution when the conditions of Break Condition U4 are satisfied immediately after execution e When the user sets a software breakpoint to a slot instruction in a delay branch instruction the emulator will not stop the user program and will generate an illegal slot interrupt Therefore the user must not set a software breakpoint to slot instructions in a delay branch instruction e When the user executes step the emulator cannot count software breakpoints so the emulator will not increment the pass count e When the user modifies memory contents by loading user program the emulator will clear breakpoints 292 RENESAS 6 2 6 CHECK CHECK Command syntax and parameters check Description This command tests the MPU pin state When the emulator generates an error the following is displayed lt Pin name gt HIGH or LOW The following shows the pins to test the pin state Pin Name Error State IRLO Displays high or low IRLO pin state IRL1 Displays high or low IRL1 pin state IRL2 Displays high or low IRL2 pin state IRL3 Displays high or low IRL3 pin state NMI Displays high or low NMI pin state RDY Displays
77. for software software sequential hardware hardware elapsed time of sequential internal and internal sequential breaks are all ignored condition satisfaction PA mode e Trace acquisition conditions are ignored e Trace halt mode is not available Internal sequential Settings for software and software sequential breaks are ignored break mode Timeout break mode Settings for software and software sequential breaks are ignored Timeout trace stop Settings for software and software sequential breaks are ignored mode Break disabled mode Settings for software software sequential hardware hardware sequential internal internal sequential breaks are all ignored See table 5 21 for details on break conditions and see table 5 56 for details on trace acquisition conditions 123 RENESAS 5 3 2 Trace Halt Mode Function While in trace halt mode tracing is halted and this means that trace information cannot be acquired by the trace buffer During periods in trace halt mode emulation continues and is not suspended Entering trace halt mode trace halt mode can be entered in any of the following ways e Select Halt from the pop up menu of the Trace window e When emulation is in timeout trace stop mode trace halt mode is automatically entered when the condition set in Performance Analysis 1 is satisfied i e when the specified timeout period or number of passes has been exceeded e Trace halt mode is automatic
78. for the Program Counter in the Run dialog box specify an end address for Stop At in the Run dialog box then click the Go PC button More than one address can be specified as an end address Any of the various modes of emulation listed in table 5 16 can be specified by selecting Emulation mode from the General page of the Configuration dialog box RENESAS 121 Table 5 16 Emulation Modes Emulation Mode Description Cycle reset mode The emulator periodically inputs the RESET signal to the MPU during realtime emulation and execution from the reset state is thus periodically repeated When the RESET signal is input to the MPU a low level pulse is concurrently output on the trigger output probe This function is useful for observing waveforms from the initial state for example during a power on reset up to a specified time The reset intervals can be selected from among 6 5 us 9 8 us 50 us 100 us 500 us 1 ms 5 ms 10 ms 50 ms 100 ms 500 ms or 1 s Emulation mode Seiting Cycle Reset X X 6 5 us 9 8 us 50 us 100 us 500 us 1 ms 5 ms 10 ms 50 ms 100 ms 500 ms or 1s Internal sequential An internal sequential break can be specified break mode by using Break Condition U1 to U4 For details refer to section 5 5 6 Internal Sequential Break Break Condition U Sequential X X 1 2 or 3 Timeout break mode A break occurs when the Performance Analysis 1 Time Out specification
79. high or low RDY pin state MRESET Displays high or low MRESET pin state RESET Displays high or low RESET pin state BREQ Displays high or low BREQ pin state SLEEP Displays high or low SLEEP pin state CA Displays high or low CA pin state Example To test the MPU pin state CHECK The display format is as follows gt CHECK IRLO HIGH IRL1 HIGH IRL2 HIGH IRL3 HIGH NMI HIGH RDY HIGH MRESET HIGH RESET HIGH BREQ HIGH SLEEP HIGH CA HIGH RENESAS 293 6 2 7 CLOCK CK Command syntax and parameters e Setting ck lt mode gt e Display ck Parameter Type Description lt mode gt Keyword Selects the clock signal user Clock signal of user system 13 Emulator internal clock 13 9 MHz 27 Emulator internal clock 27 8 MHz 55 Emulator internal clock 55 6 MHz xtal Crystal oscillator of the emulator Description This command displays and sets clock signal used in the MPU The user can select whether to use the clock signal from the user system or clock in the emulator When the user selects a clock the emulator resets the MPU Therefore the internal I O registers and control registers hold the reset values This command displays the type of the clock signal that was set When the user selects user for the clock signal but the user system clock is not input from the user system the emulator will generate an error and select the emulator internal clock When the user turns
80. in the RAM area including the emulation memory However it is not possible to set a software breakpoint at an address that satisfies any of these conditions e The address holds H 003B e The address is used as part of a software sequential breakpoint e The address is in any area other than CS areas except the internal RAM area e The address holds an instruction which may satisfy Break Condition U4 140 RENESAS e The address of the delay slot for a delayed branch instruction Notes 1 When the number of passes or reset point is specified emulator firmware stops the program every time the program passes the address set as a break condition so that it can update its count of passes As a result the program does not operate in realtime it will stop about 100 ms When the program passes such an address the emulator executes the instruction at the address as a single step then returns to normal program execution Break Condition U4 becomes invalid during this single step execution 2 When a software breakpoint is set in the delay slot of a delayed branch instruction the value in the PC will become illegal Do not set a software breakpoint as the slot instruction after a delayed branch instruction 3 Do not allow the user program to modify values in memory at software sequential breakpoints 4 Software sequential breakpoints are ignored during step execution 5 5 3 Hardware Break Overview Hardware break functions ar
81. insert the CD R in the CD ROM drive If there are any applications running exit from them before installing the software Click Run from the Start menu The Run dialog box will be displayed Enter lt Drive name gt 775 setup exe and click the OK button lt Drive name gt is the drive letter for the CD ROM drive Proceed with installation by following the instructions displayed by the installation wizard 3 4 1 Setting Up the PC Interface Board on Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows Me When Using the PCI Interface Board e Install the provided software select PCI Card Driver when asked to select a component e Exit the operating system shut down the host computer and turn off the power switch e Install the PCI interface board into the host computer e Turn on the host computer The installed hardware will be detected and driver installation will start automatically e When asked to select how to install the driver select Search for the best driver for your device Recommended then select Specify a location for how to locate the driver e Enter lt drive gt 7751 DRIVERS PCI 95 for the search location where lt drive gt is the drive letter for the CD ROM drive e Check that PCIHEI Rev 1 has been found and complete the driver installation 37 RENESAS When Using the PC Interface Card Install the provided software select PC Card Driver PCMCIA when asked to select a component Instal
82. is assumed to be from H 1000 to H 13FF and the end address range to be from H 1C00 to H 1FFF While the user program is running the emulator will start to measure the execution time of the user program from the start address range H 1000 to H 13FF until the user program reaches the end address range H 1C00 to H l FFF When the emulator starts to measure the execution time of the user program it will not stop until the user program reaches the end address range H 1C00 to H 1 FFF or there is a break in the emulation of the user program Therefore the emulator will continue to measure the execution time when the user program jumps to address H 3000 218 RENESAS Address H 0000 Addresses H 1000 to H 13FF Start address range Addresses H 1FFF to H 1C00 End address range Address H OFFF Figure 5 72 Example of Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 3 A list of subroutine measurement modes that can be set in the Performance to 8 dialog box is shown in table 5 80 Table 5 80 Modes that are Available in the Performancel1 to 8 Dialog Boxes Mode Channel number for performance analysis 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Subroutine time 0 o o o o o o o measurement mode 1 Subroutine time o o o o o o o o measurement mode 2 Subroutine time o x o x o x o x measurement mode 3 Notes 1 o Can be set x Cannot be set 2 Two channels are necessary to specify the start and end address ranges for subroutine time measurement mode 3 Theref
83. local variables in the main function which declares four local variables j i min and max will be examined e Select Locals from the View menu The Locals window is displayed When no local variables exist the Locals window is empty Locals Value F 0x003fffd8 long 10 D D D D 0 Ox003fffd4 long O Ox003fffd0 long 8410 Ox003fffcc long 10 Ox003fffc8 int Figure 4 31 Locals Window e Double click a plus to the left of local variable a in the Locals window and the variable will be expanded to show the array elements 95 RENESAS Locals M val Vale ee LRT TT ERT PE RTE A ETE Ox003fffd8 long 10 D 22117 Ox003fffd8 long D 21468 Ox003fffdce long D 19741 Ox003fffe0 D 16927 Ox003fffed D 16045 Ox003fffe8 D 12122 Ox003fffec D 9988 Ox003ffff0 D 8410 Ox003ffff4 D 3498 Ox003ffff8 D O Ox003ffffc lo D O Ox003fffd4 lo w PwWO aITOeFWNr Oo a L m ng D O 0x003fffd0 long D 8410 0x003fffcc long D 10 Ox003fffc8 int eu s D w Figure 4 32 Locals Window Showing Elements of Array a 96 RENESAS 4 13 Saving and Loading the Session The information set to the HDI windows and dialog boxes can be saved as a session file Loading this session file at HDI initialization will allow debugging to be resumed from the same state as the last sess
84. lt memory_area gt the address value at the command input is converted as follows When the emulator can use the VP_MAP table the emulator translates addresses by using the VP_MAP table However the emulator translates addresses outside the VP_MAP table range by using the current MMU state at the command input When the emulator cannot use the VP_MAP table the emulator translates addresses by using the current MMU state at command input 309 RENESAS 6 2 16 Performance Command PS PC PA e Setting PERFORMANCE SET PS e Cancellation PERFORMANCE_CLEAR PC e Display PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS PA Command syntax and parameters e Setting ps channel lt channel_number gt lt modeopt gt lt nameopt gt lt start gt lt end gt lt timeopt gt lt countopt gt e Cancellation pe channel lt channel_number gt e Display pa lt display_mode gt Parameter Type Description lt channel_number gt Numeric Sets the performance channel number from 1 to 8 lt display_mode gt Keyword Sets the display mode of program execution state address Displays subroutine address list count Displays execution time and execution count in numeric graph Displays an execution time ratio in graph form default init Initializes measurement information 310 RENESAS Description of the PS command Parameter lt modeopt gt Description Sets the conditions to acquire data relating to performance analysis There
85. lt rdy_signal gt Keyword Enables or disables the RDY user READY signal input rdy enable Enabled initial value rdy disable Disabled lt nmi_signal gt Keyword Enables or disables the NMI signal input nmi enable Enabled initial value nmi disable Disabled lt sleep_signal gt Keyword Enables or disables the SLEEP signal input sleep enable Enabled initial value sleep disable Disabled 298 RENESAS Parameter lt trigger_bcb gt Type Keyword Description Specifies the pulse output mode when the emulator satisfies Break Condition B or Trace Condition B trgb 1 trgb 2 trgb 3 trgb 4 trgb 5 trgb 6 trgb 7 or trgb 8 trgb all trgb disable When the user specifies this keyword the emulator will output pulse when the emulator satisfies a channel condition set to Break Condition B or Trace Condition B When the user specifies this keyword the emulator will output pulse when the emulator satisfies a channel condition set to Break Condition B and Trace Condition B The emulator stops the execution of user program but does not output any pulse Default lt ubc gt Description Keyword Specifies whether to use the MPU s on chip user break controller by the E8000S ubc user ubc bcu ubc sbcu Releases the UBC to the user Break Condition U7 and U8 cannot be used If they have been used the conditions are canceled Uses the UBC for Break Condition U7 and U8 i
86. modified Delete Deletes the condition selected in the Condition list Duplicate Duplicates the condition selected in the Condition list V Selecting a condition from the Condition list then clicking this button adds that condition to the next empty spot in Nos 1 to 7 of the Sequence list VR Selecting a condition from the Condition list then clicking this button places that condition next to Reset in the Sequence list No Numerals indicate the sequential point number Reset indicates the reset point Sequence Displays a list of sequential conditions that have been specified Delete Deletes the condition selected in the Sequence list 160 RENESAS The status of hardware break condition satisfaction before the actual hardware break occurs will be displayed on the status bar during program execution in the following format Condition AorB Seq Number of passes specified number When no condition has been specified the status of hardware break conditions is displayed from Condition B to Condition A rather than in the format shown above Figure 5 35 shows an example of the display A hardware sequential break condition has been specified with Nos 1 to 3 of Break Condition A and No 1 has been satisfied A hardware sequential break condition has also been specified with Nos 1 to 5 of Break Condition B and Nos 1 to 3 have been satisfied Condition B Seq 3 5 Condition A Seq 1 3 AB 00001028 Figur
87. nee ie long long 87 4 11 Stepping Through a Program The HDI provides a range of step menu commands that allow efficient program debugging For details on step function refer to section 5 4 Step Function Table 4 4 Step Command Command Description Step In Steps through the statements in a function by each line or steps through assembly statements by each instruction For a line that calls a function execution stops at the first line of the called function Step Over Steps through the statements in a function by each line or steps through assembly statements by each instruction For a line that calls a function the whole of the called function is executed in a single step Step Out Steps out of a function and stops at the next line that calls the function in the program Step Steps the specified counts repeatedly at a specified rate Before executing program stepping confirm that the program is executed up to the sort function line at address H 000024e6 tutorial c Line Address BP Source long j int i 000024aa for i 0 i lt 10 i 000024b2 j rand 00002402 if j lt 0 000024c6 j 5j 000024ca 000024f6 000024fa 000024fe 00002502 00002506 00002516 0000251a 0000251e 00002530 _sort void sort long a long t int i j k gap Figure 4 22 Source Window Step Execution 88 RENESAS 4 11 1 Executing the Step In Command The Step In comma
88. peripheral module areas When Halt is selected from the pop up menu of the Trace window or trace halt conditions have been satisfied no auto update memory item can be added until Restart has been selected from the pop up menu of the Trace window When the user program is executed in the cycle reset mode time measurement mode with conditions specified or profile measurement enabled state the Auto update Memory function cannot be used When the user program is executed in the cycle reset mode time measurement mode with conditions specified or profile measurement enabled state while the AUM window is open automatic updating of auto update memory items will be halted When a TLB error occurs while memory is being accessed the cause of the TLB error and the address will be displayed in the title area of the AUM window with the following message TLB ERROR Occurred EXPEVT H XX XX exception code When a software break count has been specified the program will be halted temporarily When the auto update memory display is updated while the program is halted the AUM window may not be displayed correctly When a software break condition has been specified error message EMULATOR BUSY may be displayed 261 RENESAS 5 15 Controlling and Checking the State of MPU The emulator can select the clock to input to the MPU check the operation power supply and clock state of the user system The functions are useful when d
89. sedssscessecasicsnderdscendcleaysecelzasteaennseabeudacasolesdeudeteess 99 DA Introduction senec en E R E Se a E E 99 5 2 Setting the Emulator s Operating Conditions sssesssseessetessesrsrrerrsreerssreresrsrreresreereseeees 100 5 2 1 Configuration Dialog BOX sesesseeseereseeserseeserereresreresserressertrereserereseereserereseseeeees 102 5 2 2 CPU Operating Mode Dialog BOX o oo csecreeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseesaeenaes 114 3 3 Realtime Em lation s s 0cicsceces oes aie ee ghee avec dea pe EEEE niece see AE EEE 121 DeSAs FARO CUMO Ms E T E 121 5 3 2 Trace Halt Modeiinik ssc asnssh aii ti ta mei Ra i A este ees 124 5 3 3 Display of Reason for Termination and Operating Status eee 125 DA Step FUNCIONS eiiie sieve e E pega sess Tes av snc E aed hp Gees es ee es Ae A 127 DAL StS PUES CUT OM ceee ra a cette Sean ed cas EEE O E E A at 127 5 4 2 Interrupts during Step Execution eee eee csecseecseeeseeeeeeeeeeereeseeeeseseesaeenaes 127 iv RENESAS 55 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 Break FUNCIONS seiceanna eeaeee cues cde ceewssed sates a Ea oE EEEIEE E 128 S S Software Breakin ai EE he See eae ie 130 5 5 2 Software Sequential Break eee cee cseecseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesecesecsaecaesaaeenaeenes 135 5 3 3 Hardware Break sineren enira Nes din eae RE re di ee SS 141 5 5 4 Hardware Sequential Break eee ee ceecesecsecscecseecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseessesssecsaeenaes 155 5 5 5 Internal Break Break Con
90. sequential break or trace Not used The conditions in Condition A are not set as sequential break or trace conditions The conditions in Condition B are not set as sequential break or trace conditions Initial value Break The conditions in Condition A are set as sequential break conditions The conditions in Condition B are set as sequential break or conditions Trace The conditions in Condition A are set as sequential trace conditions The conditions in Condition B are not set as sequential trace conditions TRGB Option Selects a condition for the output of a pulse from the trigger output pin of the emulator when the condition set in the Condition B dialog box is satisfied Condition 1 When a condition among channels 1 to 8 is satisfied a break occurs and no trigger is output Initial value Condition 2 When a condition among channels 1 to 8 is satisfied a trigger is output Condition 3 When a condition of a specified channel is satisfied a trigger is output The channel number can be selected from the combo box User break controller Selects whether or not the E8000S uses the MPU s on chip user break controller User Releases the UBC to the user Break Conditions U7 and U8 cannot be used If these conditions have been set the settings will be canceled Initial value Break Condition U7 8 The E8000S uses the UBC for Break Conditions U7 and U8 Break Condition U8 gt 7 The E8000S uses the
91. so new conditions can be created Edit Modifies a condition Select a condition to be modified from the Condition list then click the Edit button to display the Condition A B dialog box and modify the condition Delete Deletes the condition selected in the Condition list Duplicate Duplicates the condition selected in the Condition list Note Entry is not available The Condition list displays a list of hardware break conditions that have been created Click to select a condition then click the OK button to set that condition as a hardware break condition To modify a hardware break condition after it has been created click its entry in the Entry List then click the Edit button to open the Condition A B dialog box Modify the condition then click the OK button 154 RENESAS To create a new hardware break click the New button to open the Condition A B dialog box Specify a condition then click the OK button Any entry in the history of hardware break condition settings displayed in the Condition list on the History page can be registered in the Condition list on the Entry List page Click the entry to select the condition from the Condition list on the History page then click the Entry button After the condition has been registered in the Condition list on the Entry List page it is deleted from the Condition list on the History page To delete a hardware break condition
92. taken as our example of using the trace filter Place the cursor in the Trace window then click the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu Select Filter from the menu and the Trace Filter dialog box will appear Select the General page then select Bus Trace from the Display combo box and the Pattern radio button in the Type group box Trace Filter Eg General Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Time Display Bus trace ii Type E L Cycle r Cycle Bus Cycle Start D512 End D 255 AUD Intemal Cycle Stat D s12 End p25 Figure 5 64 Trace Filter Dialog Box General Page 205 RENESAS Table 5 75 General Page Options Option Display Description Selects the trace information to be displayed in the Trace window Bus trace Displays external bus trace information default AUD trace Displays AUD trace information Bus AUD trace Displays both external bus and AUD trace information Internal trace Displays MPU internal trace information Type Selects a format for the display of trace information Cycle Disables any search conditions set in the Trace Filter dialog box Displays the whole contents of the trace buffer in the Trace window Pattern Searches under the conditions set in the Trace Filter dialog box and displays the results in the Trace window VP_MAP Uses the VP_MA
93. that has been created click the condition s entry to select it from the Condition list box then click the Delete button To duplicate a hardware break condition that has been created click the condition s entry to select it from the Condition list box then click the Duplicate button 5 5 4 Hardware Sequential Break Overview A hardware sequential break occurs after the selected of channels of a hardware break condition have been satisfied in a specified order This function uses Break Condition A or B a sequence of up to seven break conditions along with one reset point can be specified as Break Condition A or B The user must consider the order of satisfaction in specifying break conditions for Break Conditions A and B a break will only occur when the break conditions have all been satisfied in the order specified by the user When the reset point is passed the record of hardware sequential break conditions that have been satisfied to that point is cleared and the emulator restarts checking for satisfaction of the sequential break conditions from the first break condition 155 RENESAS Setting a Hardware Sequential Break Select Break for Condition A under Sequence on the Execution Mode2 page of the Configuration dialog box Figure 5 31 Configuration Dialog Box Hardware Sequential Break This setting selects Break Condition A for use as a hardware sequential break At this time any existing condit
94. the emulator starts to measure the execution time after it has passed the start address and continues to measure the time until it reaches the end address An example of the use of subroutine time measurement mode 2 is described below Here the start address is assumed to be H 1000 and the end address to be H 1FFF When the user program is running the emulator will start to measure the execution time of the user program from the start address H 1000 until the user program reaches the end address H 1LFFF When the emulator starts to measure the execution time it will continue to measure until the user program reaches address H 1 FFF or until user program emulation breaks Therefore the emulator will continue to measure the execution time of the user program after execution of the user program has jumped to address H 3000 217 RENESAS Address H 0000 Address H 1000 Address H 3000 Measurement range Address H OFFF Address H 1FFF Address H 3FFF Figure 5 71 Example of Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 2 e Example of subroutine time measurement mode 3 In subroutine time measurement mode 3 the emulator starts to measure the execution time of the user program in the start address range specified by the user and continues to measure the execution time of the user program until the user program reaches the end address range An example of the use of subroutine time measurement mode 3 is described below Here the start address range
95. the file names for the writing and erasing modules The files specified here will be loaded to the RAM area before loading to flash memory Bus width of flash memory Sets the bus width for flash memory Flash memory erasing time Sets the timeout value for erasing flash memory If erasing requires a long time choose a large value A positive integer value from 0 to 65535 can be specified All erasing module address Sets the address of the erasing module Writing module address Sets the address of the writing module Note The writing and erasing modules must be prepared by the user Execution jumps from the E8000S firmware to the writing and erasing modules To ensure that the execution successfully jumps from the E8000S firmware to the writing and erasing modules then returns to the E8000S firmware satisfy the following conditions e The writing and erasing modules must be written in assembly language e All general and control register values must be saved and restored before and after invoking the writing and erasing modules e The writing and erasing modules must be created so that execution always returns to the calling program Create the modules using the following interface to give the information necessary for flash memory access 111 RENESAS Table 5 8 Module Interface Module Name Parameters Return Value Writing module R4 L Writing address RO L Termination code R7 L V
96. the software sequential breakpoints and stop at the last pass point If the emulator does not pass the pass points in the specified order the emulator will start analyzing from the first pass point again The user can specify up to seven breakpoints and a reset point When the emulator passes a reset point the emulator starts analyzing from the first pass point The user cannot set software sequence breakpoints to the following addresses An address whose memory content is H 003B The address where BREAKPOINT command was set Areas other than CSO through CS6 except for the internal RAM area Instructions that satisfy Break Condition U4 refer to the third item in Notes below Slot instructions of the delay branch instruction refer to the fourth item in Notes below Cancellation This command clears software sequential breakpoints that have been set Display This command displays software sequential breakpoints that have been set The following shows the display format gt BSD Enable H c000000 H c010000 space physical reset H c020000 space virtual asid D 254 a b c d c a Enable Disable b Software sequential breakpoint address c Address space Physical specifies physical address and Virtual specifies virtual address the user must set an ASID value d Reset point address Enable or Disable This command enables or disables software sequential breakpoints that have been set Examples
97. the specified area of memory is refreshed at intervals of 500 ms while the user program is being executed The function has the following features Automatically updates with an interval of approximately 500 ms the display of the specified memory contents while the user program is being executed A color may be applied to indicate the contents that have been modified since the last update of the display Allows the setting of a maximum of 8 points auto update memory items each running for a maximum of 32 bytes Allows the display of memory contents in ASCII bit byte word longword or single precision floating point formats with or without a sign and in decimal or hexadecimal The following dialog boxes are used to set items for the auto update memory function Table 5 109 Dialog Boxes for Setting Auto Update Memory Items Dialog Box Description Auto update Memory Add Dialog box for registering items for the auto update memory function Select the address format of display and number of bytes of memory to be displayed AUM Target Details Dialog box for registering other settings for auto update memory items In particular those conditions that depend on the target device are set here Use the AUM window for the display of memory ranges selected as auto update memory items The AUM window is displayed by selecting Auto update Memory Window from the View menu and specifying Auto update Memory items in
98. traced when the CKIO signal rises during the CSn signal cycle A D RAS CAS data bus and BS signals are also traced 2 E is traced when the CKIO signal rises during the CSn signal cycle A C RAS CAS data bus and BS signals are also traced 3 F is traced when the CKIO signal rises during the CSn signal cycle A Address bus RAS CAS and BS signals are also traced When a refresh cycle is generated during access to SDRAM SDRAM CYCLE will be displayed as the trace information 191 7tENESAS 5 6 3 Internal Trace Functions There are two types of internal trace functions MPU internal trace and AUD trace MPU Internal Trace This trace function uses the MPU s on chip trace function The trace conditions are specified in the Internal Trace group box on the AUD Internal Mode page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box Information of the three types shown in table 5 65 is acquired Table 5 65 MPU Internal Trace Information Acquired Information Branch instruction trace Description General branch instruction trace Traces and displays all general branch instructions The general branch instructions are the BF BF S BT S BRA BRAF and JMP instructions Subroutine branch instruction trace Traces and displays all subroutine branch instructions The subroutine branch instructions are the BSR BSRF JSR and RTS instructions Exception branch instruction trace Traces and displays all
99. value and MPU TLB contents specified with the command OUT OF CS AREA ADDRESS An attempt was made to allocate emulation memory to an area other than CSO to CS6 The emulation memory was allocated within the available area MAPPING BOUND MUST BE IN 4MB 8MB UNITS Memory was allocated in 4 Mbyte or 8 Mbyte units with the MAP command For details refer to the MAP_SET command BREAK POINT IS DELETED A XXXXXXXX A software breakpoint specified at the displayed address was canceled because the contents of the software breakpoint were modified with the user program CANNOT SET A xxxxxxxx A breakpoint cannot be specified at the displayed address by the BREAKPOINT or BREAKSEQUENCE_SET command before GO command execution A hardware error might have occurred or the contents of the memory address might be a break instruction H 0000 Correct the error and reload and re execute the program EMULATOR BUSY The emulator was processing a command in trace halt mode and continuous processing of a software breakpoint so another command could not be executed Re enter the command TRACE CONDITION RESET Satisfied trace conditions are all reset when trace halt mode is entered When trace halt mode is terminated the trace conditions are rechecked from the beginning INTERNAL I O AREA The internal I O area was accessed RESERVED AREA A reserved area was accessed VERIFY ERROR ADDRESS H xxxxxxx
100. value data lt data gt quad lt data gt Data value numeric When a 64 bit data is specified it is divided into the upper 32 D63 to D32 and lower 32 D31 to DO data bus bits and is interpreted as two longwords The user program breaks when either the upper 32 or lower 32 bits match the specification When lt data gt is specified a break will not occur during the program fetch cycle Specifies a mask value To break on a specified 8 bit value mask data mask lt maskdata gt byte To break on a specified 16 bit value mask data mask lt maskdata gt word To break on a specified 32 bit value mask data mask lt maskdata gt long To break on a specified 64 bit value mask data mask lt maskdata gt quad lt maskdata gt Specifies a mask value numeric lt asidopt gt Specifies an ASID value for internal break asid lt ASID value gt Specifies a value within the range from H 0 to H FF 280 RENESAS Parameter Description lt r wopt gt Specifies a read write condition direction read Searches for a read cycle direction write Searches for a write cycle lt accessopt gt Specifies a bus status condition access dat Execution cycle lt ioopt gt Specifies whether or not a break occurs when internal I O is accessed Can only be specified when lt channel_numbers gt is 5 io Breaks when internal I O is accessed When omitted break does not occur lt ldtlbopt gt Specifies whether or not
101. 0 cece eeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeceaecsaecsaecseecaeeeaeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeas 162 Specifiable Internal Break Conditions 000 0 eee eeceeeeeceseceeceaecsaecseesseeeaeeenes 163 Condition U Page Options eee cee cesecsee ener cneecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeseeeaeenaeed 164 Break Condition U1 U8 Dialog Box Pages eee eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 165 Address Page Options vcvvs c ccccssee es satkecevsesscntesebevasveassenevecuoobentescevsusebeconneens 166 Data Page Options criscia osion tesieni enr aio ecbenpossusneshbenteunespnsvareaedterasd gt 167 Bus State Buttons nn a a vn eave aN 168 Read Write Buttons 0 0 00 cccccecesssececeessececsneeececaeeecesaeeessesaeeeesueeeceeseeeeseaaes 168 ASID Page Options s c si hel adeeb divi lie ee ei 169 Break Condition U5 U6 Dialog Box Options ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 171 Internal Sequential Break Modes Break Condition U1 U4 eeeeeeee 171 Emulation mode Options Break Condition U1 to UA ee ee ceeeeeeeteeeeeeees 172 Trace Acquisition Modes i 0 sci scccsisestestvans oebsvbsessteventestevecstcnnvendvobenbessieenrevecuunl 176 Trace Stop Conditions sccs iscnesecscey d cssenesvestaseseabstenssuscaseseshensoavastanes oubvuncoetsvarebecbens 177 Specifiable Trace Stop Conditions 2 0 0 0 eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeecssecsaessaeteeeaeeees 178 Condition A B C Page Options 200 ee eee ceeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaeeeaeseaeenaee 180 Trace Condition Al to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 Dialo
102. 03FFFFF Setting EMULATION AREA 32 bit x Cancel Help Figure 5 90 Edit Memory Mapping Dialog Box 250 RENESAS Table 5 103 Configuration Items of the Edit Add Memory Mapping Dialog Box Option Description From Sets the start address of a memory block To Sets the end address of a memory block Setting Selects the memory type When the OK button is clicked the conditions are set and the dialog box is closed When the Cancel button is clicked the dialog box is closed and the conditions are not set The following shows the memory types that can be set in the Setting combo box Table 5 104 Settings for Memory Type Available in the Setting Combo Box Memory type Description EMULATION AREA 16 bit Sets the address range in the emulation memory area with a 16 bit bus EMULATION AREA 32 bit Sets the address range in the emulation memory area with a 32 bit bus EMULATION AREA Read Only 16 bit Sets the address range as a write protected area in the emulation memory area with a 16 bit bus EMULATION AREA Read Only 32 bit Sets the address range as a write protected area in the emulation memory area with a 32 bit bus The attribute settings listed above are only for external memory and cannot be applied to the internal I O area Notes Refer to appendix E 2 Emulation Memory 5 12 2 VP_MAP Translation The MPU which has an MMU translates internal addresses virtual addresses to actual m
103. 189 Bus Trace for Normal SRAM ccccccesscesssececseneececseceeceesaeeecsesaeeeceneeeesssaeeessseaeess 190 Bus Trace for SDRAM receio a Seeds canes E AE EER E EEA 191 Trace Acquisition Page AUD Internal Mode Page cceeeeeseeceeeeeeneeeeees 193 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box AUD Internal Mode Page 0 0 0 eee eeeeeeseeeeees 196 Trace Filter Dialog Box General Page ee ceeeesseeceseeeeneeceeeeeeeeceteeeeneeensees 198 Trace Window External Bus Trace Display ccescesccecseeceeneecneeceeeeecnaeeenees 199 Trace Window AUD Trace Display 0 eeceeesceenceesseceeeeeceaeceeneecaeceeeeeenaeeenees 201 Trace Window Display of Both External Bus and AUD Trace Information 203 Trace Window MPU Internal Trace Display cesceececsseceeeeeceeceeeeeceaeeeenees 203 Trace Filter Dialog Box General Page ee eeeeessseceseceeneeceeeeeeeeceteeeeeeeneees 205 Trace Filter Dialog Box Time Page eeceeeeeeseeceeeeeeneeceeeeeeneeceeeeeeeeeeeees 209 Trace Filter Dialog Box AUD Internal Page 0 0 0 eee eeeeeseeceseeeeneeeeereeeneeeees 210 Trace Find Dialog Box General Page ee ceeceesseceeeeeeneeceseeeeneeceteeeeeeensees 211 Display of Execution Time in the System Status Window eee eeeeeeees 212 Performance Analysis WindOwW ccesccesseceseceeeeeceseceeeeeceaeeeeeeeceaeceeneesnaeeeeneers 215 Example of Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 1 00
104. 2 Recommended Dimensions for the User System Connector 00 0 0 eee eeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeees 358 Appendix C Connecting the Emulator to the User System eee eee eee 361 C 1 Connecting the Evaluation Chip Board to the User System eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 361 C 2 Connecting the Cables for Tracing ec eceecceeseesecesecesecesecsseeaeceaecaecsuecaeecaeeeaeseneeeaeees 365 C 3 Installing the MPU on the User System 00 eee cee ceecesecseecseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeseenaeenaees 368 Appendix D MPU Internal Module Support eee eeeesneceeeeeeeeeeeeenaeee 371 Dil Memory Space csser estes cette esis dees okies ae A deine eel nope ee 371 D 1 1 Internal VO Afi oiiire reactie saabevensservenbisahebs ceieseebdssseee estas seatsuncsgnstnsbvesvanadees 371 D 1 2 External MEmOry Afeaki iiics s eea Eee R ESS 371 D 2 Low Power Consumption Modes Sleep and Standby ssesseseeseeseesrsreerssrrerssrsrresrsrees 372 D 2 1 Sleep and Standby Modes eee ee eecesecesecssecseecseecseeeaeeeeeeeeeseeseseesesssecsaeenaes 372 D3 Imtemupts aces scistisiiaisii Ae eee E Ae ae ae ads 372 D 4 Control Input Signals RESETP RESETM BREQ and RDY aese 372 D5 Bus State Controller seiorn eeen eel ay ein an eile aa 373 D 6 Emulator Status and Internal Modules 0 0 eee cece ceeeceseceseceseceeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeatens 373 Appendix E Notes on Debugging x iiciiccnadcsecdsnsedigeteaciusdenlewasantelesiancetacteeegeats 375 E l Whe Tracing FUnCti i
105. 256 RENESAS Table 5 107 Stack Trace Window Pop up Menu Options Option Description Copy Copies the highlighted text into the Windows clipboard allowing it to be pasted into other applications Go to Source Displays the source program corresponding to the selected function in the Source window View Setting Opens the Stack Trace Setting dialog box allowing the user to specify the display format of the Stack Trace window The Stack Trace Setting dialog box has the options shown in table 5 108 Stack Trace Setting Nest level 1 64 fo F Display symbol V Parameter IV Local Variable m Diaplay Radix C Hexadecimal Decimal F Octal Binary Cancel Figure 5 93 Stack Trace Setting Dialog Box Table 5 108 Stack Trace Setting Dialog Box Options Option Description Nest level Specifies the nesting level of a function call to be displayed in the Stack Trace window The highest nesting level is 64 Display symbol Specifies the symbol types to be displayed in addition to functions whether to display parameters or local variables can be specified Display Radix Specifies the radix for displays in the Stack Trace window To view the on line help move the mouse pointer into the Stack Trace window then press the F1 key 257 RENESAS 5 14 Auto Update Memory Function 5 14 1 Overview In an auto update of memory the display of the contents of
106. 3A For an AC 100 V power supply For the PC interface cable that connects the host computer to the E8000S station A PC interface board ISA bus PCI bus or PCMCIA bus or LAN adapter can be connected Marked PCIF For selecting the host interface Do not change the settings Marked SW1 For trace cable 1 that connects the E8000S station to the evaluation chip board For trace cable 2 that connects the E8000S station to the evaluation chip board Prevents a trace cable from being inserted into the wrong place Prevents a trace cable from being inserted into the wrong place RENESAS 2 1 2 Device Control Board Components The names of the components on the device control board HS7750EDD81H of the E8000S station are listed below AC100 120V AC200 240V 2A 50 60Hz Figure 2 4 Device Control Board A Device control board slot For installing the device control board depends on the target device a External probe connector CN4 For connecting the E8000S station to the external probe b Station to evaluation chip board For trace cable 3 that connects the E8000S station interface connector CN3 to the evaluation chip board RENESAS c Power supply cable CN7 For supplying power to the evaluation chip board 2 1 3 Evaluation Chip Board Configuration The names of the components on the evaluation chip board HS775 1EBH8 1H of the E8000S emulator are listed below 1 Top view of HS7751EBH
107. 5 21 Break Functions cont Type Internal break Description This break function is implemented by the MPU When any of the conditions specified as Break Condition U1 to U4 has been satisfied this kind of break occurs Break Condition Un n number is displayed under Type in the Breakpoints window Break Condition U5 is for breaks due to internal I O access and Break Condition U6 is for breaks due to the execution of an LDTLB instruction The user break controller can be used for Break Condition U7 and U8 Internal sequential break An order of satisfaction can be specified for internal break conditions This kind of break occurs when all of the specified conditions have been satisfied in the specified order Break Condition U1 to U4 can be used in four levels of sequential break conditions Break Condition U7 and U8 can be used in two levels of sequential break conditions Forced break This is the break for the forcible termination of a program that is issued on selection of the HDI s Stop button Forced break due to writing to a write protected area This kind of break occurs when the current user program writes to an area of the emulation memory that has the write protected attribute Break due to trace buffer overflow This break occurs when the trace buffer in the emulator station overflows during trace acquisition Timeout break A timeout break occurs when the execution time exceeds th
108. 7C to H 100304 Read write cycle condition Write cycle only BCS A CHANNEL 2 ADDRESS H 10027C TO H 100304 DIRECTION WRITE 276 RENESAS 2 To set the following conditions for channel 4 of Break Condition B Data condition Data bus value of H 4750 Read write cycle condition Read cycle only BCS B CHANNEL 4 DATA H 4750 DIRECTION READ 3 To set the following conditions for channel 5 of Break Condition A Address condition An address bus value other than H 10027C External probe condition PROBE4 low PROBE3 high PROBE2 low PROBE high BCS A CHANNEL 5 ADDRESS H 10027C NOT PRB 0101 4 To set the following conditions for channel 7 of Break Condition B NMI signal condition NMI low BCS B CHANNEL 7 NMI LOW 5 To set the following conditions for channel 1 of Break Condition B Address condition An address bus value with mask specification H 1000 BCS B CHANNEL 1 ADDRESS MASK H 1000 6 To set the following conditions for channel 6 of Break Condition B Address bus value Except the range from H 100000 to H 1001C0 BCS B CHANNEL 6 ADDRESS H 100000 TO H 1001CO NOT 7 To display the conditions set to channel 3 of Break Condition B BCD B CHANNEL 3 Display gt BCD B CHANNEL 3 Break Condition B3 Enable address H 100000 to H 1001c0O not 8 To display all of the conditions set to Break Condition A BCD A Display gt BCD A Break Condition Al Disable Break Condition A2 Enable address H 10027c to H
109. 8 away from walls or other equipment Keep out of direct sunlight or heat Refer to section 1 2 Environmental Conditions Use in an environment with constant temperature and humidity Protect the emulator from dust Avoid subjecting the emulator to excessive vibration Refer to section 1 2 Environmental Conditions 4 Protect the emulator from excessive impacts and stresses 5 Before using the emulator s power supply check its specifications such as power voltage and frequency 6 When moving the emulator take care not to vibrate or otherwise damage it 7 After connecting the cable check that it is connected correctly For details refer to section 3 Preparation before Use 8 Supply power to the emulator and connected parts after connecting all cables Cables must not be connected or removed while the power is on 9 For details on differences between the SH7751 and the emulator refer to appendix E 8 Differences between the E8000S Emulator and the SH7751 RENESAS 1 2 Environmental Conditions CAUTION Observe the conditions listed in table 1 1 when using the emulator The following environmental conditions must be satisfied otherwise the user system and the E8000S emulator will not operate normally The USER PROGRAM will be LOST Table 1 1 Environmental Conditions Item Specifications Temperature Operating 10 to 35 C Storage 10 to 50 C Humidity Operating 35 to 80 RH n
110. 8000S emulator is in use Target internal error A command cannot be issued to the emulator Wait for the completion of processing User system not ready The message USER SYSTEM NOT READY was received from the emulator Function information not found The function information that was entered in the Input Function Range dialog box matches no function Input a correct function name Currently not available The requested function is not available now Not support The requested function is not supported Command currently not available The Auto update Memory function is not available Can t add this item because there is not enough Auto update memory resource The number of Auto update Memory settings reached the maximum eight points and the new item cannot be added Change or cancel items that have already been set The AUM setting range is in the 32byte boundary The address for an Auto update Memory item was set so that the range runs the 32 byte boundary An address range cannot run across a 32 byte boundary Since the profile function is enabled the INTERRUPT command cannot be set Clear the profile function before the INTERRUPT command is set While the profile data measurement function is enabled the INTERRUPT command cannot be used Disable the profile function then specify the INTERRUPT command Since the INTERRUPT command setting is enabled the profile functi
111. 81H 2 Bottom view of HS7751EBH81H E8000S station to evaluation chip board interface connectors Gadi i T 3 Side view of HS7751EBH81H Figure 2 5 Evaluation Chip Board HS7751EBH81H a Station to evaluation chip board For trace cable 1 that connects the E8000S station to interface connector CN1 the evaluation chip board b Station to evaluation chip board For trace cable 2 that connects the E8000S station to interface connector CN2 the evaluation chip board c Station to evaluation chip board For trace cable 3 that connects the E8000S station to interface connector CN3 the evaluation chip board d Crystal oscillator terminals For installing a crystal oscillator to be used as an external clock source for the MPU e User system connector For connecting the user system HS7751EBH81H SH7751 is incorporated The IC socket to connect to the user system is installed RENESAS g Power supply connector CN7 For the power supply cable that connects the device control board to the evaluation chip board RENESAS 2 2 Configuration of the Provided CD R The provided CD R contains software for the SH7751 E8000S emulator and user s manuals Table 2 1 shows the configuration of the CD R All directories listed in this table are under the directory 7751 in the root directory Table 2 1 Contents of CD R Directory Name File Name Contents Note setup exe Installer System E8000 sys
112. A line that calls the change function is executed as a single step and execution stops at the next line in the program nt tutorial c Address BP urce 000024aa for i 0 i lt 10 i 000024b2 j rand 000024c2 if j lt 0 000024c6 j j 000024ca alij J 000024e6 Break sort a 000024f6 min a 0 000024fa Max alg 000024fe min 0 00002502 0 00002506 e 0000251a max a 0 0000251e while 1 00002530 void sort long a long t int i j k gap 00002534 gap 5 00002538 eee gap gt 0 df g0g0g0253c for k 0 k lt qap k f Figure 4 29 Source Window Step Over When the last line of the change function is executed the data of array a which is displayed in the Watch window is sorted in descending order Value Qx003f ffd8 long 10 w w 2 M Doun Bawono m d bed bead bea b Bad b b Lad a 3 w Figure 4 30 Watch Window Window Array a Sorted in Descending Order 94 H 00005665 H 000053dc H 00004d1d H 0000421 H 00003ead H 00002f5a H 00002704 H 000020da H 00000daa H ooo00000 H ooo00000 OxO003fff d8 Ox003fffdc Ox003fffe0 Ox003fffe4 Ox003fffe8 Ox003fffec OxO003fff 0 Ox003ffff4 OxO003f 8 Ox003ffffc OxO003ff d0 RENESAS vrer nre ee et a et e a iea 4 12 Displaying Local Variables The user can display local variables in a function using the Locals window For example the
113. AS Command syntax and parameters e Setting mas lt memory_area gt asid lt asid gt e Display mas Parameter Type Description lt memory_area gt Keyword Sets the memory space normal The emulator can use physical and virtual memory space physical The emulator can use physical address space virtual The emulator can use virtual address space lt asid gt Numeric Sets the ASID value within the range from H 0 to H FF Description This command specifies and displays the target memory space for command operation such as loading verification saving display and modification Examples 1 To specify the physical address space for the target memory space for command operation such as loading verification saving display and modification MAS PHYSICAL 2 To specify the virtual address space that has ASID value for the target memory space for command operation such as loading verification saving display and modification MAS VIRTUAL ASID H 10 3 To display the target memory space setting MAS The following shows the display format gt MAS memoryarea_set virtual asid D 16 308 RENESAS Notes e When the user specifies virtual for parameter lt memory_area gt and does not specify an asid value for parameter lt asid gt the emulator will enable virtual memory access at command input to the virtual space corresponding to the current ASID value e When the user sets normal to parameter
114. AS Errors in Measurement Profile data is measured by stopping user program execution to acquire profile data and then restarting execution Therefore if a measurement target event occurs at the same time as a program stop or restart it is counted Accordingly the profile data includes errors Enabling profile data measurement will increase the time required for user program execution The following shows reference values for the user program execution time under the specified environment The profile data measured must be used only for reference e Environment Host computer Pentium II 400 MHz Memory 128 Mbytes OS Windows 98 Program executed 10 000 nested calls e Execution time measured When profile data measurement is disabled Less than second When profile data measurement is enabled without measuring child functions 17 seconds When profile data measurement is enabled measuring child functions 376 seconds 241 RENESAS 5 9 Interrupts During user program execution or in command input wait state any interrupt to the MPU can be used Whether or not to process interrupts during user program execution or in command input wait state can be specified 5 9 1 When No Interrupt is Processed During User Program Execution or in Command Input Wait State While the emulator is executing the user program or is in command input wait state interrupts are not processed generally However if an internal interrupt or an edge sensitiv
115. Box History Page Table 5 38 History Page Options Option Description Condition Up to 32 conditions are displayed in a list as a history of the conditions that have been set as Break Condition A or B Entry Makes the condition selected in the Condition list available for use again as a channel of Break Condition A or B Clicking the Entry button moves any condition selected in the Condition list box to the Entry List page and deletes it from the Condition list on the History page Note New Edit Delete and Duplicate are not available The last 32 hardware break condition that have been specified in the Break Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 dialog boxes are displayed in the Condition list on the History page Select a condition from the Condition list then click the Entry button to register that condition on the Entry List page The condition is deleted from the Condition list 153 RENESAS b Entry List Page Use this page to create modify duplicate delete and display conditions for Break Condition A or B Condition History Entry List Condition Edit Delete Ente gt Duplicate Cancel Help Figure 5 30 Condition Dialog Box Entry List Page Table 5 39 Entry List Page Options Option Description Condition Up to 32 conditions that have previously been created can be redisplayed in a list New Displays the Condition A B dialog box
116. CC 777 VSS PLL1 SVCC VSS PLL2 MIC29152 01 pF 1 8VCC 3VCC iE uF 2 HF 717 ZTT MIC29502 0 1 pF 777 354 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits cont RENESAS Appendix B Preparations for Assembling the User System Board B 1 Pin Arrangement on the User Interface Table B 1 lists the pin arrangement on the user interface when the MPU is used Table B 1 Pin Arrangement on the 256 pin QFP FP 256G IC Socket No Pin Name No Pin Name No Pin Name No Pin Name 1 TMS 21 D3 41 VDDQ 61 A8 2 TCK 22 D4 42 VSSQ 62 A9 3 VDDQ 23 D5 43 NC 63 A10 4 VSSQ 24 D6 44 RD CASS 64 Ali FRAME 5 TDI 25 D7 45 CKE 65 A12 6 cso 26 D8 46 RAS 66 A13 7 CS1 27 D9 47 VDD 67 VDDQ 8 CS4 28 D10 48 VSS 68 VSSQ 9 CS5 29 VDDQ 49 CS2 69 A14 10 CS6 30 VSSQ 50 CS3 70 A15 11 BS 31 D11 51 AO 71 A16 12 WEO REG 32 D12 52 Al 72 A17 13 WE1 33 D13 53 A2 73 CAS2 DQM2 14 DO 34 D14 54 A3 74 CAS3 DQM3 15 VDDQ 35 D15 55 VDDQ 75 D16 16 VSSQ 36 CAS0 DQM0 56 VSSQ 76 D17 17 VDD 37 CAS1 DQM1 57 A4 77 D18 18 VSS 38 RD WR 58 A5 78 D19 19 D1 39 CKIO 59 A6 79 VDDQ 20 D2 40 NC 60 A7 80 VSSQ 355 RENESAS Table B 1 Pin Arrangement on the 256 pin QFP FP 256G IC Socket cont No Pin Name No Pin Name No Pin Name No Pin Name 81 VDD 111 VDD 141 AD22 171 AD10 82 VSS 112 VSS 142 AD21 172 AD9 83 D20 113 SLEEP 143 VD
117. Clears trace conditions that have been set TRACEACQUISITION_ 6 2 20 TAD Displays trace conditions that DISPLAY have been set TRACEACQUISITION_SET 6 2 20 TAS Sets conditions for acquiring trace information VPMAP_CLEAR 6 2 24 VC Clears address translation tables VP_MAP for the emulator VPMAP_DISPLAY 6 2 24 VD Displays address translation tables VP_MAP for the emulator VPMAP_ENABLE 6 2 24 VE Enables or disables address translation tables VP_MAP for the emulator VPMAP_SET 6 2 24 VS Sets address translation tables VP_MAP for the emulator 272 RENESAS 6 2 1 Hardware Break Command BCS BCC BCD BCE e Setting BREAKCONDITION_SET BCS e Cancellation BREAKCONDITION_CLEAR BCC e Display BREAKCONDITION_DISPLAY BCD e Enable or Disable BREAKCONDITION_ENABLE BCE Command syntax and parameters e Setting bes lt type gt channel lt channel_number gt lt option gt lt option gt lt option gt lt addropt gt lt dataopt gt lt r wopt gt lt prbopt gt lt nmiopt gt lt irlopt gt lt countopt gt lt delayopt gt e Cancellation bee lt type gt channel lt channel_number gt e Display bed lt type gt channel lt channel_number gt e Enable or Disable bce lt type gt channel lt channel_number gt lt mode gt Parameter Type Description lt type gt Keyword Sets a hardware break condition type a b c Break Condition A B C lt channel_number gt Numeric or Sets 1 to 8 p o
118. Clock Mode MD2 0 Clock Mode 3 Memory Type CSO CS6 NORMAL H UDI JTAG Clock H UDI JTAG Clock 2 5 MHz Restart the HDI after modifying the CPU Operating Mode dialog box To display the CPU Operating Mode dialog box click the Setting button in the CPU Operating Mode page in the Configuration dialog box For details on the CPU Operating Mode dialog box refer to section 5 2 Setting the Emulator Operating Conditions 71 RENESAS The HDI window is shown in figure 4 2 gt l Hitachi Debugging interface tutorial SHxxxx E8000S Emulator tutorial c 1 fr Ele Edt view Run Memory Setup Window Help te 1 PP OD BP 000024488 void main void long a 10 min max long j int i 000024aa for i 0 i lt 10 i 000024b2 j rand 000024c2 if j lt 0 000024c6 j 3 000024ca 000024e6 000024f6 000024fa 000024fe 00002502 00002506 change a 00002516 min a 9 0000251a max a 0 0000251e while 1 00002530 _sort void sort long a long t int i j k gap 00002534 gap 5 00002538 while gap gt 0 0000253c for k 0 k lt gap k 00002544 for i k gap i lt 10 i i gap 3 For Help press F1 Figure 4 2 HDI Window Numbers in figure 4 2 indicate the following 1 Menu bar Indicates the HDI command menus for the use of the HDI 2 Toolbar Contains convenient buttons as shortcuts of me
119. Connection The host interface consists of 8 switches as shown in figure 3 10 The switch state becomes on when the switches are pushed to the left and the state becomes off when the switches are pushed to the right To change the console interface settings turn switches S1 to S6 off and switches S7 and S8 on in the console interface switch SW1 ON state lt a ON state b OFF state Side view of SW1 ON OFF states Figure 3 10 Console Interface Switches CAUTION Do not change the settings of the console interface switch SW1 36 RENESAS 3 4 Setting Up with Windows Operating Systems The following describes the setup procedure for Windows operating systems Since hardware is set up during installation the installation procedure may differ according to the operating system and interface used ISA PCI PCMCIA or LAN Proceed with installation according to the procedures for the environment in use To connect the host computer to the emulator either a PC interface board HS6000EII01H PCI interface board HS6000EICO1H and HS6000EIC02H PC interface card HS6000EIPO1H or a LAN adapter HS6000ELNO1H can be selected For details on the connection of the PC interface board ISA specifications refer to section 3 4 4 PC Interface Board Specifications ISA Bus Specifications or the user s manual For details on other connections refer to the related user s manual To install the provided software
120. DBR H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined SGR H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined FPO0 15 DR H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined XFO 15 XD H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined Note X indicates an undefined value 378 RENESAS 2 There is a delay on these signals since the user system interface of the emulator includes pull up resistors and buffers Due to the pull up resistor the signals can be at a high level even when they are also in their high impedance state Take these points into account when preparing hardware for the user system For details on the user system interface and the delays on signals see appendix A User System Interface Circuit 3 The emulator supports operation of SH7751 at external clock frequency CKIO of up to 83 5 MHz If the external clock frequency of the MPU is set higher than 83 5 MHz normal operation of the emulator cannot be guaranteed 379 RENESAS
121. DQ 173 AD8 84 D21 114 PCIGNT4 144 VSSQ 174 C BEO 85 D22 115 PCIGNT3 145 VDD 175 VDD 86 D23 116 PCIGNT2 146 VSS 176 VSS 87 D24 117 PCIREQ4 147 AD20 177 AD7 88 D25 118 PCIREQ3 MD10 148 AD19 178 AD6 89 D26 119 VDDQ 149 AD18 179 AD5 90 D27 120 VSSQ 150 AD17 180 AD4 91 D28 121 PCIREQ2 MD9 151 AD16 181 AD3 92 D29 122 IDSEL 152 C BE2 182 AD2 93 VDDQ 123 INTA 153 PCIFRAME 183 VDDQ 94 VSSQ 124 PCIRST 154 IRDY 184 VSSQ 95 D30 125 PCICLK 155 TRDY 185 AD1 96 D31 126 PCIGNT1 REQOUT 156 DEVSEL 186 ADO 97 VDD 127 PCIREQ1 GNTIN 157 VDDQ 187 IRLO 98 VSS 128 SERR 158 VSSQ 188 IRL1 99 A18 129 AD31 159 PCISTOP 189 IRL2 100 A19 130 AD30 160 PCILOCK 190 IRL3 101 A20 131 VDDQ 161 PERR 191 VSSQ 102 A21 132 VSSQ 162 PAR 192 VDDQ 103 A22 133 AD29 163 C BE1 193 XTAL2 104 A23 134 AD28 164 AD15 194 EXTAL2 105 VDDQ 135 AD27 165 AD14 195 VDD RTC 106 VSSQ 136 AD26 166 AD13 196 VSS RTC 107 A24 137 AD25 167 AD12 197 CA 108 A25 138 AD24 168 AD11 198 RESET 109 WE2 ICIORD 139 C BE3 169 VDDQ 199 TRST 110 WE3 ICIOWR 140 AD23 170 VSSQ 200 MRESET 356 RENESAS Table B 1 Pin Arrangement on the 256 pin QFP FP 256G IC Socket cont No Pin Name No Pin Name No Pin Name No Pin Name 201 NMI 215 SCK 229 NC 243 DREQO 202 BACK BSREQ 216 MD1 TXD2 230 MD3 CE2A 244 DREQ1 203 BREQ BSACK 217 MDO SCK2 231 MD4 CE2B 245 ASEBRK BRKACK 204 MD6 IOIS16 218 MD7 CTS2 232 MD5 246 TDO 205 RDY 219 AUDSYNC 233 VDDQ 247 VDDQ 206 TXD 220
122. ENESAS 3 Both external bus and AUD trace information Page Condition Description General Sets trace search range Address Address bus Searches for records in which the value on the address bus matches the specified condition Data Data bus Searches for records in which the value on the data bus matches the specified condition Bus State Bus state Searches for records in which the RD and RDWR signal levels match the specified condition Probe External probe Searches for records in which the external probe signal levels match the specified condition Interrupt External interrupt Searches for records in which the NMI RESET or IRLO to IRL3 signal levels match the specified condition Time Time stamp Searches for records in which the time stamp matches the specified condition time or range AUD Internal Address bus Searches for the branch source and destination addresses that match the specified value or range 4 MPU Internal trace information Page Condition Description General Sets trace search range AUD Internal Searches for the branch source and destination addresses that match the specified value or range The conditions that can be specified for Address except Outside Range Data Bus State Probe and Interrupt except RESET are the same as those in the Break Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 dialog boxes For details on setting these condi
123. Electronics products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics To all our customers Regarding the change of names mentioned in the document such as Hitachi Electric and Hitachi XX to Renesas Technology Corp The semiconductor operations of Mitsubishi Electric and Hitachi were transferred to Renesas Technology Corporation on April 1st 2003 These operations include microcomputer logic analog and discrete devices and memory chips other than DRAMs flash memory SRAMs etc Accordingly although Hitachi Hitachi Ltd Hitachi Semiconductors and other Hitachi brand names are mentioned in the document these names have in fact all been changed to Renesas Technology Corp Thank you for your understanding Except for our corporate trademark logo and corporate statement no changes whatsoever have been made to the contents of the document and these changes do not constitute any alteration to the contents of the document itself Renesas Technology Home Page http www renesas com Renesas Technology Corp Customer Support Dept April 1 2003 2tENESAS Renesas Technology Corp Cautions Keep safety first in your circuit designs 1 Renesas Technology Corpo
124. Esooos High High Low High High Low High High Low High High User System High High High High High High High High High High High Figure 5 7 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box MD Pin Page 115 RENESAS Table 5 12 MD Pin Page Item Description PCI MD10 9 Sets the PCI mode Select PCI host with external clock input PCI host with bus clock PCI non host with external clock input or PCI disabled Clock Status MD8 Sets the input clock fixed to External input clock Master Slave MD7 Fixed to Master CSO Memory Type MD6 _ Sets the type of memory in CSO Select MPX or NORMAL initial value Endian MD5 Sets the endian in use Select Big initial value or Little CSO Bus Width MD4 3 Sets the bus width of the CSO space Select 8 Bit 16 Bit or 32 Bit initial value Clock Mode MD2 0 Sets the clock mode Initial value Clock Mode 3 MD10 0 Displays the current status of the mode pins in High or Low Next gt Goes to the next page Memory Type Cancel Cancels changes to the CPU operating mode settings Note When the user system is not connected the PCI MD10 9 setting is switched to PCI disabled when the emulator starts up 116 RENESAS Memory Type Page Use this page to indicate the types of memory in CSO to CS6 the type of SDRAM type in CS2 and CS3 and the bus widths The settings on this page are used in analyzing the external bus trace information Ma
125. FORMATION READ FIRST e READ this user s manual before using this emulator product e KEEP the user s manual handy for future reference Do not attempt to use the emulator product until you fully understand its mechanism Emulator Product Throughout this document the term emulator product shall be defined as the following products produced only by Hitachi Ltd excluding all subsidiary products e Emulator station e Device control board e Evaluation chip board e Cable The user system or a host computer is not included in this definition Purpose of the Emulator Product This emulator product is a software and hardware development tool for systems employing the Hitachi microcomputer HD6417751 hereafter referred to as MPU By exchanging the device control board and evaluation chip board this emulator product can also be used for systems using other microcomputers This emulator product must only be used for the above purpose Limited Applications This emulator product is not authorized for use in MEDICAL atomic energy aeronautical or space technology applications without consent of the appropriate officer of a Hitachi sales company Such use includes but is not limited to use in life support systems Buyers of this emulator product must notify the relevant Hitachi sales offices before planning to use the product in such applications Improvement Policy Hitachi Ltd including its subsidiaries hereafter collectively ref
126. Files dialog box will be displayed Add or modify files 54 RENESAS E8000 Load Files Ea Only Checked kind of files are installed gt SYSTEM FILE v C HEWAH diIS ESO00S 7751 SY STEMS CONFIGURATION FILE rr FIRMWARE FILE CHEWS diS E 800057 751 SYSTEMS DIAGNOSTIC FILE _ Cancel Help Quit Figure 3 19 E8000 Load Files Dialog Box SH7751 Each check box corresponds to the combo box to its right Select the check box that corresponds to the files you wish to install Place the cursor on the combo box and click the Browse button When the Browse button is clicked the File Selection dialog box will be displayed Select the files to install If you decide not to install a file do not select the check box When the check box is not selected which means it is invalid the file will be grayed out and will not be installed Click the OK button The system program will be installed in the flash memory of the E8000S station The file name will be displayed in the status bar as each file is installed From here the description of Custom Install is the same as that of Auto Install Click Cancel to return to the Select Install dialog box For details on the error messages displayed during ESI operation refer to Troubleshooting in the ESI help file For help on the ESI select SH7751 E8000S Emulator Software Tools System Install Tool Help from the Start menu 55
127. I input clock This may result in correct start up Emulator System Failure If an exceptional operation occurs during emulator monitor or emulator system program execution HDI command wait state the system shuts down the HDI links down E8000 SYSTEM DOWN If an error occurs re execute using another system disk If an error still occurs inform a Hitachi sales agency of the error 63 RENESAS 3 7 3 Troubleshooting Procedure When an error occurs in the system use the troubleshooting Problem Analysis Diagram PAD see figure 3 29 to determine the cause of the error Start from START in figure 3 29 and determine the state of the system Follow the instructions that request operator assistance or intervention Note that system defect means that the emulator station is malfunctioning Execute the diagnostic program in the way described in the Diagnostic Program Manual and inform a Hitachi sales agency of the test results in detail because system defects may arise for a number of reasons If the cause of the error is an emulator defect execute the provided diagnostic program to collect the internal details from the emulator Please inform us of the results of testing For details on the diagnostic program read the manual for the provided diagnostic program 64 RENESAS Emulator syste failure System defect Power lamp on with power on 4 Emulator monitor message
128. IS_I command Cancel PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS_I_ CLEAR command The MPU internal performance function can also be used to measure two events at a time measure the conditions in table 5 91 Conditions can also be set for the starting and stopping of measurement The counter can count up to 48 bits When it overflows the measurement becomes invalid Measurement time The period of measurement is the time from when the emulator starts to measure the execution time of the user program until the end of execution When this function is used an error of a few cycles will be generated Do not use this function to measure step execution Also do not use this function when continuous tracing is selected This is because the user program will be being stopped and restarted inside the emulator Measurement conditions Here the number of times the following conditions are satisfied can be measured the operand access count internal I O access count instruction cache miss count TLB miss count instruction execution count interrupt count cache fill cycle count and elapsed time cycles 231 RENESAS Table 5 91 Items Measured by the MPU Internal Performance Function No 1 Item Operand access cycle count Measurement Mode OARW Description The number of times data was read written to cache while the cache valid OARAM The number of times an operand in the internal RAM was accessed OA The number of times all operands we
129. MU s state when the command is input When the VP_MAP table is disabled the address is translated according to the MMU s state when the command is input Physical Sets a pass point as a physical address Virtual Sets a pass point as a virtual address ASID Sets an ASID value for a pass point that is set as a virtual address This setting is only enabled when the Virtual radio button is selected Reset Point group box Address Sets the reset point as a numerical or symbolic value A reset point need not be set Normal Address translation is according to the current state of the emulator state When the VP_MAP table is enabled and the address is within the table s range the address is translated according to the VP_MAP table When the address is outside the table s range the address is translated according to the MMU s state when the command is input When the VP_MAP table is disabled the address is translated according to the MMU s state when the command is input Physical Sets a reset point as a physical address Virtual Sets a reset point as a virtual address ASID Sets an ASID value for when a reset point is set as a virtual address This setting is only enabled when the Virtual radio button is selected When a software sequential break is placed it replaces the instruction at the specified address It is only possible to set a software break
130. NT D 3970H 31M 09S 268224US 000NS Break7 7 Not used 52ns 100us Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled E8000S A Li Li Li A A aE Zz mp SSS SSD 27 8MHz RENESAS Output trigger TRGB User break controller Emulation mode Disabled Break Condition U7 8 Normal Prohibit R W on the fly Disabled Interrupts during step Disabled RENESAS 323 6 2 20 Trace Condition Command TAS TAC TAD e Setting TRACEACQUISITION_SET TAS e Cancellation TRACEACQUISITION_CLEAR TAC e Display TRACEACQUISITION_DISPLAY TAD Command syntax and parameters e Setting tas lt type gt channel lt channel_number gt lt traceopt gt lt option gt lt option gt lt option gt lt addropt gt lt dataopt gt lt r wopt gt lt prbopt gt lt nmiopt gt lt irlopt gt lt countopt gt lt delayopt gt e Cancellation tac lt type gt channel lt channel_number gt e Display tad lt type gt channel lt channel_number gt Parameter Type Description lt type gt Keyword Selects the trace condition type a b c Sets Trace Condition A B C lt channel_number gt Numeric or Sets a channel number from 1 to 8 keyword When hardware sequential condition has been specified specify p or r p Sequential point r Reset point lt tracetype gt Keyword Sets conditions for trace information acquisition type range Range trace
131. Normal Acquires profile data by stopping execution for normal branch instructions subroutine call instructions and exception processing The execution speed is slower than if Rough High speed is selected Even for an optimizing compiled program function calls by normal branch instructions can be measured Click the OK button to save the settings and close the dialog box Click the Cancel button to close the dialog box without saving the settings Click the Help button to open a help window for the dialog box Select Data can be accessed from the pop up menu for the Profile Tree window 4 Profile Tree window This window displays the relation of function calls in a tree structure It displays the address Address cell size Size cell and stack size Stack Size cell of each function the number of times each function is called Times cell and the profile data Cycle cell An example of display after user program execution is shown below Profile Tree Of Oy x Function Address Size Stack Size Times Cycle Application H OO000000 H O0000044 H O0000034 H O000028E H O0000000 H 00000000 H OOOO01E6 H O00000A8 H 00000034 H OO0000AA H O000013C H O00000TA Figure 5 85 Profile Tree Window after User Program Execution Note Displayed stack size does not represent the actual size Use it as a reference value when the function is called If there is no stack information fil
132. ONS Figure 5 80 Performance Analysis Window Measurement of Executed Addresses a Window name and display format b Channel numbers of Performance Analysis that were used c Display format d Results Table 5 88 Display Format of Results When Address is Selected Item Contents NO Channel number NAME Subroutine name MODE Subroutine measurement mode 11 Subroutine time measurement mode 1 12 Subroutine time measurement mode 2 13 Subroutine time measurement mode 3 CONDITION Subroutine start address and end address for 11 12 Timeout value and count setting value only when the respective conditions are set in l1 or 12 Start address range and end address range for 13 TOTAL RUN TIME Total period of execution H hours M minutes S seconds US microseconds NS nanoseconds 228 RENESAS Count Select Count to produce the information on the run times and number of passes in the user program in numerical form shown in figure 5 81 Execution time and execution count in numerical values MODE RATE RUN TIME E COUNT 11 D 3 6 D GG66H 66M GOS 459865US 926NS D 61984 I2 D 24 1 D GG66H 66M 63S 636769US 266NS D 64316 MAX D G666H GOH BOS 6667 O3US 52 ONS MIN D 6666H 66M GOS 660611US 22 ONS AVE D G6606H GOM GAS 6667 O3US 186NS 13 D 84 6 D GG66H 66M 10S 535551US 766NS D 21548 TOTAL RUN TIME D G666H G66M 12S 535 658US 46
133. ONS Figure 5 81 Performance Analysis Window Run Time and Execution Count Table 5 89 Display Format of Results When Count is Selected Performance Analysis Count of x ltem Contents NO Channel number NAME Subroutine name MODE Subroutine measurement mode 11 Subroutine time measurement mode 1 12 Subroutine time measurement mode 2 13 Subroutine time measurement mode 3 RATE Proportion of total execution time numerical value RUN TIME Execution time E COUNT Number of calls of this subroutine TOTAL RUN TIME Total execution time H hours M minutes S seconds US microseconds NS nanoseconds RENESAS 229 Graph Select Graph to produce a display of the execution time ratios of the user program as shown in figure 5 82 Performance Analysis Graph _ Oy x Used 1 2 3 a Display type Execution time ratio in graph form MODE RATE 6 16 26 36 46 5 6 66 76 86 96 166 11 3 6 I2 D 24 1 22326333 ee HHH HH HH HHH HHH HHH HH HH JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE JE ME EE TOTAL RUN TIME D OGAGAH 00H 12S 535058US 466NS Figure 5 82 Performance Analysis Window Execution Time Ratios Table 5 90 Display Format of Results When Graph is Selected Item Contents NO Channel number NAME Subroutine name MODE Subroutine measurement mode 11 Subroutine time measurement mode 1 12 Subroutine time meas
134. P table to translate the address information for the target trace data and display the result of translation Addresses will not be translated when this option is not selected or when VP_MAP is disabled This option can be selected when Bus trace or Bus AUD trace is selected in Display Add source Sets whether the source is added to the internal trace line If not specified adding the source and jumping to the specified line of source are disabled This option can be selected when AUD trace BUS AUD trace or Internal trace is selected in Display Cycle Sets the range to be displayed BUS Cycle Specifies the display range for external bus trace This option can be used when Bus trace is selected Specify bus cycle pointer values The pointer value is 0 for the bus cycle in which the delay condition is satisfied and negative for the bus cycles before that Specify the start pointer in Start and the end pointer in End Be sure to enter a value in each input area The defaults are D 512 for Start and D 255 for End AUD Internal Cycle Specifies the display range for AUD trace and MPU internal trace This option can be used when Bus AUD trace AUD trace or Internal trace is selected Specify instruction pointer values Specify the start pointer in Start and the end pointer in End Be sure to enter a value in each input area The defaults are D 512 for Start and D 255 for End Spec
135. Radio Enabled beyondthe Enabled Within beyond the Table used for button disabled range disabled TLB Range translation Normal Enabled Within the Enabled Within the range The VP_MAP table range Beyond the range The VP_MAP table Disabled Within beyond the The VP_MAP table range Beyond the Enabled Within the range The TLB table range Beyond the range TLB error Disabled Within beyond the Not translated range Disabled Within Enabled Within the range The TLB table i the Beyond the range TLB error Disabled Within beyond the Not translated range Virtual Enabled Within Enabled Within the range The TLB table disabled le the Beyond the range TLB error Disabled Within the range The TLB table Beyond the range TLB error Physical Enabled Within Enabled _Within beyond the Not translated disabled beyondthe disabled range range Notes 1 Contents of memory areas that are not reserved areas or user memory including emulation memory have no meaning The contents of such memory is not considered to be actual memory so should be ignored 2 If the pointer variables of the Memory or Watch windows indicate the following items they must be incorrect Word access from address 2n 1 Longword access from address 4n 1 4n 2 or 4n 3 3 No double float display in little endian operation 4 The following memory operations do not support the double float format Fill Memory dialog box Search Memory dialog box MEMORY_FILL command This Format speci
136. S Big CS0 Bus Width MD4 3 32 Bit Clock Mode MD2Z 0 Clock Mode 3 CSO Memory Type NORMAL CS1 Memory Type NORMAL CS2 Memory Type NORMAL CS3 Memory Type NORMAL CS4 Memory Type NORMAL CSS Memory Type NORMAL CS6 Memory Type NORMAL H UDI JTAG Clock 2 5MHz User system MD10 0 7ff Clock source Emulator Clock 27 8MHz Run status Break Cause of last break BREAK KEY Run Time Count D OOOOH OOM 00S 003172ZUS 000NS Condition A Sequential Not used Condition B Sequential Not used Interval Timer counter SZus Bus timeout 100us Multi break PRB1 Disabled RESET signal Enabled BREQ signal Enabled RDY signal Enabled NMI signal Enabled SLEEP signal Enabled Output trigger TRGB Disabled User break controller Break Condition U7 8 Emulation mode Normal Prohibit R W on the fly Disabled Interrupts during step Disabled Figure 5 87 System Status Window System Status window has the four sheets as shown in table 5 97 243 RENESAS Table 5 97 System Status Window Configuration Sheet name Description Session Contains such information on the current session as the whether a debugging platform is connected and the names of loaded files Platform Includes the status information on the emulator such as the name of the connected emulator Memory Includes the information related to the current state of memory such as memory mapping and the memory areas to be used by loaded object files Eve
137. S ESEE EREE 75 AS Downloading sissc ise csulieveeeasetlelevicts Apnnaeietiegstsstal E E E AE a E TT 4 5 1 Downloading the Sample Program seseessseesesreesesreerssesrrerrsreeresrerreserressesreereses 77 4 5 2 Displaying the Source Program lees eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceseceseceaecaecaeseeeaeeeseeees 78 4 6 Setting the Software Breakpoint 200 0 eee ee eecesecesecnsecseecaeecaeeeseseeeeeeeeeseeeenseeeseeeaeeaees 80 4 7 Executing the Program cx cis cescsscsscceietieved a ae i a ees Ste oti ashes See 81 4 8 Reviewing BreakPpOmnts s 4sc ese0csenseeesseesesceswsssovecgsneevscnsns cesschssnseaeesecengersergonevsncsiesesneseneea 83 4 9 Viewing Memory censeri E e E amine ile ai eee ee 84 4 10 Watching Vatables ceccar ies casuess coscusdeecseesecesacuscoovs tuseqanssvscecenssogencenessoneesessceauessuivantecs 85 4 11 Stepping Through a Program 0 0 cece eee ceecesecsseceecaecaecaeecaecsaecseecaeecaecsaecaaeeaesaeeaeeeaes 88 4 11 1 Executing the Step In Command 0000 cseeeeeeeceseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseneeees 89 4 11 2 Executing the Step Out Command ieee eecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 90 4 11 3 Executing Step Over Command 0 0 00 eceeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeeaeeeneeees 93 4 12 Displaying Local Variables ieee ceececeeeceeeceseeeeeeseceeeeeceseceseceeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeaeees 95 4 13 Saving and Loading the Session ee eceeeeceeeceeeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeees 97 Section 5 Emulator Functions vic
138. S1 Memory Type CSZ Memory Type CS3 Memory Type CS4 Memory Type CSS Memory Type CS6 Memory Type H UDI JTAG Clock User system MD10 0 Clock source Run status Cause of last break Run Time Count Condition A Sequential Condition B Sequential Interval Timer counter Bus timeout Multi break PRB1 RESET signal BREQ signal RDY signal NMI signal SLEEP simal Output trigger TRGB User break controller Emulation mode Prohibit R W on the fly Interrupts during step Status SH 7751 E8000S Emulator SH7751 PCI disabled External input clock Master NORMAL Big 32 Bit Clock Mode 3 NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL 2 SMHz 7ff Emulator Clock 27 8MHz Break BREAK KEY D OOOOH OOM 00S 003172US 000NS Not used Not used SZus 100us Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Break Condition U7 8 Normal Disabled Disabled A Session Platform Memory Events O Figure 5 68 Display of Execution Time in the System Status Window In the window the user program execution time will be displayed as decimal numbers of hours minutes etc The user is able to use the The minimum time to be measured by Go command 212 RENESAS execution in the Configuration dialog box to set a maximum period of measurement The maximum times are approximately 9999 hours with a sampling interval during execution of 52 us 488 hours with a sampling interval
139. The contents of the specified address where a breakpoint has been set are replaced by a break instruction during emulation RENESAS 5 5 2 Software Sequential Break Overview A software sequential break occurs when software breakpoints are encountered in the specified order Break condition The break condition is satisfied when instructions at addresses H 1000 and H 2000 have been User program executed in sequence Program flow 1000 Break condition 1 No break occurs 2000 Break condition 2 The break condition is satisfied when instructions at addresses H 1000 and H 2000 have been executed in sequence Figure 5 15 Example of a Software Sequential Break A reset point can be specified along with the pass points When execution passes the reset point or if the breakpoints are not executed in the specified order the record of execution for the software breakpoint up to that point is cleared The emulator then restarts checking for satisfaction of the sequential break conditions from the first breakpoint Up to seven pass points and one reset point can be specified 135 ztENESAS 1000 Break condition 1 500 Reset point 2000 Break condition 2 1000 Break condition 1 2000 Break condition 2 User program Program flow Break condition A break occurs when the instructions at addresses H 1000 and H 2000 have been executed in sequence No break occurs Wait for break condition 2 No br
140. To our customers Old Company Name in Catalogs and Other Documents On April 1 2010 NEC Electronics Corporation merged with Renesas Technology Corporation and Renesas Electronics Corporation took over all the business of both companies Therefore although the old company name remains in this document it is a valid Renesas Electronics document We appreciate your understanding Renesas Electronics website http www renesas com April 1 2010 Renesas Electronics Corporation Issued by Renesas Electronics Corporation http www renesas com Send any inquiries to http Awww renesas com inquiry 2CENESAS 10 11 12 Notice All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued Such information however is subject to change without any prior notice Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office Also please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or otherwise is gra
141. UBC for sequential break of Break Conditions U7 and U8 The user program only stops when Break Conditions U8 and U7 are satisfied in that order To use this sequential break function break conditions must be set for U7 and U8 Note For details on selecting a sequential break or trace condition refer to sections 5 5 Break Functions and 5 6 Realtime Trace Functions 109 RENESAS Loading flash memory Page The E8000S can download data to the flash memory area Prepare a program for writing to flash memory writing module and a program for erasing flash memory erasing module Use this page to set parameters for downloading to the flash memory area Figure 5 5 Configuration Dialog Box Loading flash memory Page 110 RENESAS Table 5 7 Loading flash memory Page Page Loading flash memory Description Enables or disables downloading to flash memory Select Enable to download to the flash memory area After Enable is selected the writing module is always invoked when Load Program is selected from the File menu or Load is selected from the Memory menu Disable Does not download to flash memory Enable Downloads to flash memory Erasing flash memory Enables or disables erasing before downloading to flash memory Select Enable to invoke the erasing module before invoking the writing module Disable Does not erase flash memory Enable Erases flash memory File name Sets
142. UDI Select 625 kHz 2 5 MHz initial value 5 MHz 10 MHz or 20 MHz lt Back Returns to the Memory Type page Finish Sets the emulator according to the content of each page then re initiates the emulator Cancel Cancels changes made to the settings Note The input clock for the H UDI must be set at a frequency lower than that of the clock that drives the peripheral internal module P9 120 RENESAS 5 3 5 3 1 Execution Realtime Emulation Table 5 15 shows the main forms of realtime emulation Table 5 15 Settings in the Configuration Dialog Box Form Normal execution Function Executes the user program from the current PC program counter address Procedure Click the Go button Select Go from the Run menu Execution from the reset vector Inputs the RESET signal to the MPU then execute the user program from the reset vector Click the Reset Go button Select Reset Go from the Run menu Execution from a specified address Executes the user program from the specified address Place the mouse cursor on the Source window Then click the Go To Cursor button or select Go To Cursor from the Run menu Specify a start address for the Program Counter in the Run dialog box then click the Go PC button Execution to a specified address Specifies the end address and executes the user program up to that address Specify a start address
143. WRITE H xx READ H xx A verification error has occurred xx numerical value SINCE THE USER SYSTEM IS DISCONNECTED THE PCI MODE IS DISABLE 342 PCI MD10 9 in the CPU Operating Mode dialog box is set to PC disabled Since the user system is disconnected the emulator is initiated with PCI disabled RENESAS 7 2 HDI Error Messages Related to the emulator Error messages that occur in HDI processing are also displayed in error message dialog boxes Tables 7 2 lists these error messages descriptions of the errors and solutions to the errors Table 7 2 HDI Error Messages Error Message Can not set target configuration Clock mode option Description and Solution A mode that is not supported by the emulator was selected for Clock in the Configuration dialog box Can not set target configuration Execution mode option A mode that is not supported by the emulator was selected for Execution mode in the Configuration dialog box General page Cannot use command when user program executing A command line was input while it was not possible to issue commands to the emulator Wait for the completion of processing Command timeout The emulator did not respond after a command was issued from the HDI so a timeout occurred in the HDI Exit from the HDI turn on the power supply of the emulator and restart the HDI Emulator command send receive check error Illegal communication be
144. Windows 2000 CD ROM drive Required for installing software RENESAS 1 3 Components The emulator consists of the E8000S station device control board and evaluation chip board Check all components after unpacking If any component is missing contact the sales agency from which the emulator was purchased 1 3 1 E8000S Emulator Station Table 1 3 lists the E8000S station components Table 1 3 E8000S Station Components HS8000EST11H Classification Item Quantity Remarks Hardware E8000S station 1 Trace cable 1 CN1 CN2 CN3 with 4 cores AC power cable 1 Fuse 1 3 A spare Manual HS8000EST11H 1 HS8000EST11HE description notes 1 3 2 Device Control Board and Evaluation Chip Board for the SH7751 Tables 1 4 and 1 5 list the device control board and evaluation chip board components Table 1 4 Device Control Board Components Classification SH7751 Item Quantity Remarks Hardware Device control board 1 One board to be installed in the emulator External probe 1 Probe input 4 Run break state output 1 Trigger output 1 GND 2 Manual HS7750EDD81H 1 HS7750EDD81 HE description notes RENESAS Table 1 5 Evaluation Chip Board Components for the SH7751 Item Product No Quantity Remarks Hardware Evaluation chip 1 One board QFP256 FP 256G board Software SH7751 E8000S 1 CD R emulator HS7751EBH81SR Additional documents SH7751 E8000S 1 HS7751EBH81HE P A Emulator Notes on Usage 1 3 3 Option
145. XXXX 62 An error occurred in the firm RAM area RENESAS 2 Device Control Board Test Programs A program operating in the device control board is being loaded and the device control board is being tested If an error occurs the following message is displayed Error Message INVALID FIRMWARE SYSTEM Description Another firmware has been installed Reinstall the correct emulator system program This message is displayed when the H UDI s input clock frequency is greater than the input clock frequency for the peripheral internal module Po EMULATOR FIRMWARE NOT READY The program operating on the device control board is not operating correctly Please check that the evaluation chip board is connected correctly FIRMWARE SYSTEM FILE NOT FOUND A program operating in the device control board does not exits An incorrect system program has been registered in the flash memory Reinstall the system program and restart the emulator SDI BOOT FAILED An incorrect evaluation chip board is connected Connect the correct evaluation chip board This message is displayed when the H UDI s input clock frequency is greater than the input clock frequency for the peripheral internal module Note While these error messages are displayed the message box shown in figure 3 26 is displayed Click the Yes button to display the CPU Operating Mode dialog box and modify the settings of the operating mode and H UD
146. able 3 3 is a list of system programs with descriptions Table 3 3 Contents of Emulator System Programs No File Name Contents of File 1 E8000 SYS System program for the emulator Controls the evaluation board and executes various commands such as for emulation Loaded to the memory of the emulator when the emulator system program is started up 2 SHDCT751 SYS MPU control program Controls the MPU on the evaluation chip board Loaded to the memory of the emulator when the emulator system program is started up 3 SHCNF751 SYS Configuration file for storing the MPU s operating mode and MAP information Loaded with the emulator system program 4 DIAG SYS Diagnostic maintenance program Loaded to the memory of the emulator station for maintenance The system programs are defined by using a dedicated E8000S system installation tool hereafter referred to as the ESI The procedure is described below To install the system programs use Auto Install or Custom Install mode Auto Install mode automatically installs all system program Custom Install mode allows flexibility in the installation of the system programs First Auto Install is described Select SH7751 E8000S Emulator Software Tools System Install Tool from Programs of the Start menu 50 RENESAS Accessories i StartUp x Favorites gt MS DOS Prompt Qy Windows Explorer sy Documents BS Tools gt HELAN Adapter Configuration gt Hitach
147. ace Window Item Description and Format No Line number in the Trace window Label Label name When LOST is displayed for AUD trace type no label is displayed R W to PRB Instruction pointer a The instruction location relative to the last branch instruction for which internal trace acquisition stopped Values other than for the pointer to the last instruction are negative Dxxxxxx Branch source and destination instructions are displayed but the pointer value is only displayed for the branch source instruction However if the branch source instruction has not been acquired the pointer value is displayed for the branch destination instruction alone R W to PRB AUD trace type b BRANCH branch source address DESTINATION branch destination address MEMORY R Memory read access in window trace MEMORY W Memory write access in window trace S TRACE Software trace LOST Information lost trace information is lost in realtime trace 201 RENESAS Table 5 72 AUD Trace Information Items and Display Format in Trace Window cont Item Description and Format R W to PRB 32 bit address c When the trace type is BRANCH or DESTINATION it is the branch source or destination address When the trace type is MEMORY R it is the read address When the trace type is MEMORY W it is the write address When the trace type is S TRACE it is the address where the macro was executed When the trace type is LOST
148. ally entered when a condition that has been specified as a trace stop condition Trace Conditions A B C either as individual channels or as sequential breaks is satisfied TRACE STOP will be displayed in the status bar e When trace is halted by the overflow of the trace buffer Returning from trace halt mode any of the following actions will return the system to normal emulation e Enter the END command in the Command Line window e Select Restart from the Trace window s popup menu Stopping the execution of the user program any of the followings actions will stop execution of the user program e Enter the HALT command in the Command Line window e Click the Stop button e Select Halt from the RUN menu 124 RENESAS 5 3 3 Display of Reason for Termination and Operating Status Reason for Termination when emulation is terminated the cause of termination is displayed as the Cause of last break on the Platform page in the System Status window and on the HDI window s status bar Table 5 18 is a list of the messages that indicate the various reasons for termination Table 5 18 Reasons for Termination Display BREAK CONDITION A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Meaning Break Condition A has been satisfied BREAK CONDITION B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Break Condition B has been satisfied BREAK CONDITION C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Break Condition C has been satisfied BREAK CONDITION U1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Brea
149. am dialog box and start execution Selecting Step Over Calls allows a function call to be executed as a single step Select Step from the Run menu The settings are the same as above Stopping function execution Steps out of a function Execution stops at the line after the calling line in the program Click the Step Out button Select Step Out from the Run menu Note The Break Condition U4 setting becomes invalid during step execution 5 4 2 Interrupts during Step Execution Interrupts cannot normally be accepted during step execution Select Interrupts during step from the General page of the Configuration dialog box if you want interrupts to be accepted during step execution RENESAS 127 5 5 Break Functions The emulator provides break function shown in table 5 21 The HDI displays a list of breakpoints in the Breakpoints window and the break conditions are specified in the dialog boxes for break functions Breakpoints Enable File Line Address Type 0C000040 Break Point Virtual Space ASID D Z55 OCO00000 Break Sequence Virtual Space ASID D O Break Condition A Sequential Tlb_s src 76 Tlbs PZ 40000088 Break Condition Bl Enable address H a0000088 Tlb_s sre 37 Tlbs_LZ00 40000058 Break Condition Cl Enable address H a00000bs Break Condition Ul Enable asid D 255 Figure 5 11 Breakpoints Window For details on the Breakpoints window refer to the manual for the
150. ame of the evaluation chip board A IC socket center lines E Patterning prohibited area Unit mm Tolerance 0 1 mm unless otherwise specified Figure B 1 Recommended Dimensions for Mount Pad Top View Observe the restrictions on the locations of parts shown in figure B 2 within the range of the external frame of the evaluation chip board as shown in figure B 1 359 RENESAS lt d _____ Evaluation chip board HS7751EBH81H bis User system board User system socket NQPACK256SE manufactured by Tokyo Eletech Corporation Unit mm Tolerance 0 1 mm unless otherwise specified Figure B 2 Restrictions on Parts Location 360 RENESAS Appendix C Connecting the Emulator to the User System C 1 Connecting the Evaluation Chip Board to the User System Installing an IC socket the NQPACK256SE manufactured by Tokyo Eletech Corporation for the QFP256 FP 256G package Only use the provided IC socket manufactured by Tokyo Eletech Corporation the NQPACK256SE with the evaluation chip board No other IC socket is suitable a Installing IC Socket Use the guide pins provided to determine where to install the IC socket as shown in figure C 1 Apply epoxy resin adhesive to the four projections on the bottom of the IC socket and fix the IC socket to the user system board Socket cover Apply epoxy resin adhesive to the four projections Guide pins Bottom view of the IC socket IC so
151. and end of measurement in the Break Condition B1 to B8 or Trace Condition B1 to B8 dialog boxes Select Time interval measurement Condition B from Emulation Mode in the Configuration dialog box Run the user program The results of measurement will be displayed next to Run Time Count in the System Status window The maximum period measured can be set by using The minimum time to be measured by Go command execution in the Configuration dialog box The values that can be set are 9999 hours 213 RENESAS with a sampling interval during execution of 52 us 488 hours with a sampling interval during execution of 1 6 us and 6 hours with a sampling interval during execution of 20 ns If the user specifies a time other than the available values the emulator will display instead of the setting When execution time measurement is in operation only the Stop button can be used to break the emulation of the user program When the Stop button is pressed measurement is halted In this case trace acquisition conditions will be ignored tracing will not take place When the user sets no conditions for Break Condition B or Trace Condition B the emulator will not measure the execution time in this way even if the user selects Time interval measurement Condition B in Emulation Mode in the Configuration dialog box When specifying the conditions for this function observe the limitations listed below e All settings
152. and the PERFORMANCE_SET command set by channel 1 RENESAS 301 Pin Mode Description patrace A trace acquisition under the timeout condition set by the Performance 1 dialog box and the PERFORMANCE_SET command set by channel 1 and execution continues sb1 Internal sequential break mode 1 A break occurs when break conditions set by Break Condition U2 1 are satisfied in the sequence of 2 1 sb2 Internal sequential break mode 2 A break occurs when break conditions set by Break Condition U3 2 1 are satisfied in the sequence of 3 2 1 sb3 Internal sequential break mode 3 A break occurs when break conditions set by Break Condition U4 3 2 1 are satisfied in the sequence of 4 3 2 1 timcb Measures the execution time with the execution time measurement function by specifying the condition no_break Temporarily disables the software and hardware break conditions Description This command displays and sets emulation mode during user program execution Examples 1 To set the emulation mode so that the user program is executed by inputting the RESET signal to the MPU at intervals of 100 ms GP EML MODE 100MS To display the current emulation mode during user program execution GP The display format is as follows gt GP Emulator emulation mode Cyclic reset 100 ms Notes When the user selects 6 5us 9 8us 50us 100us 500us 1ms 5ms 10ms 50ms 100ms 500ms or 1s for the emulation mo
153. are three ways to set the conditions Time measurement mode 1 The emulator measures the subroutine execution time between lt startopt gt and lt endopt gt and counts the number of times of execution The emulator starts to measure a subroutine within the range of lt startopt gt and lt endopt gt and stops measuring the subroutine outside the specified range The emulator starts to measure another subroutine within the range of lt startopt gt and lt endopt gt The emulator increments the pass count lt countopt gt when it passes through the lt startopt gt and fetches the programs in lt endopt gt The emulator does not measure the performance of a subroutine that was called from the target subroutine Specification mode time1 Time measurement mode 2 The emulator measures the subroutine execution time between lt startopt gt and lt endopt gt and counts the number of times of execution The emulator starts to measure a subroutine at lt startopt gt and stops measuring the subroutine at lt endopt gt The emulator increments the pass count lt countopt gt when it passes through the lt startopt gt and fetches the programs in lt endopt gt The emulator also measures the performance of a subroutine that was called from the target subroutine Specification mode time2 Time measurement mode 3 The emulator starts to measure a subroutine at lt start address range gt and stops measuring at lt end address range gt The emulat
154. ayed on the status bar and a message box is displayed TRACE STOP When more than one condition is set for range tracing the trace information is acquired when the OR of the conditions is satisfied When the trace stop condition is set trace information is acquired until the trace stop condition is satisfied When the trace stop condition is satisfied acquisition of trace information halts and the system enters the trace halt state To resume acquisition exit from the trace halt state by using the END command When a hardware sequential condition has been specified the sequential point and a reset point must be set Cancellation Cancels the trace conditions Trace Condition A B C sequential point or a reset point Trace Condition A B setting When the channel number is omitted all trace conditions are cancelled A channel number cannot be set when a hardware sequential condition is in place Display Displays the set trace conditions Trace Condition A B C When the channel number is omitted all trace conditions that have been set are displayed Display format is as follows Trace Condition Xn lt settings gt X A B C n Channel number from 1 to 8 327 RENESAS The following will be displayed when a hardware sequential condition has been specified Trace Condition X Sequential lt Enable Disable gt n lt Settings gt X A B n Sequential number starts from and condition is satisfied at the maximum of 7 or R fo
155. bbbb is the upper four digits of End value For example for the memory area H D8000 to H DBFFF and the switch set to 6 you would set the line to read device C WINDOWS EMM386 EXE RAM X D800 DBFF Save the CONFIG SYS file The following is about modifying the SYSTEM_INT file Add the following line to the 386Enh section in the SYSTEM INT file EMME xclude aaaa bbbb Here aaaa is the upper four digits of Start value and bbbb is the upper four digits of End value For example for the memory area H D8000 to H DBFFF and the switch set to 6 you would set the line to read EMMExclude D800 DBFF Save the SYSTEM INI file and exit the SYSEDIT Restart the host computer The following description is about Setting Up the PC Interface Board on WindowsNT 4 0 The PC interface board HS6000EIIOH uses the ISA bus slot and therefore the host computer must have a spare ISA bus slot This section describes the general procedure for installing the PC interface board in the host computer For details refer to the manual of your host computer Log on to the host computer as Administrator Check which upper memory areas have already been used Start Windows 4 0 48 Execute Start Programs Administrative Tools Common WindowsNT Diagnostics Click the Memory button in the Resource tab and in the following form make a note of the upper memory areas tha
156. ber of passes specified in Performance Analysis 1 To use this function select Timeout trace of Performance analysis under Emulation mode in the Configuration dialog box General Execution Model Execution Mode Loading flash memory CPU Operating Mode CPU SH 751 Clock l Emulator Clock 27 8MHz bd Emulation mode Timeout trace of Performance analysis IV Prohibit RW on the fly P Interrupts during step Memory area Nomal Physical Virtual A45 D Driver Emulator ISA Driver Change Figure 5 53 Configuration Dialog Box General Page Specify the timeout on the Time Out page and the maximum number of passes in execution on the Count page of the Performance 1 dialog box which can be opened from the Performance window displayed by selecting Edit in the pop up menu then execute the user program When either the execution time or count exceeds the specified conditions trace acquisition will stop For details on the Performance 1 dialog box Time Out page and Count page refer to section 5 8 Performance Analysis Function 188 RENESAS Other Conditions A minimum period can be specified for the time stamping of the measured external bus trace information Specify the minimum time under Time Stamp on the Trace Mode page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box Trace Acquisition x Trace Mode AUD Intemal Mode Condition A Condition B Condition C
157. bles firmly in place 366 RENESAS Power supply cable CN7 ae Trace cable CN1 Trace cable CN2 Trace cable CN3 GND cable Connected to the frame N ground Station to evaluaton chip board CN1 Station to evaluaton chip board CN2 Station to evaluaton chip board CN3 HS7751EBH81H board Figure C 4 Connecting the Trace Cables to the Evaluation Chip Board 367 RENESAS C 3 Installing the MPU on the User System CAUTION Use the attached dedicated driver The torque for screwing must be 0 098 Nem or less If a controlled torque is not possible stop screwing as soon as the pressure required changes abruptly Excessive pressure on the screws will damage the threads of the sockets or cause contact failures by cracking the solder on the IC socket If the emulator malfunctions while in use the cause might be a crack in the soldered connection of the IC socket Check for the conduction by using for example a tester and solder that part again if necessary Install the MPU in the IC socket after checking the location of pin 1 as shown in figure C 5 then use four screws M2 x 6 mm to fix the cover to the IC socket Hold the soldered part of the IC socket in place by hand to prevent rotational pressure due to screwing 368 RENESAS Screws M2 0 x 6 mm i Cover HQPACK256SE manufactured by Tokyo Eletech Corporation MPU SH7751 a Pin
158. branch instructions e Those BF and BT instructions with a displacement value of 0 e Those branching to H A0000000 on a reset If a completion type exception occurs during exception branch acquisition the address following the exception address will be acquired When user interrupts in emulator command input wait state or during user program execution is allowed by the INTERRUPT command information on interrupts when program execution including single step execution is started or stops can be acquired in realtime AUD Trace The AUD trace function acquires information output from the AUD pin of the MPU The AUD trace conditions are specified in the AUD Trace group box on the AUD Internal Mode page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box Information of the three types shown in table 5 68 is acquired 194 RENESAS Table 5 68 Internal Trace Information Acquired Information Branch instruction trace Description Acquires information on all branch instructions Window trace Acquires memory accesses in the specified range Memory ranges can be specified for channels A and B that is two ranges in total For tracing the bus cycle read cycles write cycles or both cycles can be specified Software trace Acquires the address where the trace instruction is executed and the contents of the variables specified by the trace instruction Note For the topic of how to use the trace instruction refer to the
159. but Renesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades Standard High Quality and Specific The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as Specific without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Further you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an application categorized as Specific or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books etc Standard Computers
160. by any operand Number of internal I O IOA Number of times the internal I O space was accesses accessed Number of cache DCRW Number of cache misses when data was read and misses written EC Number of cache misses when an instruction was accessed Number of TLB misses DT Number of TLB misses when data was accessed ET Number of TLB misses when an instruction was accessed Number of instruction EF Number of times instructions were fetched to the fetches cache area when cache was enabled Number of branches B Number of branch instructions BF other than displacement 0 BF S BT S BT other than displacement 0 BT S BRA BRAF JMP BT Number of times branch instructions were satisfied Number of instruction EA Number of times all instructions were accessed accesses Number of instruction E Number of times instructions were executed execution E2 Number of times two instructions were simultaneously executed EFP Number of times the FPU instructions were executed ETR Number of times TRAPA instructions were executed Number of interrupts INT Number of normal interrupts other than NMIs NMI Number of NMI interrupts Cache fill cycle ECF Instruction cache fill cycle OCF Operand cache fill cycle Elapsed time TM Elapsed time cycle 318 RENESAS Description Setting This command sets the measurement conditions of the MPU internal performance function Cancellation This command clears the condition to measure performance using the MPU i
161. cation to trace the user program when the data bus holds a value other than the specified value lt r wopt gt Specifies a read or write condition Valid when lt type gt is a or b To trace the user program during the read cycle direction read To trace the user program during the write cycle direction write 325 RENESAS Parameter lt prbopt gt Description Specifies an external probe signal condition Valid when lt type gt is a or b To specify an external probe signal condition prb lt bit specification gt A bit is specified as follows PRB1 to PRB4 signal bit specification 3 2 1 0 Bitlocation x x x x Value to be specified Specify 0 low level or 1 high level for x 4 3 2 1 PRBnumber When is specified the condition applies for any and all bits lt nmiopt gt Specifies an NMI signal Valid when lt type gt is a or b To trace the user program when the NMI signal is high nmi hi To trace the user program when the NMI signal is low nmi low lt irlopt gt Specifies IRLO to IRL 3 signal conditions Valid when lt type gt is a or b To specify IRLO to IRL3 signal conditions irl lt bit specification gt A bit is specified as follows To specify bits IRLO to IRL3 3 2 1 0 Bit location x x x x Value to be specified Specify 0 low level or 1 high level for x ee 3 2 1 0O IRL number When is specified the condition applies for any and all bits lt co
162. cecd cs cesssecssesctecarescisesces eo a 120 Settings in the Configuration Dialog BOX ee ee eecesecesecnsecneeceeeseeeneeees 121 Brat lation MOdES neemeni aen o aR ERER 122 Restrictions on Emulation Modes ssesesssseeseseesssresresrsrreresresresresrsseerreserrenreses 123 Reasons for Termination 0 0 0 icoon deenen n eet rotse oR Aiea geh 125 Operating Status Display eee a e E E E EE EESE 126 Step EXECUTION sairi eer E ER EE EERE 127 Break PUMCHOMS ssion E EEE E E EEES 128 Point Page Options ss ccscssecssecs decorsei eierniie ae eaae nA E R desteosicees 132 Break Point Dialog Box Options esseseessesessesrsrreseseeersserrresrsrreresreereserrresesreere 133 Sequence Page Opthos seriei eoori reoaine iisa E EREE 138 xiii Table 5 25 Table 5 26 Table 5 27 Table 5 28 Table 5 29 Table 5 30 Table 5 31 Table 5 32 Table 5 33 Table 5 34 Table 5 35 Table 5 36 Table 5 37 Table 5 38 Table 5 39 Table 5 40 Table 5 41 Table 5 42 Table 5 43 Table 5 44 Table 5 45 Table 5 46 Table 5 47 Table 5 48 Table 5 49 Table 5 50 Table 5 51 Table 5 52 Table 5 53 Table 5 54 Table 5 55 Table 5 56 Table 5 57 Table 5 58 Table 5 59 Table 5 60 Table 5 61 Table 5 62 Table 5 63 Table 5 64 Table 5 65 Table 5 66 Table 5 67 xiv Break Sequence Page Options esseseesseeseserrsrreresreerssrnrrerrstrerrsrerresrnrreresrree 140 Hardware Break Conditions 0 ce eeeeeeeceeeeceeeeeseceseeeaecaecaeecaeesaeeeeeeeeeene
163. ceessesseeseeeseessetsseeaes 58 CPU Operating Mode Modification Message Mode 2 eececseessesseeseceseesetsseeaes 59 Error Message on PC Interface Connection Failure 2 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 60 Error Message on Emulator Connection Failure eee eseeeeeereeeeeeeeeeeneneens 60 Troubleshooting PAID gic sctesceastsgecsssstet sss bbdedssesseptvoedaeecieestepsbeesbceaseastsonassdbasceeeseeponsthe 65 Diagnostic Program Initiation Confirmation Dialog BOX eee eeeeeeseeeseeeeeees 66 RENESAS Figure 3 31 Figure 3 32 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 8 Figure 4 9 Figure 4 10 Figure 4 11 Figure 4 12 Figure 4 13 Figure 4 14 Figure 4 15 Figure 4 16 Figure 4 17 Figure 4 18 Figure 4 19 Figure 4 20 Figure 4 21 Figure 4 22 Figure 4 23 Figure 4 24 Figure 4 25 Figure 4 26 Figure 4 27 Figure 4 28 Figure 4 29 Figure 4 30 Figure 4 31 Figure 4 32 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM Dialog BOX eee cee cee eneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeesaees 66 Terminating the Diagnostic Program by Clicking the STOP Button 0 67 Start Menu see cscccccictetecesecheescseeddeduanncepincecsdaansecSegaesseai genes cbapcnsestidenssntapeupvdesgesduedasvsoen 70 HDI W iin OW sereen nane ees ees aces sees EE E EEE E EE ETE E 72 Configuration Dialog BOX cieissiiersciiisireieeecsueisiisiresisirosescisntoes ssi cicensisesssi iseis siieiss
164. cesetten ornice nenn rs E a E E E E 375 E2 Em lation Memory ioesneserni oered ieee Een E EEEE ETE 375 E3 User Interface nne ae EE E E TE 376 E 4 Performance Measurement Function sesseseessseesesreeesrerrssrrrteresresresrerreserrenresrenresereresen 377 E 5 Hardware Break Function 00 0 cee ceecescesecsecseecseecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecssecaecaesaeseeeaeeeneeeas 377 E 6 Hardware Sequential Break and Trace Function eee eee ese cece creeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeerens 377 E 7 Clock Operating Mode si 2 258 ec aitiesin eesti aie he has ae 377 E 8 Differences between the Emulator and the SH7751 ooo eee eeceeeeeeceeeceseceneennecseeeneeenes 378 vii RENESAS Figures Figure 1 1 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 3 21 Figure 3 22 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 Figure 3 26 Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 29 Figure 3 30 viii Emulator for the SH7751 Connected via the IC Socket ccccccccssecessseeeeesteeeeseeeees 2 Emulator Hardware Components eesssssreeseereeeereeresrsresrerrssrrrrerersserrenrrernseerrsserreseeets 9 E8000S Station Front Panel eee ee eceeeceseeeeceeeeeseseeeeeeeeseseeeseeceeseeeeeeeeeseeeeet
165. cesii dirien eseo oae aee E E EEE EEES E EEE EKETE EEEE 2 3 1 System Configuration Using a PC Interface Board eee eee ceeeereeeeeees Section 3 Preparation before Use a cisciveaccnsstensaseciedcowassadtsnespasdosastonshaessansenvsnadtanenes 21 Description of Emulator Usage oo ec eceeceecesecesecesecesecseecaeeeaeesneseaeeeeeeeeeeseessesesessaeenaes Installing the Acrobat Reader 5 ccccc scstaccisacsehsssistadedicesesssyas Case sautabesstecadetsatsueunaatacrsics Emulator Connecti seinien einen ena E REEE E EE cheats 3 3 1 Connecting the Device Control Board ssesssseessersesesessrerrsrreresrerrssrrrresrrreeresrees 3 3 2 Connecting the Evaluation Chip Board eseesesssseeesseeresreeesrerresesrreresreeresrerrssene 3 3 3 Connecting the External Probe s sessseeeseeesesesererrsreeresrerresrrrrsserteerrsreeresreeresene 3 3 4 Selecting the ClOCK seiere aeaa a E A TE KE RERE 3 3 5 Connecting the System Ground sessseeseereesesrsererrsrteresterresrerrssesrenrrsreeresreeresene 3 3 0 System CONMECUOMN sssrini eiiie a i ar iep E aei E E EEA Setting Up with Windows Operating Systems c sscssssssssssessesssssessessseeseesessecsseeseesves 3 4 1 Setting Up the PC Interface Board on Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows We ac coe sceaa acs aeses an cactus ates eee 3 4 2 Setting Up the PC Interface Board on WindowsNT 4 0 ccsscsssessessessessesseessees 3 4 3 Setting up the PC Interface Board under Windows 2000
166. cification extension slot Figure 3 13 Installing the PC Interface Board 45 RENESAS Connecting the E8000S station to the PC Interface Board A WARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST Before using the emulator connect the E8000S station to the PC interface board with the PC interface cable supplied as shown in figure 3 14 E8000S station rear panel DCONT TRC__CONT Host computer PC interface board io Nj J a O m oj g ee x PC interface cable Figure 3 14 Connecting the E8000S Station to the PC Interface Board 46 RENESAS Setting Up the PC Interface Board on Windows 95 or Windows 98 Description on setting PC interface board HS6000EII01H is given below e Start Windows 95 or Windows 98 e Click the My Computer icon with the right mouse button and select Properties from the pop up menu The System Properties dialog box will be displayed e Double click the Computer icon in the Device Manager panel to open the Computer Properties dialog box e Click the Memory in the View Resources panel to display the memory resources Select one of the address ranges that is not listed in the Computer Properties dialog box For example
167. cified in the Trace Find dialog box Search conditions are the same as those for the trace filter functions except on the General page Place the cursor in the Trace window then click the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu Select Find from the menu Click Find Next in the pop up menu of the Trace window to jump to the next trace information item that satisfies the specified conditions Select the General page then select the Search from top check box to search from the start of the trace information General Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Time I Search from Top Figure 5 67 Trace Find Dialog Box General Page 211 RENESAS 5 7 Measurement of Execution Time 5 7 1 Measuring Execution Time to a Break or Termination This function provides a way of measuring the total time taken to execute the user program The user can use any of the methods shown in table 5 14 in section 5 3 1 to start the user program The total execution time is the total time with the user program in execution from the start of execution until the program stops due to the satisfaction of a break condition The resulting measurement is displayed next to Run Time Count in the System Status window System Status olx Item Cornected To CPU PCI MD10 9 Clock Status MDS Master Slave MD7 CSO Memory Type MD6 Endian MDS CSO Bus Width MD4 3 Clock Mode MD2 0 CSO Memory Type C
168. ck must be modified during execution of the user program method 2 above is recommended for the measurement of the number of cycles e Measuring the cache hit ratio Set measurement channel to record the number of cache hits in the reading and writing of data and set measurement channel 2 to record the number of times the operand cache was accessed the number of read and write operations 234 RENESAS When the user sets the execution of the Go command as the condition for the start and end counting on channels 1 and 2 the emulator will measure the number of times the cache was accessed the number of times cache miss occurred and the cache hit ratio of the user program in execution can then be calculated e Measuring the execution times of specified program areas against the total execution time Set execution of the Go command as the condition for the start and end of measurement on measurement channel 1 and set the PC values for the start and end of measurement on measurement channel 2 Select the elapsed time in cycles as the item to be measured on measurement channels 1 and 2 When the emulator measures the execution time under these conditions it will measure the total execution time and the execution time over the specified address range of the program and the user can compare the execution time over the specified address range of the program against the total execution time of the program Note When the emulator is measuring
169. cket User system board Figure C 1 Installing the IC Socket 361 RENESAS b Soldering After the epoxy resin adhesive is hardened solder the IC socket to the user system board with the socket cover put on the IC socket The socket cover protects contacts on the IC socket from flux or solder splashed by soldering Be sure to completely solder the leads so that the solder slops gently over the leads and forms solder fillets Use slightly more solder than the MCU Connecting the HS7751EBH81H board with the user system a Use screws to fix the spacers to the HS7751EBH81H board Find where pin 1 of the IC socket will be on the HS7751EBH81H board and the user system then connect the two boards after determining the side which the IC socket will be connected to b Use screws and the dedicated driver that comes with the socket to fix the IC socket to the HS7751EBH81H board Stop tightening screws as soon as a small rotation abruptly requires more force 0 098 Nem or less is the standard if a controlled torque is possible Excessive pressure on the screws may damage the threads of the socket or cause a contact failure due to solder cracking on the IC socket c Use four screws M2 x 10 mm to fix the IC socket on the HS7751EBH81H board to the IC socket on the user system Drive each of the four screws gradually tightening each diagonally opposite pair in turn as shown Do not concentrate pressure on a single screw as this will ca
170. command When output results the output is also described 6 2 List of Commands The following is a list of HDI emulation commands Sections in this manual are indicated in the second column If there is no section number the description is in the Hitachi Debugging Interface User s Manual 268 RENESAS Table 6 1 List of Commands Command Section Abbreviation Description Comment ASSEMBLE AS Assembles program ASSERT Checks condition BREAKCONDITION_CLEAR 6 2 1 BCC Clears hardware break conditions BREAKCONDITION_DISPLAY 6 2 1 BCD Displays hardware break conditions BREAKCONDITION_ENABLE 6 2 1 BCE Enables or disables hardware break conditions BREAKCONDITION_SET 6 2 1 BCS Sets hardware break conditions BREAKCONDITION_U_CLEAR 6 2 2 BCUC Clears internal breakpoints that have been set BREAKCONDITION_U 6 2 2 BCUD Displays internal breakpoints that _DISPLAY have been set BREAKCONDITION_U 6 2 2 BCUE Enables or disables internal _ENABLE breakpoints that have been set BREAKCONDITION_U_SET 6 2 2 BCUS Sets an internal breakpoint BREAKPOINT 6 2 4 BP Sets software breakpoints BREAKPOINT_CLEAR 6 2 4 BC Clears software breakpoints that have been set BREAKPOINT_DISPLAY 6 2 4 BD Displays software breakpoints that have been set BREAKPOINT_ENABLE 6 2 4 BE Enables or disables software breakpoints that have been set BREAKSEQUENCE_CLEAR 6 2 5 BSC Clears software se
171. ction to show that a software breakpoint is set at that address W tutorial c 000024aa for i 0 i lt 10 i 000024b2 j rand 000024c2 if j lt Oj f 000024c6 j 5j 000024ca ali j 000024e6 Break sort a oo0024f6 min a 0 000024fa max a 9 000024fe min 0 00002502 nax 0 00002506 change a 00002516 min a 9 0000251a max a 0 0000251e while 1 00002530 _sort void sort long a long t int i j k gap Figure 4 11 Source Window Setting a Software Breakpoint The emulator has many break functions For details refer to section 5 5 Break Functions 80 RENESAS 4 7 Executing the Program e To execute the program select Reset Go from the Run menu or click the Reset Go button on the toolbar The program will be executed up to the breakpoint that has been set and will then stop The line where the program has halted will be highlighted in the Source window int tutorial c O00024aa for i 0 i lt 10 i jf 000024b2 j rand 000024c2 if j lt 0 000024c6 j j 000024ca 000024f6 000024fa 000024fe 00002502 00002506 00002516 0000251a 0000251e 00002530 _sort void sort long a long t int i j k gap Figure 4 12 Source Window Break State 81 RENESAS The user can see the cause of the last break through the Platform sheet in the System Status window Select Status from the View menu The System Status windo
172. cts the clock supplied to drive the MPU Note Use the Conditions for memory access Specifies whether physical or virtual Configuration dialog box to make these addresses are accessed when memory is accessed settings Conditions for emulation 100 Sets conditions for emulation in terms of the following items Operating mode during execution emulation mode Interrupts during step execution enabled or disabled Memory access during emulation enabled or disabled Minimum unit for the execution time measurement counter Timeout detection period for emulation commands Entering multibreak mode enabled or disabled Input of RESET signals enabled or disabled Input of BREQ signals enabled or disabled Input of RDY signals enabled or disabled Input of NMI signals enabled or disabled Input of SLEEP signals enabled or disabled Sequential conditions for Condition A and Condition B Controls conditions for trigger output during breaks enabled or disabled Whether to use the user break controller UBC in the MPU RENESAS Table 5 2 Setting the Emulator s Operating Conditions cont Setting Item Description MPU setting Clock mode Sets the mode for the MPU driving clock Use the CPU PCI mode Specifies the PCI mode Operating Mode CSO dialog box to make bus ae mamony iype and Specifies the memory type and bus width in the CS0 space these settings Endian Specifies big or little en
173. cution the user can interrupt the MPU D 4 Control Input Signals RESETP RESETM BREQ and RDY The MPU control input signals are RESET BREQ and RDY The RESET signal is only valid when emulation has been started with normal program execution i e the RESET signal is invalid when emulation has been started with step execution The BREQ and RDY signals are valid when displaying or updating the memory contents and during normal program execution and step execution The RESET BREQ and RDY signals are not input to the MPU when emulation is suspended break The input of the RESET BREQ or RDY signal during execution or step execution can be disabled by a setting in the Configuration dialog box 372 RENESAS D 5 Bus State Controller The bus state controller has a programmable wait mode and a RDY pin input mode The programmable wait mode is valid when the emulation memory or user external memory is accessed but input to the user RDY pin is only valid when user external memory is accessed D 6 Emulator Status and Internal Modules Some internal modules do not operate when the emulator is in break mode Table D 1 shows the relation between the emulator s state and operation of the internal modules Table D 1 Emulator State and Operation of Internal Modules Operation During Operation During Emulation Emulation Halted Execution or Step Internal Module Break Execution TMU Timer Yes Yes RTC realtime clock Y
174. d as lt time1 gt and the end of the period as lt time2 gt Specify the search time as follows hhh mm ss uuuuuu hhh Hours numeric from 0 to 999 mm Minutes numeric from 0 to 59 ss Seconds numeric from 0 to 59 uuuuuu Microseconds numeric from 0 to 999999 Searches for trace information that satisfies the specified conditions and displays the information for bus cycles on which it was collected The search is in the range specified by lt startcycle gt and lt endcycle gt For conditions that can be specified see the description of lt option gt Examples 1 To display trace information with the address bus in the range from H 10027C to H 100304 or the write cycle for the last five instructions of acquired trace information TS RANGE D 5 TO 0 ADDRESS H 10027C TO H 100304 DIRECTION WRITE 2 To display trace information with the data bus value at H 4750 in read cycles for the last five instructions of acquired trace information TS RANGE D 5 TO O DATA H 4750 DIRECTION READ 337 RENESAS 6 2 24 Address Translation Table Command VS VC VD VE e Setting VPMAP_ SET VS e Cancellation VPMAP_CLEAR VC e Display VPMAP_DISPLAY VD e Enable Disable VPMAP_ENABLE VE Command syntax and parameters e Setting vs lt lsaddress gt lt leaddress gt lt paddress gt e Cancellation ve lt address gt e Display vd e Enable Disable ve lt enable gt Parameter Type D
175. d with the CLOCK command This emulator can use a clock source running at up to 167 MHz triple the external clock frequency of 55 6 MHz as the MPU clock input m X Crystal oscillator 10 to 20 MHz CLOCK command U External clock 1 to 55 6 MHz m 13 Emulator internal clock 13 9 MHz 27 Emulator internal clock 27 8 MHz L 55 Emulator internal clock 55 6 MHz Crystal Oscillator A crystal oscillator is not supplied with the emulator Use one that has the same frequency as that of the user system When using a crystal oscillator as the MPU clock source the frequency must be from 10 to 20 MHz CAUTION Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting the CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR The USER PROGRAM will be LOST Use the following procedure to install the crystal oscillator 1 Check that the emulator power switch is turned off Ensure that the power lamp on the left side of the E8000S station s front panel is not lit 2 Attach the crystal oscillator into the terminals on the evaluation chip board figure 3 7 3 Turn on the user system power and then the emulator power Then crystal oscillator will be automatically set and setup This function will allow the execution of the user program at the operating frequency of the user system even when the user system is not connected to the emulator 32 RENESAS Crystal oscillator Enlarged view Evaluation chip board Crys
176. data mask B Q byte direction write 8 To display the settings of all internal breakpoints BCUD 282 RENESAS 9 Display when lt ubc gt is set to ube bcu with the EXECUTION_MODE command gt BCUD Break Condition Ul Enable address H 100000 data mask B Q byte direction write Break Condition U2 Enable address H 00000 pc asid D 0 Break Condition U3 Enable address H 00000 pcafter ml asid D 16 Break Condition U4 Enable access data direction read Break Condition U5 Enable io Break Condition U6 Enable ldtlb Break Condition U7 Disable i Break Condition U8 Disable To disable internal breakpoint channel 1 conditions BCUE CHANNEL 1 DISABLE 10 To enable all internal breakpoint conditions BCUE ENABLE 11 To cancel internal breakpoint channel 2 conditions BCUC CHANNEL 2 12 To cancel all internal breakpoint conditions BCUC Notes Break Condition U7 and U8 are implemented by using the user break controller To use these conditions specify the UBC released mode ube bcu or UBC sequential mode ube sbcu with the EXECUTION_MODE command If Break Condition U7 or U8 is used while the UBC is released to the user ube user is set an error will occur When the TRACE MODE command sets the internal MPU trace in the continuous trace mode Break Condition U5 and U6 are used for the trace acquisition of the internal I O access and LDTLB instruction execution If the continuous trace is e
177. de SET POINT IS NOT IN RAM A write inhibited address is specified by the BREAKPOINT or BREAKSEQUENCE_SET command Specify a correct address CANNOT RECOVER A XXXXXXXX The break instruction at the address xxxxxxxx where a breakpoint is specified with the BREAK or BREAKSEQUENCE_SET command could not be recovered after GO command execution is terminated Accordingly a break instruction remains at the breakpoint address A hardware error might have occurred Correct the error and reload and re execute the program NOT FOUND The specified data or information was not found Correctly specify data INTERNAL I O AREA The internal I O area was accessed INTERNAL AREA An attempt was made to access an area other than CSO to CS6 This area cannot be accessed with this command Check the specified address ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION ADDRESS The memory contents of the address specified with the BREAK or BREAKSEQUENCE_SET command is a break instruction A breakpoint cannot be specified at this address 341 RENESAS Table 7 1 Error Messages cont Error Message Description and Solution TLB ERROR TLB error occurred Check the address ASID value and MPU TLB contents specified with the command TLB MISS HIT TLB miss hit error occurred Check the address ASID value and MPU TLB contents specified with the command TLB OR ADDRESS ERROR TLB error or address error occurred Check the address ASID
178. de the emulator will disable all trace and break conditions Also the emulator cannot halt trace when the user selects the Halt button in the Trace window When the user selects sb1 sb2 or sb3 the user must set Break Condition U When the user selects sb1 sb2 or sb3 pabreak or patrace for the emulation mode the emulator will disable the software break conditions 302 RENESAS 6 2 12 ID ID Command syntax and parameters id Description This command displays the emulator system program version Examples To display the emulator system program version ID The display format is as follows gt ID SH7751 E8000S Emulator system file Vm n Copyright C Hitachi Ltd xxxx Licensed Material of Hitachi Ltd RENESAS 303 6 2 13 INTERRUPT IR Command syntax and parameters e Setting ir lt interrupt_enable gt lt imask gt e Display ir Parameter Type lt interrupt_enable gt Keyword Description Specifies acceptability of nonmaskable external hardware and peripheral module interrupts disable Does not accept nonmaskable external hardware or peripheral module interrupts enable Accepts only nonmaskable interrupts lt imask gt Numeric Enables acceptance of external hardware and peripheral module interrupts and sets the interrupt mask level An interrupt with a lower level than the set value is masked and with a higher level than the set value is accepted
179. der certain use conditions Further Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas
180. description of the intrinsic functions in the Super H C C Compiler User s Manual AUD tracing is in one of the three trace acquisition modes shown in table 5 69 Table 5 69 AUD Trace Acquisition Modes Acquisition Mode Realtime Description When the next branch occurs while the trace information is being output the output of the information is stopped and the next trace information is output The user program can be executed in realtime but some trace information may be lost Full trace When the next branch occurs while the trace information is being output the MPU stops operations until the information is output The user program is not executed in realtime Select the AUD Trace radio button in the AUD Internal Mode page The options in the AUD Trace group box in the AUD Internal Mode page are described below 195 RENESAS Trace Acquisition 2 Realtime tace M CPU clock E Read Write Bance Apply Figure 5 58 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box AUD Internal Mode Page 196 RENESAS Table 5 70 AUD Trace Group Box Options Option Description Mode Selects one of the following AUD trace acquisition modes Realtime trace AUD trace in realtime mode Full trace AUD trace in non realtime mode Clock Selects one of the following minimum time of AUD trace acquisition CPU clock Sets the CPU clock signal as the AUD acquisition clock 1 2 CPU clock Sets 1 2 CKIO as the AUD acquisition
181. dian H UDI clock setting Sets the input clock for the H UDI Hitachi User Debugging Interface JTAG interface Memory type for CS1 to CS6 space Sets the memory types for CS1 to CS6 to be used for the analysis of traced data 101 RENESAS 5 2 1 Configuration Dialog Box Select Configure Platform from the Setup menu to open the Configuration dialog box Configuration Ed General Execution Model Execution Mode Loading flash memory CPU Operating Mode CPU SH7751 Clock Emulator Clock 27 8MHz2 inf Emulation mode Normal M Prohibit RW on the fly Interrupts during step Memory area Nomal Physical C Virtual Asio Emulator ISA Driver Change Figure 5 1 Configuration Dialog Box Use this dialog box to set the emulation conditions for the emulator 102 RENESAS Table 5 3 Configuration Dialog Box Page General Description Selects the MPU driving clock and specifies the emulation mode enabling disabling of memory access during emulation whether or not interrupts are accepted during emulation with step execution and setting conditions related to memory and produces a dialog box for the setting of driver software Execution Mode1 Sets the unit of time for counting by the execution time measurement counter timeout detection period for emulation commands multibreak mode and whether or not the input of the RESET BREQ RDY NMI a
182. dicates the type of memory in area 6 CS6 space Select NORMAL initial value BURST ROM MPX or PCMCIA lt Back Returns to the MD Pin page Next gt Goes to the next page H UDI JTAG Clock Cancel Cancels changes made to the settings Note The emulator uses this setting to acquire bus trace information To correctly acquire bus trace information in the CS2 or CS3 space set each option correctly 118 RENESAS SDRAM synchronous DRAM bus widths that can be connected for selection by CS2 and CS3 can be classified as follows for details refer to the hardware manual SDRAM 16M 1M x 8bit x 2 64M 2M x 8bit x 4 Bus width 32bit 16M 1 Mbits x 8 bits x 2 x 4 64M 2 Mbits x 8 bits x 4 x 4 SDRAM Other Bus width 32bit 16M 512 kbits x 16 bits x 2 x 2 64M 1 Mbits x 16 bits x 2 x 4 64M 512 kbits x 32 bits x 4 x 1 64M 1 Mbits x 32 bits x 2 x 1 16M 256 kbits x 32 bits x 2 x 1 RENESAS 119 H UDI JTAG Clock Page Sets the H UDI JTAG interface input clock Set the conditions and click the Finish button to close the CPU Operating Mode dialog box The HDI will be restarted CPU Operating Mode H UDI JTAG Clock H UDI JTAG Clock lt Back Cancel Help Figure 5 9 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box H UDI JTAG Clock Page Table 5 14 H UDI JTAG Clock Page Item Description H UDI JTAG Clock Sets the frequency of the clock for input to the H
183. dition A page Break ConditionB CondtinC Condition U Point Sequence Condition A Condition Edit Reset Reset All Set Condition Cancel Apply Help Figure 5 21 Break Dialog Box Condition A Page 143 RENESAS Table 5 28 Condition A B C Page Options Option Description Condition Displays the current settings for Break Condition A B or C Empty is displayed if there are no settings 1 to 8 Settings for Break Condition x1 to x8 x A B or C Edit Modifies the Break Condition A B or C settings selected in the Condition list box Clicking this button opens the Break Condition Xn dialog box X A B or C n channel number Set Condition Modifies the Break Condition A or B settings selected in the Condition list box Clicking this button opens the Condition dialog box This option is not displayed on the Condition C page Reset Clears the Break Condition A B or C settings selected in the Condition list box Reset All Clears all Break Condition A B or C settings in the Condition list box Click condition 1 to select it from the Condition list box Click the Edit button to open the Break Condition A7 dialog box Hardware break conditions are specified in the Break Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 dialog box which has the tabbed pages listed in table 5 29 However Break Condition C1 to C8 dialog box only has the Add
184. dition A page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box Click the Set Condition button to open the Condition dialog box The Condition dialog box has the pages shown in table 5 60 Table 5 60 Pages of the Condition Dialog Box Pages Page Description History Displays the history of conditions that have been set as Trace Condition A or B Conditions can be moved from the History page to the Entry List page Entry List Creates modifies duplicates and deletes conditions for Trace Condition A or B For details on each page refer to the description under Displaying a History of Hardware Break Conditions and Creating a New Condition in section 5 5 3 Hardware Break Sequential Trace Stop a Overview A sequential trace stop occurs after a set of channels of a trace stop condition have been satisfied in a specified order This function uses Trace Condition A or B a sequence of up to seven trace stop conditions and one reset point can be specified as Trace Condition A or B The user must consider the order of satisfaction in specifying trace stop conditions for Trace Conditions A and B tracing only stops when the trace stop conditions have all been satisfied in the order specified by the user When the reset point is passed the record of sequential trace stop conditions that have been satisfied to that point is cleared and the emulator restarts checking for satisfaction of the sequential trace stop conditions from the
185. dition U cccccccccessececeesceceesnececssaeeecseeeecesseeeeenenes 162 5 5 6 Internal Sequential Break ee cee ceeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeseeaecsaecsaesseeeaeeeaes 171 SDT Forced Break c0ik atau ieiasasi E chia ie a eee 173 5 5 8 Forced Break on Writing to a Write Protected Area eeeeeeceseceseeeeeees 173 5 5 9 Break Due to Trace Buffer Overflow 0 eee cece cee eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaecnaeenaes 173 DIVO Vim Out Break sissies ccs ascexcebacvewsbenedsareizessnsbaceuiecme qeveeeasiuscdete ER EA 174 Realtime Trace Functions c cccssiesssesesesecscsesetuecescuegscpochsescoicevasceoceduecoaessaeevoensnecbeueces ceneets 175 5 6 1 External Bus Trace Function eee ceecsecseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseessecsaecsaesaeeaeeenes 175 5 6 2 External Bus Trace Timing oo eee ee eeecesecssecseeceeecseeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessessaeesaeenaes 190 5 6 3 Internal Trace FUnctions ssesssscsssesconssoersnssensessesunsessessessonsseersuesserssesenes 192 3 6 4 Trace Display icici inca cowie beet he ies ci eas 198 56 5 Trace Search Functions ssc cccssccsiesasecsayeves icsi oari sotasceovenssetesesnscescecnserscsesecee conse 205 Measurement of Execution Time 00 0 ee ee ceseceecseecseecseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeaeeeaeesaecaesaeeneeenes 212 5 7 1 Measuring Execution Time to a Break or Termination 0 eee eee eee eeeeeee 212 5 7 2 Measuring Execution Time between Satisfaction of Specified Conditions 213 Performance Analysis
186. dow is being updated the message RUN TIME OVERFLOW will be displayed Entering a function name in Subroutine Address of the Input Function Range dialog box will automatically set the address range of that function in the area for the user input of addresses to the Address page 226 RENESAS Input Function Range x Subroutine Address _main Figure 5 79 Input Function Range Dialog Box Displaying the Results of Performance Measurement The results of performance measurement are displayed in the Performance Analysis window To display the results click the right hand mouse button with the cursor in the Performance Analysis window then select a menu item from the pop up menu The menu items are shown in table 5 87 Table 5 87 Menu Items for Displaying the Results Menu Item Description Address Displays the list of executed addresses default Count Displays the number and period of execution Graph Displays the proportions of execution times to the whole period of execution on a graph 227 RENESAS Address Select Address to produce a list of addresses as shown in figure 5 80 fa Performance Analysis Address OF x Used 1 2 3 Display type Subroutine address list NO NAME MODE CONDITION Pat 11 68666666 66606066 D 6606H 66H 61S 666866US D 66661 PA2 I2 66666668 66606128 66666068 00000128 00060012A 00008018A TOTAL RUN TIME D 6666H 66N 12S 2535 658US 46
187. e sni extension output from the optimizing linkage editor the stack size is not displayed 5 Profile Chart window This window displays the relation of calls for a specific function This window displays the calling relation for the function specified in the Profile List 238 RENESAS window or Profile Tree window The specified function is displayed in the middle the calling function on the left side and the called function on the right side Values beside the calling and called functions show the number of times the function has been called Sf Profile Chart _rand Figure 5 86 Profile Chart Window after User Program Execution 6 Specifying start and stop conditions for profile data measurement The profile data is measured between the start and stop of user program execution The start and stop conditions for profile data measurement are shown in table 5 95 Table 5 95 Start and Stop Conditions for Profile Data Measurement Condition Item Settings Start Current e Selecting Go from the Run menu Go button on the toolbar condition programi e Specifying the start address in Program Counter in the Run counter PC dialog box of the Run menu and clicking the Go PC button Reset vector e Selecting Reset Go from the Run menu Reset Go button on address the toolbar e Clicking the Go Reset button in the Run dialog box of the Run menu Stop Internal Break conditions set in th
188. e Break Condition U1 U8 dialog box condition break Stop Selecting Go To Cursor from the Run menu Go To Cursor address button on the toolbar Halt Selecting Halt from the Run menu Stop button on the toolbar Note When a break instruction is executed user program execution stops Restrictions on Profiler Functions When user interrupts are allowed by the INTERRUPT command keyword enable is specified profile data measurement cannot be enabled Disable user interrupts by the INTERRUPT command specify keyword disable then enable profile data measurement 239 RENESAS When profile data measurement is enabled there are some restrictions on emulation functions as shown in table 5 96 Table 5 96 Restriction on Emulator Functions When Profiler Is Enabled Emulation State Restrictions User program has e stopped User interrupts cannot be allowed by the INTERRUPT command if user interrupts have been enabled they are disabled Execution to a specified address temporary break shown in table 5 15 cannot be made User program is e being executed The settings of Emulation mode in the Configuration dialog box General page are ignored The settings of Sequence and TRGB Option in the Configuration dialog box Execution Mode 2 page are ignored The settings for software break software sequential break hardware break hardware sequential break and internal sequential break Break Conditio
189. e Sequential Break Click the Edit button to open the Condition dialog box which will be used to add the sequential trace stop conditions For details on the sequence and status of sequential trace stop conditions refer to section 5 5 4 Hardware Sequential Break 183 RENESAS Trace Stop Due to Trace Buffer Overflow Trace acquisition can be stopped when the trace buffer in the emulator overflows Select Trace stop under Buffer Over Flow on the Trace Mode page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box Trace Acquisition Figure 5 51 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Trace Mode Page 184 RENESAS Range Trace Mode a Overview Information is only acquired while the specified conditions are satisfied User program Program Trace buffer Trace acquisition condition is satisfied When the user program stops the trace buffer stores trace information from the address at which the trace acquisition condition was satisfied Break condition is satisfied Figure 5 52 Example of Range Trace Mode The conditions for range tracing are shown in table 5 61 These are AND conditions Table 5 61 Range Trace Conditions Condition Description Address bus Satisfied when the value on the address bus matches the specified value Data bus Satisfied when the value on the data bus matches the specified value Read write Satisfied when the RD and RDWR signal levels match the specified condition Ex
190. e 5 35 Example Display of the Status of a Hardware Sequential Break Condition 161 RENESAS 5 5 5 Internal Break Break Condition U Overview These break functions use the MPU s on chip break function The internal break conditions are shown in table 5 43 They are satisfied by an AND operation Table 5 43 Internal Break Conditions Break Condition Description Address bus Satisfied when the value on the address bus matches the specified value PC Satisfied when the value on the address bus for an instruction fetch matches the specified value The break can be specified to occur either before or after execution of the fetched instruction Data bus Satisfied when the value on the data bus matches the specified value Read write Satisfied when the RD and RDWR signal levels match the specified condition When no condition is specified here the read write condition is always satisfied This condition is usually specified in combination with an address bus or data bus condition ASID Satisfied when the value in the ASID register is as specified Access type bus state Satisfied when the bus cycle matches the specified condition condition When All is specified here all bus cycles including instruction fetch cycles satisfy the condition This condition is usually specified in combination with an address bus or data bus condition Internal I O area access Breaks when the internal I O area is accessed
191. e CHECK command For details on the CHECK command refer to section 6 2 6 CHECK command 262 RENESAS 5 15 3 Checking the Power Supply and Clock State of the User System The emulator monitors the power supply and the clock state of the user system When the MPU clock is selected by setting USER in the CLOCK command the next operation will be carried out when the user system power is turned off or the clock is stopped according to the emulator state Notes 1 When the user system power is turned off the turn off of the user system power will be detected before the clock will stop Vno is lower than 2 65 V 2 The meaning of clock will stop above is the stop of the clock while the user system power is still turned on DDQ During User Program Execution e When user system power is turned off V po has become lower than 2 65 V VCC Down is displayed When power is turned on emulation will resume and the PC of the currently executing user program will be displayed in the host computer e When clock is stopped V is 2 65 V or more User system not ready is displayed and terminates the emulator system program When using the emulator continuously restart the system program Emulator Command Wait State e When user system power is turned off or clock is stopped User system not ready is displayed and the emulation system program links down When you wish to continue to use the emulator link up the system progra
192. e MMU If the user does not specify vpmap the emulator will specify physical addresses lt timeopt gt Specifies the timeout period The user can use parameter lt timeopt gt in channel number 1 and time measurement modes 1 and 2 When the user sets a condition to PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS1 the emulator stops the execution of the user program after the time set to lt timeopt gt has passed In this case the user must specify pabreak in the GO_OPTION command Specification time lt time gt Parameter lt time gt specifies the time value as the following format mm ss uuuuuu mm minute 0 to 59 ss second 0 to 59 uuuuuu microsecond 0 to 999999 lt countopt gt 312 Specifies the pass count The user can use parameter lt countopt gt in channel number 1 and subroutine time measurement modes 1 and 2 Specification count lt count gt H 1 to H FFFF can be specified for count RENESAS Description Setting This command sets the condition to measure the subroutine performance Up to eight subroutines can be specified in measurement modes and 2 and up to four subroutines can be specified in measurement mode 3 Cancellation This command clears the condition to measure the subroutine performance When the user specifies a channel number the emulator clears the specified channel number When the user does not specify any channel number all of the performance conditions are clea
193. e Select Source from the View menu The Open dialog box is displayed Open Lookin Tutoisd AA Al cl Debug fa initsct c a lowsre c sbrk c File name tutorial c Files of type c Files amp cx inl x Cancel Z Figure 4 9 Open Dialog Box 78 RENESAS e Select tutorial c and click the Open button The Source window is displayed W tutorial c BEES Line Address BP Label Source z het z 7 7 7 000024a8 _hain void main void long a 10 min max long j int i 000024aa for i 0 i lt 10 i 000024b2 j rand 000024c2 if j lt 0 000024c6 j 3 000024ca ali j 000024e6 sort a 000024f6 min af 000024fa hax al 000024fe min 0 00002502 Max D 00002506 change a 00002516 min a 9 0000251a max a 0 0000251e while 1 F 00002530 _sort void sort long a 0 9 Figure 4 10 Source Window Displaying the Source Program e If necessary select the Font option from the Customize submenu on the Setup menu to select an easy to see font type and size 79 RENESAS 4 6 Setting the Software Breakpoints A breakpoint is one of the debugging functions The Source window provides a very simple way of setting breakpoints For example to set a breakpoint at the sort function call e Double click the BP column on the line containing the sort function call Break will be displayed on the line containing the sort fun
194. e board to the expansion slot for the interface board in the host computer and connect the interface cable supplied with the PC interface board to the E8000S emulator A LAN adapter can be used to connect the E8000S emulator to a host computer as a network For information on using the PC interface for ISA bus PCI bus or PCMCIA bus specifications board or LAN adapter refer to their description notes Figure 2 6 shows the configuration of a system in which the PC interface board is used Figure 2 7 shows the configuration of a system in which the LAN adapter is used Install the PC interface board to the expansion slot for the PC interface board in the host computer PC interface board E8000S emulator PC interface cable L S Personal computer Figure 2 6 System Configuration Using a PC Interface Board 18 7tENESAS Network E8000S emulator ee Personal computer PC interface cable Figure 2 7 System Configuration Using a LAN Adapter 7tENESAS 19 20 RENESAS Section 3 Preparation before Use 3 1 Description of Emulator Usage This section describes preparations for using the emulator Figure 3 1 is a flowchart on preparation before the usage of the emulator CAUTION Read this section and understand it before preparation Incorrect operation will damage the user system and the emulator The USER PROGRAM will be LOST Reference Unpack the emulator Check the com
195. e break condition has been satisfied execution may continue for two or more instructions before it stops Other hardware break conditions may thus be satisfied before execution stops If this is the case two or more causes of termination will then be displayed 151 RENESAS Displaying a History of Hardware Break Conditions and Creating a New Condition A history of hardware break conditions that have been set as Break Condition A or B can be displayed in the Condition dialog box New conditions can also be created by using the Condition dialog box For example click to select a channel number from the Condition list box on the Condition A page of the Break dialog box Click the Set Condition button to open the Condition dialog box The Condition dialog box has the pages shown in table 5 37 Table 5 37 Pages of the Condition Dialog Box Page Description History Displays the history of conditions that have been set as Break Condition A or B Conditions can be moved from the History page to the Entry List page Entry List Creates modifies duplicates and deletes new conditions for Break Condition A or B 152 RENESAS a History Page Use this page to display the history of hardware break condition settings for Break Condition A or B Condition History Entry List Condition address H 4000 address H 3000 address H 2000 addres H A 000 Cancel Help Figure 5 29 Condition Dialog
196. e conditions are satisfied during emulation TRACE STOP will appear in a dedicated message box or on the status bar and the emulator will enter the trace halt mode To leave trace halt mode and reactivate the emulation select Halt from the pop up menu in the Trace window or execute the END command in the Command Line window To leave the trace halt mode and end emulation execute the HALT command in the Command Line window Notes 1 Trace Condition A shares hardware with Break Condition A Therefore when any channel of Break Condition A has been specified it is not possible to set or modify the corresponding Trace Condition A 2 Trace Condition B shares hardware with Break Condition B Therefore when any channel of Break Condition B has been specified it is not possible to set or modify the corresponding Trace Condition B 3 Trace Condition C shares hardware with Break Condition C and Performance Analysis Therefore when any channel of Break Condition C or Performance Analysis has been specified it is not possible to set or modify the corresponding Trace Condition C 181 RENESAS c Displaying a History of Trace Stop Conditions and Creating a New Condition A history of trace stop conditions that have been set as Trace Condition A or B can be displayed in the Condition dialog box New conditions can also be created by using the Condition dialog box Click to select condition 1 from the Condition list box on the Con
197. e connector Alternately tighten the screws on both sides of the cable while gradually pushing the cable toward the connector Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD damage the user system and emulator and will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST E8000S Station E8000S Station N N 3 Connect the trace cables into the station to evaluation chip board interface connectors CN1 CN2 and CN3 on the E8000S station s rear panel Confirm that the shape of the trace cable plug matches that of the station to evaluation chip board interface connector before connecting Also note which trace cable is connected to which E8000S station connector so that the other end of the trace cable is connected to the matching connector number on the evaluation chip board After the connection is completed alternately tighten the screws on both sides of the trace cable to prevent the upper or lower side of the trace cable from lifting off the connector Figure 3 4 shows how to correctly connect the trace cables to the E8000S station connectors 27 RENESAS Remove the screw with a driver and place the GND cable then tighten the screw GND cable S b DCONT H18dq4092LSH AC100 120V AC200 240V 2A 50 60Hz Colors of the trace cable labels are E8000S station rear panel red yellow and blue Connect the cables to the connectors with the same color Then tighten the sc
198. e control board to the E8000S station according to the following procedure Also use the following procedure to connect them after removing the device control board from the E8000S station to change the device control board A WARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST 1 Check that the emulator power switch is turned off Ensure that the power lamp on the left side of the E8000S station s front panel is not lit 2 Remove the AC power cable of the E8000S station from the outlet if the cable is connected to the outlet 3 Remove the back panel from the E8000S station For the slot to which the device control board is to be connected DCONT is marked 22 RENESAS 4 When using the optional memory board connect the optional memory board to the device control board as shown in figure 3 2 Then connect the device control board to the E8000S station Confirm pin 1 of CN4 and CN5 and align pin 1 with the optional memory board Device control board Optional memory board HS8000EMS01H Power supply cable Figure 3 2 Connecting the Memory Board 23 RENESAS Connect the device control board to the E8000S station When connecting the board prevent the upper or lower side of the board from lifting of
199. e displayed in a list as a history of the conditions that have been set as Break Condition A or B Entry Makes the condition selected in the Condition list available for use again as a channel of Break Condition A or B Clicking the Entry button moves any condition selected in the Condition list box to the Entry List page and deletes it from the Condition list on the History page V Selecting a condition from the Condition list then clicking this button adds that condition to the Sequence list as one of Nos 1 to 7 VR Selecting a condition from the Condition list and clicking this button adds that condition next to Reset in the Sequence list No Numerals indicate the sequential point number Reset indicates the reset point Sequence Displays the sequential conditions that have been specified as a list Delete Deletes any condition selected in the Sequence list b Specifying hardware sequential break conditions on the Entry List page A hardware break condition can be created on the Entry List page in the Condition dialog box then added as a sequential break condition The Condition list displays the hardware break conditions that have been created Click to select a condition then click the V button the condition will be added to the Sequence list box as No 1 In the same way hardware break conditions 2 to 7 can be added in sequence The order in which the conditions must
200. e external interrupt occurs in command input wait state the emulator holds the interrupt and executes the interrupt processing routine when the GO command is entered 5 9 2 When Interrupts are Processed During User Program Execution or in Command Input Wait State To process interrupts use the INTERRUPT command The process can be done only through command line window It processes as follows e Executes non maskable interrupts NMIs e Specify the priority level and execute interrupts with high priority Notes 1 When interrupts are accepted during user program execution and command input wait state user interrupt processing is not traced In this case continuous trace cannot be enabled 2 Use the NOP instruction at the delay slot after the RTE instruction in the interrupt handler For details on the INTERRUPT command refer to section 6 2 13 INTERRUPT IR 3 Do not set a software break or software sequential break in an interrupt service routine that is executed by the INTERRUPT command 242 RENESAS 5 10 Displaying Various Information The System Status window displays a variety of information set by each dialog box Open the System Status window by selecting Status from the View menu System Status IO _ Op x Item Status Connected To SH7751 E8000S Emulator CPU SH7751 PCI MD10 9 PCI disabled Clock Status MDS External input clock Master Slave MD Master CSO Memory Type MD6 NORMAL Endian MD
201. e i main H OO000000 H O0000004A H O00000AA H 0000013C H OOO001E6 H O00000048 H O000028E H O00000000 H 00000340 H 00000000 Figure 5 83 Profile List Window after User Program Execution Notes 1 When there is no stack information file sni extension which is output by the optimizing linkage editor only the functions executed during profile data measurement will be displayed For details on the stack information file refer to the separate user s manual for the optimizing linkage editor 2 Ifthe MMU is enabled the profile data may be incorrect because the virtual addresses obtained from the debugging information and the stack information file cannot be correctly matched to physical addresses To select the profile data type displayed in the Cycle cell click the right mouse button in the window to bring up a pop up menu Select Select Data and the Select Data dialog box shown below will open Select Data Ea C Normal Figure 5 84 Select Data Dialog Box 237 RENESAS Table 5 94 Select Data Dialog Box Options Option Description Mode Sets the mode for analyzing function call relations Rough High speed Acquires profile data by stopping execution only for subroutine call instructions and exception processing default The execution speed is faster than if Normal is selected For an optimizing complied program function calls by normal branch instructions cannot be measured
202. e implemented by dedicated hardware in the emulator station The hardware break conditions shown in table 5 26 can be specified for Break Condition A B or C These are AND conditions Table 5 26 Hardware Break Conditions Break Condition Address bus Description The condition is satisfied when the value on the address bus matches the specified value Data bus The condition is satisfied when the value on the data bus matches the specified value Read Write The condition is satisfied when the RD and RDWR signal levels match a specification External probe The condition is satisfied when the external probe PRB signal levels match a specification External interrupt The condition is satisfied when the external interrupt signal levels match a specification Satisfaction count The break occurs when the above conditions are satisfied the specified number of times Delay The break occurs the specified number of bus cycles after the above conditions have been satisfied Figure 5 19 shows an example of the operation of a hardware break when an address bus condition and satisfaction count condition have been specified 141 RENESAS Break condition The address H 2000 User program is accessed for H 50 times Break dition i Break occurs after the address Isas arent H 2000 is accessed for H 50 times satisfied Program flow Branch instructions etc Figure 5 19 Example of a Hardware Break with
203. e search range lt endcycle gt Numeric Specifies the end cycle value of the search range Description of the ts command lt option gt Parameter Description lt addropt gt Specifies address condition To specify an address as a search condition address lt address gt vpmap To specify an address range as a search condition address lt address1 gt to lt address2 gt vpmap To mask an address address mask lt maskdata gt vpmap lt address gt Address numeric lt address1 gt Start address numeric lt address2 gt End address numeric lt maskdata gt Specifies mask value numeric Add vpmap to the specification to search through the trace information using the address as translated by the VPMAP_SET command If VPMAP is invalid or vpmap is not specified the physical address will be used lt dataopt gt Specifies a data condition Specification data lt data gt lt data gt Specifies a data value numeric lt data gt corresponds to the data value of the data bus D31 to DO Always specify a 32 bit data size To search through the trace information using a smaller data size specify a mask value 335 RENESAS Parameter lt r wopt gt Description Specifies read or write condition To search through the trace information for read cycles direction read To search through the trace information for write cycles direction write lt prbopt gt Specifies an external probe signal conditi
204. e timeout condition specified for Performance Analysis 1 Notes 1 In the Enable column of the Breakpoints window O is displayed when the corresponding Break Condition A B C or U is enabled Nothing is displayed when the Break Condition is disabled When a breakpoint is specified at an address that has also been specified as the address bus condition for Break Condition A B C or U is displayed instead of O 2 During execution of the user program Go to Source item of the pop up menu in the Breakpoints window cannot be used to move from the display of a breakpoint to the corresponding line of source code or address in the Source or Disassemble window 129 RENESAS 5 5 1 Software Break Overview Any content at the specified address is replaced by a break instruction a dedicated instruction for use with the emulator Execution of the user program stops when the break instruction is executed The instruction that had been at the address is not executed so the result is a break before execution A number of passes can be specified as a break condition and a break will then occur when the breakpoint has been passed the specified number of times It is possible to specify up to 255 software breakpoints Up to 65 535 passes can be specified for each software breakpoint User program Program flow pra Instruction A break occurs after the replaced instruction at address H 1000 is executed
205. e user break controller is used for sequential break conditions U7 and U8 set the internal sequential break conditions in the specified order Break Condition U8 gt U7 171 RENESAS Setting an Internal Sequential Break Specify the internal break conditions To set the internal sequential break mode using Break Condition U1 to U4 select a mode from Emulation mode on the General page of the Configuration dialog box In the example shown in figure 5 43 internal sequential break mode is selected General Execution Model Execution Mode Loading flash memory CPU Operating Mode CPU SH7751 Clock l Emulator Clock 27 8MHz2 Emulation mode Break Condition U Sequential 2 gt 1 x IV Prohibit RW on the fly T Interrupts during step Memory area Fg Normal Physical Wirtual 451D Dicer Emulator ISA Driver Change Figure 5 43 Configuration Dialog Box Internal Sequential Break When using Break Condition U1 to U4 for internal sequential break any one of the modes shown in table 5 54 can be selected from Emulation mode When using Break Condition U7 and U8 for internal sequential break select Break Condition U8 gt 7 for User break controller on the Execution Mode2 page in the Configuration dialog box Table 5 54 Emulation mode Options Break Condition U1 to U4 Option Description Sequential break mode U2 gt 1 Internal sequential break mode 1 Sequential break mode
206. ea from being written lt buswidth gt Keyword Sets the emulation memory bus width 16 16 bit bus width 32 32 bit bus width Description This command sets the emulator s emulation memory e Emulation memory allocation when the optional emulation memory board is not used The user can allocate 4 Mbytes of emulation memory to spaces CSO through CS6 When the user sets a start address it will be rounded down to H 0 or a multiple of H 400000 and the end address will be rounded up to one less than a multiple of H 400000 e Emulation memory allocation when the optional emulation memory board is used The user can allocate a 16 Mbytes of emulation memory in 8 Mbyte units in spaces CSO through CS6 The user can also protect the emulation memory area from being written When the user sets a start address it will be rounded down to H 0 or a multiple of H 800000 and the end address will be rounded up to the number less than a multiple of H 800000 by one Example To set the address range in 16 bit bus width from H 1000000 to H 13FFFFF as the emulation memory area MS H 1000000 H 13FFFFF EMULATOR 16 306 RENESAS Notes e The user must not allocate the emulation memory to space other than CSO through CS6 e The user cannot set the memory map over the reserved area e When user is selected for lt mode gt do not set lt buswidth gt In other cases set lt buswidth gt 307 RENESAS 6 2 15 MEMORYAREA SET M
207. eak occurs Clears the break record and Wait for break condition 1 searches for the condition from break condition 1 No break occurs Wait for break condition 1 No break occurs Wait for break condition 2 gt A break occurs Figure 5 16 Example of a Software Sequential Break Reset Point Specification 136 RENESAS Setting Software Sequential Break Place the cursor in the Breakpoints window then click the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu Select Add from the menu and the Break dialog box will appear Select the Sequence page Virtual Space ASID D 0 2H 0cO00004 Virtual Space ASID D 0 3 Empty 4 Empty 5 Empty 6 Empty 7 Empty R Empty Edi aeea Bancel Epp Figure 5 17 Break Dialog Box Sequence Page 137 RENESAS Table 5 24 Sequence Page Options Option Sequence point Description Displays the specified pass point addresses This display is empty if there are no settings 1 to 7 Settings for pass point addresses 1 to 7 R Setting of the reset point address The pass point and reset point address settings are displayed as follows lt pass point address gt lt address space gt lt address space gt is displayed as follows Physical Space Physical space Virtual Space ASID D xxx Virtual space xxx is an ASID value Edit Allows the user to modify the software sequential breakpoint settings selected in the Sequence point list box
208. ebugging the user system hardware 5 15 1 Selecting Clock for the MPU This emulator supports three types of clock for the MPU external clock input from the user system hereinafter referred to as subclock a crystal oscillator attached on the evaluation chip board and the emulator internal clock 27 8 MHz For details on selecting clock refer to section 6 2 7 CLOCK and to section 3 3 4 Selecting the Clock When selecting a clock refer to the following When a clock is selected the emulator inputs a RESET signal to the MPU This initializes the registers so be careful To select the user clock the user clock must be input Otherwise an error message will be displayed and the emulator internal clock will be selected When the emulator system program is started the emulator inputs a clock to the MPU in the following order e When external clock is input from the user system the user system clock is selected e When a crystal oscillator is attached on the evaluation chip board crystal oscillation clock will be selected e Emulator internal clock 27 8 MHz The frequency of the emulator internal clock selected is 27 8 MHz 5 15 2 Checking the I O signals The emulator checks whether the connection with the user system is correct when the emulator is initiated Through this check abnormal operations such as short circuits of the user system interface signals can be detected The same operation as above can be done with th
209. ecution count for the Includes cases where the execution of the TRAPA TRAPA instruction instruction was cancelled because of an exception Cache miss count instruction cache Includes case when cache miss occurred because an overrun occurred on the fetch for an exception TLB miss count When an exception whole priority is higher than the TLB miss is generated and thus the TLB miss is cancelled Instruction fetch count Includes cases where requests to fetch MPU instructions have been accepted Branch count Includes cases where branch operations were cancelled because of exceptions and the branch destination was in the cache Counting the Number of Times Conditions are Satisfied 1 According to the MPU s operating clock 2 According to the ratio of the frequency of the MPU s operating clock to the frequency of the bus clock In measurement channels 1 and 2 methods 1 or 2 above can be used When method 1 is selected 1 cycle is counted as 1 count When method 2 is selected 3 4 6 8 12 or 24 must be added depending on the clock frequency ratio In this case calculate the execution time by using the following method When the execution time is assumed to be T 1 cycle of the bus clock is B and the counter s value is C T CxB 24 The following passages are explanations of how the performance of a program is measured by using the MPU internal performance analysis functions When the ratio of MPU bus clo
210. ed that customers contact Renesas Technology Corporation or an authorized Renesas Technology Corporation product distributor for the latest product information before purchasing a product listed herein The information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage liability or other loss rising from these inaccuracies or errors Please also pay attention to information published by Renesas Technology Corporation by various means including the Renesas Technology Corporation Semiconductor home page http www renesas com When using any or all of the information contained in these materials including product data diagrams charts programs and algorithms please be sure to evaluate all information as a total system before making a final decision on the applicability of the information and products Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage liability or other loss resulting from the information contained herein Renesas Technology Corporation semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for use in a device or system that is used under circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake Please contact Renesas Technology Corporation or an authorized Renesas Technology Corporation product distributor when considering the use of a product contained herein for any specific purposes such as apparatus or systems fo
211. eee eeeeeeeceseceseeneeees 217 Example of Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 2 000 eceeeeesceeeceseeeseenseeees 218 Example of Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 3 000 eee eeeeeeeceseeeseenseenees 219 Performance Analysis Dialog BOX cece eeeecseesceeceesecesecesecssecaecuecaeeeaeeeneeees 220 Performance 1 Dialog Box General Page eee eeeceesecseeceeeeeceseceeneeenaeeeeeeees 221 Performance 1 Dialog Box Address Page ceeeeseecesceeneeceeeeeeeeeceteeeeneeees 222 Performance 1 Dialog Box Address Page ceeesseecssceeneeceeeeeeeeeceteeeeneeees 223 Performance 1 Dialog Box Time Out Page oc eeceesseceeeeceteceeeeeenaeeeeneees 225 Performance 1 Dialog Box Count Page 0 0 cee eesceeeseeceseceeeeeceeeeeeeeeceaeeeeneeee 226 Input Function Range Dialog BOX e eee ceeceessecesececnseceeeeecaeceeneecaeceeeeecnaeeeenees 227 Performance Analysis Window Measurement of Executed Addresses 228 Performance Analysis Window Run Time and Execution Count eeeeeeee 229 Performance Analysis Window Execution Time RatiOS ceceesseceeseeeeteeeenees 230 Profile List Window after User Program Execution ccceecseeeseceeneeeeteceenees 237 Select Data Dialog BOX s 05 ticcccc secede tesesGackineee ates bse tliastnes ee dbevece a E R iE 237 Profile Tree Window after User Program Execution cceecceceseceereeeneeeeeneees 238 Profile Chart Window
212. eeeeeeeceeeeeseeeseceseceaecsaecaecaeeaaeeaes 349 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits CONt 0 ee eeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeesecesecaecaeceecaeeaeeenes 350 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits COnt 0 cece eeeeeseeceeeceeseeseeeseceseceaecsaeeeecaeeaaeenes 351 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits CONt cece eeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeseeseceseceaecsaeeaecaeeaaeenes 352 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits COnt cece eeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeecesecesecesecsaecsaecaeeaeeenes 353 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits COnt 0 cece eeeeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeecesecesecesecsaecaecaeeaeeenes 354 Figure B 1 Recommended Dimensions for Mount Pad Top View cceseeseeseeeseeseeneeeees 359 Figure B 2 Restrictions on Parts Location ec eceeceecesscesecesecssecseecaeeeseeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeecsseesaeenaes 360 Figure C 1 Installing the IC Socket creierii enni iaae aia i 361 Figure C 2 Order of Tightening the Screws Top View of the HS7751EBH81H Board 363 Figure C 3 Connecting the HS7751EBH81H Board to the User System cece 364 Figure C 4 Connecting the Trace Cables to the Evaluation Chip Board 0 ce eee eeeeeeeeee eters 367 Fig re C5 Installing the MPU screptra on araa ee saa E RE EEEE 369 xii RENESAS Tables Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 1 3 Table 1 4 Table 1 5 Table 1 6 Table 2 1 Table 2 1 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 4 4 Table 5 1
213. ees 10 E8000S Station Rear Panel ee eeeeensesscesseeseessecseeneecneeconeconsenssenseensessessenseess 11 Device Control BO andes ds eicecien eaeoe nne R oes hayes REE EEEE RES 13 Evaluation Chip Board HS7751EBH81H sseessssesssreesseresresesereesreerssrerreserreeresreerse 14 System Configuration Using a PC Interface Board eseesseeeeseeessiesesreerrsreeresrrrreresrees 18 System Configuration Using a LAN Adapter eee ceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeceseceeeeseesaeesaes 19 Emulator Preparation Flow Chart sssesseseeseeeseresesreerrsreereserrsserreeresrerresrerresenrreresreet 21 Connecting the Memory Board esssssesseeeeseseseresrsrrerrsrerrssrrrrsresreetesrentesrrerererrreresreet 23 Connecting the Device Control Board esessssesesseesrsreesssrrrreresrreresrerresrrereserrreresreet 25 Connecting Trace Cables to the E8000S station essseeseeeesesssseesrsreeresreereserrrerrsrees 28 Connecting Trace Cables to the Evaluation Chip Board ssseesseseeeseeesrereereeerereersrees 30 External Probe Connector ee eeceecesecesecssecseecaeecseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeaeeeaecsaeesaeeaees 31 Installing the Crystal Oscillator cece cee cese cece cseesseceecaeesaecaeecaeesaecsaecaeeeaecaeeaaeess 33 Connecting the System Ground 0000 eee cece cece eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecaecaecnaecaeseeeaeeeaes 34 Connecting the Frame Ground cece cece cee cscecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecaeceaecaecsaeceeeaeeenes 35 Console Interface Switches
214. eesecseeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeceaeeeeneeenes 154 Figure 5 31 Configuration Dialog Box Hardware Sequential Break 0 0 0 eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeee 156 Figure 5 32 Break Dialog Box after Hardware Sequential Break Setting eee 157 Figure 5 33 Condition Dialog Box History Page 0 ce ceeeceesecceeseeceeeceeneeceeeeeeeeeceaeeeeneecnas 158 Figure 5 34 Condition Dialog Box Entry List Page 0 eee eeeeeeseceseceeeeeceeeeeeeeceaeeeeneeenes 160 Figure 5 35 Example Display of the Status of a Hardware Sequential Break Condition 161 Figure 5 36 Break Dialog Box Condition U Page ceeccessceeseeceereeeneeceteeeeneeceteeeeneeeeaes 164 Figure 5 37 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box Address Page cesceesceesseceeneeceteceeneeenes 165 Figure 5 38 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box Data Page eee ceeceeneeceeeceeeeeceeeeeneeenes 167 Figure 5 39 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box Bus State Page eeeeesceeneeeeteceeneeeees 168 Figure 5 40 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box ASID Page 00 eee ceeceeeeeceeeeceteeeeneeenes 169 Figure 5 41 Break Condition U5 Dialog Box eee cee eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceseseaeeaecnaeeneeenes 170 Figure 5 42 Break Condition U6 Dialog Box eee ceeeseeeeeeeeeeseeseeesecnsecaeeaecaeeaeeenes 170 Figure 5 43 Configuration Dialog Box Internal Sequential Break eee ee eeeeeeee eens 172 Figure 5 44 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Trace Mode Page 173 Figure 5 45 Configuration Dialog B
215. efficiency of user programs 4 Mbyte emulation memory for use as a substitute user system memory installed as a standard item This can be extended to 16 Mbytes by using a device control board to connect an optional memory board 12 Mbytes ALAN adapter for connecting the emulator to a host computer via a LAN interface LOBASE T or LOOBASE TX allowing loading of the SH7751 E8000S Hitachi Debugging Interface into the host computer This enables graphic display operations in a multi window environment and source level debugging A PC interface board for the ISA bus PCI bus or PCMCIA bus connected to the host computer through the PC interface cable enabling high speed downloading of user programs The HDI can be loaded into the host computer to enable Graphic display operations in a multi window environment Source level debugging Note Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation USA RENESAS 1 1 Notes on Usage CAUTION READ the following warnings before using the emulator product Incorrect operation will damage the user system and the emulator product The USER PROGRAM will be LOST 1 Check all components with the component list after unpacking the emulator 2 Never place heavy objects on the casing 3 Observe the following conditions in the area where the emulator is to be used Make sure that the internal cooling fans on the sides of the emulator must be at least 20 cm
216. elects no ASID condition ASID Sets a value as an ASID condition The default setting is D O Any value in the range of D 0 to D 255 can be set 169 RENESAS e Break Condition U5 U6 Dialog Boxes Break Condition US General C Stop on accessing internal I O area OK Cancel f Help o Figure 5 41 Break Condition U5 Dialog Box Break Condition U6 General C Stop after executing LDTLB instruction Cancel Sopy Help Figure 5 42 Break Condition U6 Dialog Box 170 RENESAS Table 5 52 Break Condition U5 U6 Dialog Box Options Page Description General Activates Break Condition U5 access to the internal I O area or Break Condition U6 execution of an LDTLB instruction Note When continuous trace mode has been selected Break Conditions U5 and U6 will not function as break conditions 5 5 6 Internal Sequential Break Overview An internal sequential break occurs when internal break conditions are satisfied in one of three specified orders These orders are referred to as modes and are shown in table 5 53 Table 5 53 Internal Sequential Break Modes Break Condition U1 U4 Mode Description 1 A break occurs when internal break conditions U2 and U1 are satisfied in that order 2 A break occurs when internal break conditions U3 U2 and U1 are satisfied in that order 3 A break occurs when internal break conditions U4 U3 U2 and U1 are satisfied in that order When th
217. em Min Max Values with Emulator Connected ns tAD 6 2 8 tWDD1 6 3 0 The basic bus cycle two states is shown in figure A 1 The user system interface circuits connected to the user system are shown in figure A 2 347 RENESAS T1 T2 CKIO f en UE ig A r A25 to AO Boe a tRDH1 RD WE tRSD tRD D31 to DO When read tAH 7 li twDD1 D31 to DO When written ao an a a Figure A 1 Basic Bus Cycle 348 RENESAS SH7751 User system 3VCC i LVTH16244 E 3VCC EPM7256AETC SLEEP LVTH16244 x 2 EPM7128AETC PCIREQ3 MD10 PCIREQ2 MD9 PCIREQ3 MD10 PCIREQ2 MD9 MD8 RTS2 CBT16244 MD8 RTS2 MD7 CTS2 MD7 CTS2 MD6 IOIS16 MD6 IOIS16 MD5 EPM7128A MD5 MD4 CE2B MD4 CE2B MD3 CE2A MD3 CE2A MD2 RXD2 MD2 RXD2 MD1 TXD2 ies MD1 TXD2 MDO SCK2 MDO SCK2 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits 349 RENESAS SH7751 LVTH16244 User System A LVTH16244 TCK TDI NC gt Tus Pa AUDSYNC AUDSYNC AUDCK LVTH16244 AUDCK o AUDATAO ES NC _p gt AUDATA1 AUDATA1 AUDATA2 AUDATA2 AUDATAS AUDATAS EPM7256AETC ASEBRK BRKACK j NC lt ASEBRK BRKACK 3VCC 1KQ LVTH16244 MRESET MRESET LVTH16244 x 2 STATUS1 STATUS1 STATUSO STATUSO 350 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits cont RENESAS SH7751 User system BACK BSREQ BACK BSREQ LVTH16244
218. emory addresses physical addresses Address translation is according to the address translation table translation look aside buffer TLB in the MPU The MMU operates during command input wait state as well as during execution of the user program When a command for memory access is executed while the MMU s address translation function is enabled the address translated by the MMU is accessed If the specified address is not within the TLB a TLB miss occurs and the TLB must be updated by the user program The emulator s address translation function operates according to the VP_MAP tables The VP_MAP tables are the address translation tables for the emulator created with the VPMAP_SET command The following shows an example 251 RENESAS Example 1 Create VP_MAP tables for translating virtual addresses H 10000 to H 10FFF to physical addresses H 4000000 to H 4000FFF and virtual addresses H 11000 to H 11FFF to physical addresses H O to H FFF gt vs 10000 10FFF 4000000 RET gt vs 11000 11FFF 0 RET gt vd RET lt VADDR_TOP gt lt VADDR_END gt lt PADDR_TOP gt 00010000 00010FFF 04000000 00011000 00011FFF 00000000 DISABLE 2 Then enable the VP_MAP tables addresses are not translated while the tables are disabled gt ve enable RET gt vd RET lt VADDR_TOP gt lt VADDR_END gt lt PADDR_TOP gt 00010000 00010FFF 04000000 00011000 00011FFF 00000000 ENABLE With the virtual address setti
219. entered as a numerical or symbolic value When the setting is made in this dialog box the corresponding start and end addresses are automatically displayed VP_MAP Sets translation of the addresses in Start and End according to the VP_MAP command s setting for the respective addresses When this option is not set or VP_MAP is invalid no translation takes place When Subroutine time measurement mode 3 is selected Set the start and end address ranges General Address m Start Address Range Start H s8 bas End H128 End Address Range SECA E CALE LATE CEES E LE ASAE To PEIRTATALE CALS CTS CRORES Start fH 24 ol End H 184 P VP_MAP Figure 5 76 Performance 1 Dialog Box Address Page RENESAS 223 Table 5 84 Options on the Address Page When Subroutine time measurement mode 3 is Selected Start Address Range Option Start Description Sets the start address in the start address range as a numerical or symbolic value End Sets the end address in the start address range as a numerical or symbolic value Displays the Input Function Range dialog box to which a start address in the start address range is input as a numerical or symbolic value When the setting is made in this dialog box the start address and end address in the start address range are automatically displayed End Address Range Option Start Description Sets the start address
220. enters the program s command input mode END box Ends the diagnostic program and initiates the HDI Set the diagnostic program according to the user s manual provided with the diagnostic program Click the END button or the STOP button to terminate the diagnostic program After the program has been terminated enter Q in the COMMAND edit box of the DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM dialog box and restart the HDI DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM Ea E8000 TEST amp MAINTENANCE PROGRAM DIAG SYS Version No X XX XX XX XXXXK Copyright C Hitachi LTD XXXX Please key in TEST PARAMETER OPERATOR TEST EXECUTE Y N gt if COMMAND o stop EnD Figure 3 32 Terminating the Diagnostic Program by Clicking the STOP Button A file named E8775132 INI will be created in the HDI installation directory This is a target setting file Whether or not the diagnostic program should be initiated with the HDI is defined in the Diagnostic Program resource information of the E8000 HDI TARGET 67 RENESAS E8000 HDI TARGET Diagnostic Program Y To disable the use of the diagnostic program modify the Diagnostic Program resource information in the following way The dialog box for diagnostic program confirmation will not open when the HDI is started Diagnostic Program N 3 8 Uninstallation 3 8 1 Uninstalling Software This section describes the procedure for uninstalling software Be sure to terminate all exec
221. er Note When using a LAN adapter that has already been set it is unnecessary to set it again Use LAN Adapter Configuration to define only the host computer For details on the usage of the LAN Adapter Configuration refer to the online help of the LAN Adapter Configuration 3 4 3 Setting up the PC Interface Board under Windows 2000 About Support for the PC Interface Board This board is not supported by Windows 2000 When Using the PCI Interface Board 40 Log on as Administrator Install the provided software select PCI Card Driver when asked to select a component Exit from the operating system shut down the host computer and turn off the power switch Install the PCI interface board into the host computer Turn on the host computer Log on as Administrator The installed hardware will be detected and driver installation will be started automatically When asked to select how to install the driver select Search for the best driver for my device recommended then select Specify a location for how to locate the driver Enter lt drive gt 775 1 DRIVERS PCI 2000 for the search location where lt drive gt is the drive letter for the CD ROM drive Check that the E6000 PCI Card has been found and complete the driver installation RENESAS When Using the PC Interface Card e Log on as Administrator e Install the provided software select PC Card Driver PCMCIA when asked to select a component
222. eration of Internal Modules ee eeeeeeeeseenee ener teeta 373 Table E 1 Pins Occupied Solely by the Emulator eee eeeeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeesaeeaeseeeseeeas 376 Table E 2 Delay Time for Signals Connected via the Evaluation Chip Board ee 377 Table E 3 Initial Values of Registers in the SH7751 and the E8000S Emulator 378 xvi RENESAS Section Overview Overview This system is an efficient software and hardware development support tool for application systems using the HD6417751 hereafter referred to as SH7751 microcomputer developed by Hitachi Ltd The SH7751 incorporates the cache memory memory management unit MMU the timer required for system configuration the realtime clock the interrupt controller the user break controller the bus state controller the internal DMAC direct memory access controller the serial communication interface SCI etc as the peripheral function other than the high speed CPU The E8000S emulator operates in place of the SH7751 and performs realtime emulation of the user system The emulator also provides functions for efficient hardware and software debugging The E8000S emulator consists of an emulator E8000S station a device control board for the SH7751 an optional memory board and an evaluation chip board The evaluation chip board is connected to the user system via an IC socket figure 1 1 By installing a PC interface board available for ISA bus PCI bus and PCMCIA bus on
223. erification option Normal termination 0 0 Writing with verification Abnormal termination Other than 0 1 Writing without verification Verification error BT R5 L Access size 0x4220 Byte 0x5720 Word 0x4C20 Longword R6 L Write data Erasing module R4 L Access size None Notes 1 2 Notes 1 112 0x4220 Byte 0x5720 Word 0x4C20 Longword L means the long size Writing module The write data is set in an area of specified access size in the R6 register When the access size is a word or byte the upper bits of the R6 register will be filled with Os When the flash memory downloading function is enabled data cannot be downloaded to other areas The flash memory area can be accessed only by this downloading function The memory writing or software break functions must only be performed to the RAM area When the flash memory downloading function is enabled execution cannot be stopped by clicking the Stop button during erasing The entry areas of the modules must be in the MMU disabled area If data has been written to flash memory be sure to select Enable for Erasing flash memory If Disable is selected a verification error will occur The settings of the Loading flash memory page will be stored in the session file However when the session file is loaded the setting of Loading flash memory always becomes Disable Be sure to select Enable for Loading flash mem
224. erred to as Hitachi pursues a policy of continuing improvement in design performance and safety of the emulator product Hitachi reserves the right to change wholly or partially the specifications design user s manual and other documentation at any time without notice Target User of the Emulator Product This emulator product should only be used by those who have carefully read and thoroughly understood the information and restrictions contained in the user s manual Do not attempt to use the emulator product until you fully understand its mechanism It is highly recommended that first time users be instructed by users that are well versed in the operation of the emulator product RENESAS LIMITED WARRANTY Hitachi warrants its emulator products to be manufactured in accordance with published specifications and free from defects in material and or workmanship Hitachi at its option will repair or replace any emulator products returned intact to the factory transportation charges prepaid which Hitachi upon inspection determine to be defective in material and or workmanship The foregoing shall constitute the sole remedy for any breach of Hitachi s warranty See the Hitachi warranty booklet for details on the warranty period This warranty extends only to you the original Purchaser It is not transferable to anyone who subsequently purchases the emulator product from you Hitachi is not liable for any claim made by a third party or
225. es Yes SCI SCIF serial communication interface Yes Yes DMAC direct memory access controller Yes Yes UBC user break controller Not available Not available I O port Yes Yes H UDI Hitachi user debugging interface Not available Not available Notes 1 If a break occurs during a DMAC cycle vector read read write of transferred information or data read write the DMAC continues operation until the DMAC cycle is complete The DMAC resumes operation after it returns to emulation 2 This module is not available on the user program when it is used as Break Condition U7 8 3 The emulator does not support this module RENESAS 373 374 RENESAS Appendix E Notes on Debugging E 1 The Tracing Function 1 It is not possible to disassemble traced data 2 Bus tracing does not allow for the acquisition of trace information from the internal bus However branch source and branch destination addresses including data for addresses on the internal bus can be acquired by using the on chip tracing function 3 When a refresh cycle is generated during an access to SDRAM SDRAM CYCLE is displayed E 2 Emulation Memory 1 Do not allocate emulation memory to memory spaces other than CSO to CS6 2 The emulation memory and user memory cannot coexist in a single CS space The space will be used as the emulation memory 3 Set the emulation memory on 4 Mbyte boundaries When the optio
226. escription lt lsaddress gt Numeric Specifies the start address of a virtual address range to be set in the VP_MAP table lt leaddress gt Numeric Specifies the end address of a virtual address range to be set in the VP_MAP table lt paddress gt Numeric Specifies the start address of a physical address range to be set in the VP_MAP table lt address gt Numeric Specifies the start address of a virtual address range to be cancelled in the VP_MAP table When omitted all VP_MAP tables are cancelled lt enable gt Keyword Enables or disables the VP_MAP table enable Enabled disable Disabled Description e Setting Sets up to 256 address translation tables VP_MAP tables for translating virtual addresses to physical addresses when the user program is loaded When the load module address of a load or a verify command matches the virtual address of the address translation table the address is translated to the corresponding physical address and loaded When there is no corresponding address translation table or the VP_MAP table is disabled the contents of the virtual address range is loaded at the equivalent physical address The following figure shows the relationship between virtual and physical addresses 338 RENESAS Virtual start address 1 Virtual area A Setting enabled Hk Physical start address 1 Physical area A Setting enabled Physical area B Virtual start address 2 eer ee Virtual end address 2 Virtua
227. esrrerrsreeresrrrrssesrreresreee 67 Configuration of the Sample Program esseesesseessereeesrsreerrsrerrrrrersreereserrrnrerreeresee 69 CPU Operation Mode Dialog Box Setting Example 00 0 eee eee eee ereereeees 71 Settings in the Configuration Dialog BOX eee cee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseenseeaees 74 Step Command es ch csesedeavessesssssves dente a n EE RE E E E ectesetexoessaees 88 EBmnulator F nctionS senses oee e aa E a EA R E EERE 99 Setting the Emulator s Operating Conditions esseseerssresrsreerssreeresrsrrerrsreeresereerese 100 Configuration Dialog BOX cece eeeeeeesceeseeseceseceseceaecsaecaeecaeecaeeeaeseaeeeeeeeenes 103 General PACS ra a A E E TE 104 Execution Model Papesse ia aa RnR is 107 Execution Mode2 Pages cc ccccssccesececiscsesecsssecse socvssedsoscsecuadeosestdacesssacdeseosincesacessenees 109 Loading flash memory Page eeeeeceessecesececeeceeeeeceaeceeaeecsaeceeeeecaeceeneecnaeeeeees 111 Module Inte rtace ois cnstasectes cost cesetesieecsupsteevedices R E vegies E REE 112 Sample Program Specifications 0 0 0 eceeeescesscesecesecseeceeecaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeaees 113 CPU Operating Mode Page oo eee eeceeseceseceseceseceecaeecaeeeaeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 114 CPU Operating Mode Dialog BOX oo ieee cee cee ceee cree ceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeereneeees 114 IMD Rin PAS Gs cia E E E E E A starters 116 Memory Type Pape s cccss hectic cu ated aE E iin T E i 118 HUD GTAG Clock Page
228. f the connector Alternately tighten the screws on both sides of the board A WARNING When the power supply cable is pinched between the device control board and the casing of the E8000S station the user system and the emulator will be damaged The USER PROGRAM will be LOST 24 RENESAS E8000S station rear panel Device control board DCONT Power supply cable BNO eS a nA NX x a zzl J oO z NO OO Soe Figure 3 3 Connecting the Device Control Board 25 RENESAS 3 3 2 Connecting the Evaluation Chip Board At shipment the evaluation chip board is packed separately from the E8000S station Use the following procedure to connect the evaluation chip board to the E8000S station or to disconnect them when moving the emulator A WARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST 1 Check that the emulator power switch is turned off Ensure that the power lamp on the left side of the E8000S station s front panel is not lit 2 Remove the AC power cable of the E8000S station from the outlet if the cable is connected to the outlet 26 RENESAS A WARNING When connecting the cable ensure that the upper or lower side of the cable does not lift off th
229. fication in the Copy Memory dialog box is ignored Memory is copied in byte unit 254 RENESAS 5 In the Fill Memory dialog box when the start address is specified as greater than the end address replace that end address with the start address and the start address with the end address Then execute the FILL command 6 Move Memory displays the first address and memory contents in which an error occurred as a single byte on the status bar regardless of the specified size 7 Do not save or verify memory during execution of the user program 8 This HDI does not support Motorola S type files with the CR code H OD alone at the end of each record 9 Load Motorola S type files with CR and LF codes H 0DOA at the end of each record 10 When Prohibit R W on the fly is specified in the Configuration dialog box memory access by the HDI will be inhibited during user program execution Therefore if the user program is executed with Prohibit R W on the fly specified contents of memory will not be displayed when scrolling through the Memory window or Disassembly window 1 j Do not scroll through the Memory or Disassembly windows by dragging the scroll bar while the user program is executing This generates many memory read operations and the user program is suspended until these memory operations have been completed 12 Memory comparison which appears to be available as Compare in the Memory menu is not supp
230. first condition 182 RENESAS b Setting a Sequential Trace Stop Select Trace for Condition A under Sequence on the Execution Mode2 page of the Configuration dialog box The same setting procedure can be used on the Condition B page General Execution Model Execution Mode2 Loading flash memory CPU Operating Mode m Sequence Condition amp Tiac x Condition B Not used h a is ai ia ataj TRGB Option a When Break Condition B or Trace Condition B are satisfied Specifies whether a pulse is output from trigger output pin of the E8000 without a break Break occurs but does not output a trigger C Qutputs a trigger when any hardware break condition C Dutputs a trigger when the specified hardware break condition Condition B1 User break controller Break Condition U7 8 x Figure 5 50 Configuration Dialog Box Execution Mode2 Page This setting selects Trace Condition A for use as a sequential trace stop At this time any existing condition settings for Trace Condition A and Break Condition A are cleared Therefore any trace stop conditions which you wished to use must be specified again Select the Condition A page of the Trace window using the same procedure described when setting trace stop conditions the same setting procedure applies to the Condition B page For details on the Condition A and Condition B pages refer to section 5 5 4 Hardwar
231. g Box Pages 181 Pages of the Condition Dialog Box Pages eee eee cee cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 182 Range Trace Conditions is cise siieie thie e T eE EE ia sae etna EEE 185 Specifiable Range Trace Conditions 0 eee ee eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecsaeesaessaeceesaeeees 186 Trace Condition Al to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 Dialog Box Pages 187 Bus Trace Group Box Options ec eeceeceesecesecesecesecseecaeesaecneecaeesaeeeneeeneeeeeees 189 MPU Internal Trace Information 0 0 eee eee cee cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneenaeenaees 192 MPU Internal Trace Acquisition Modes 0 ec eeeceeceseceseceeceseceeecseeeseeeeeeeneeeeees 193 Internal Trace Group Box Options e ee ee eee eeseesse cess cee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeens 194 RENESAS Table 5 68 Table 5 69 Table 5 70 Table 5 71 Table 5 72 Table 5 73 Table 5 74 Table 5 75 Table 5 76 Table 5 77 Table 5 78 Table 5 79 Table 5 80 Table 5 81 Table 5 82 Table 5 83 Table 5 84 Table 5 85 Table 5 86 Table 5 87 Table 5 88 Table 5 89 Table 5 90 Table 5 91 Table 5 92 Table 5 93 Table 5 94 Table 5 95 Table 5 96 Table 5 97 Table 5 98 Table 5 99 Table 5 100 Table 5 101 Table 5 102 Table 5 103 Table 5 104 Table 5 105 Table 5 106 Table 5 107 Internal Trace Information eee ceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeceeceaeceaecaeceaesaeecaeeeaeeeneeeeeees 195 AUD Trace Acquisition Modes 00 0 0 ce eeceeceeceeeeeseceeeceseceaeceaecaecaeesaeeeaeeeaeeeneees 195 AUD Trace
232. g a LAN adapter that has already been set it is unnecessary to set it again Use 38 LAN Adapter Configuration to define only the host computer For details on the usage of the LAN Adapter Configuration refer to the online help of the LAN Adapter Configuration RENESAS 3 4 2 Setting Up the PC Interface Board on WindowsNT 4 0 When Using the PCI Interface Board Exit from the operating system shut down the host computer and turn off the power switch Install the PCI interface board into the host computer Turn on the host computer Log on as Administrator Install the provided software select PCI Card Driver when asked to select a component Restart the host computer When Using the PC Interface Card Exit from the operating system shut down the host computer and turn off the power switch Install the PC interface card into the host computer Turn on the host computer Log on as Administrator Install the provided software select PC Card Driver PCMCIA when asked to select a component During installation the host computer will ask which resources should be used by the PC interface card Before installation check the IRQ I O ports and memory used by other devices To check these resource settings open the resource panel by selecting Windows NT diagnostics program from Administrative tools in Programs from the Start menu Then determine the resource settings for the PC interface card so that they do not confl
233. have been set The following shows the display format gt BD H c00000 D 1 space physical Enable H c00000 D 1 space virtual asid D O Disable H c00000 D 1 space virtual asid D 255 Enable a b d a Breakpoint address b Number of times specified c Address space Physical specifies physical address and Virtual specifies virtual address the user must set an ASID value d Enable Disable Enable or Disable This command enables or disables software breakpoints that have been set When the user does not specify parameter lt address gt all of the specified software breakpoints are enabled or disabled Examples 1 To set a software breakpoint at physical address H C000000 BP H C000000 SPACE PHYSICAL 2 To set a software breakpoint at address H C000000 in the virtual address space BP H C000000 SPACE VIRTUAL 3 To set a software breakpoint at address H C000000 in the virtual address space that has ASID H 0 BP H C000000 SPACE VIRTUAL ASID H O 4 To disable a software breakpoint that has been set at address H CO00000 in the virtual address space that has ASID H 0 BE H C000000 SPACE VIRTUAL ASID H O DISABLE 287 RENESAS To disable all software breakpoints that have been set at address H C000000 in the virtual address space BE H C000000 SPACE VIRTUAL DISABLE To enable all software breakpoints that have been set at address H C000000 BE H C000000 ENABLE To enable all software breakpoints that have been set
234. he emulator fills the address contents of the breakpoints to cache before and after the emulator executes the user program If the emulator cannot restore the user program addresses that were replaced by breakpoint instructions when the emulator completes the execution of the user program break instructions will remain in the user program and the emulator will cancel the breakpoints However if the emulator could not restore the instructions due to the generation of a TLB error or TLB miss hit break instructions will remain in the user program and the emulator will not cancel breakpoints If the user specifies a pass count the emulator will stop the user program every time a software breakpoint is passed and update the total pass count The emulator will continue to do this until the pass count is satisfied Therefore the emulator cannot execute the user program in realtime When the user does not specify any parameter the emulator will enable all software breakpoints When the user does not specify space for lt space gt the emulator will enable all software breakpoints set to the same address When the user specifies virtual for lt space gt and does not specify asid for lt asid gt the user enables all software breakpoints set to virtual addresses 289 RENESAS 6 2 5 Software Sequential Break Command BSS BSC BSD BSE Setting BREAKSEQUENCE_SET BSS Cancellation BREAKSEQUENCE_CLEAR BSC Display BREAKSEQUENCE_DISPLAY BSD
235. i Debugging Interface Os tem Install Tool Help Eh Settings stall Tool A Era Help Bun Figure 3 15 Start Menu System Install Tool When the ESI has started up the Select Driver dialog box will be displayed Select the driver for the connection of the host computer and the emulator from Driver Table 3 4 shows the types of connections and drivers Table 3 4 Types of Connection and Drivers Connection Contents of File When connecting the Emulator to a PC interface board ISA Emulator ISA Driver When connecting the Emulator to a LAN adapter E8000 LAN Driver When connecting the Emulator to a PCI interface board Emulator PCI Card Driver When connecting the Emulator to a PC interface card Emulator PC Card Driver When Link up is displayed on the status bar the initiation of the ESI has been completed Select the Auto Install radio button in the Select Install dialog box The Browse for Folder dialog box will be displayed so select the directory where the system program is stored The default directory will be a directory under SYSTEM in the HDI installation directory 51 RENESAS Browse for Folder G Te My Computer E8000s ba 7751 Figure 3 16 Browse for Folder Dialog Box When OK is clicked the E8000 Load Files dialog box will be displayed Check the file names for installation 52 RENESAS E8000 Load Files Ea Directory C HEWHdiSE 8000547 7514S STEM
236. iation for Microsoft Windows Millenium Edition 4 WindowsNT 4 0 is an abbreviation for Microsoft WindowsNT 4 0 operating system 5 Windows 2000 is an abbreviation for Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system RENESAS section NVGRVIOW scc icciccdeniachacestelechslinticde Batre ened tence Tl NotestonsUsagesieis acts bnicikecnintk eins E Wien Rae ans 1 2 Environmental Conditions cccceesceceseceseeceseceeceeceaeceseeeceaceeeeeecaeeeeaeecsaeeeeeeecsaeeeeneecsas T3 Components 4 35 son ciacisk as e E EAE E A Sane aes 1 3 1 E8000S Emulator Station eee ceeceesceceseceeececeecesseeceeeeeneecseeeeaeeceneeeeaeeeees 1 3 2 Device Control Board and Evaluation Chip Board for the SH7751 0 ee 1 33 OP ONS cocoa ensai cease cndetacde nt RE E EATR AREE UREE E aR EAEN ATER EEE RR Section 2 Components 2 1 2 2 2 3 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 Contents Emulator Hardware Components esesseesseeeesssesrreesreereseerrssrrtessestentrsrentesrerrseesresesreet 2 1 1 E8000S Station Components esesesesseresereresesesesrsreressreeeerereresesereersreresererrereseres 2 1 2 Device Control Board Components sseeseesessesrseresrsreeresrerreserrreserrreesreeresrenrssere 2 1 3 Evaluation Chip Board Configuration esesseesseeesesresresrrreerrsreeresrerrsserrrssesreers Configuration of the Provided CD R sssssssesessesesseesesreesesrerreserreertenresrenresrerrnsesrensesreer System COMMS UCAMON se
237. ication 0 0000000 136 Figure 5 17 Break Dialog Box Sequence Page 0 ceeeeesseceeceeeseceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeneeensees 137 Figure 5 18 Break Sequence Dialog BOX oo eee eseeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeesecesecaecaeeaecaeenaeeaes 139 Figure 5 19 Example of a Hardware Break with a Satisfaction Count Condition Specified 142 Figure 5 20 Example of a Hardware Break with Delay Condition Specified ee 142 Figure 5 21 Break Dialog Box Condition A Page eeesccessceesseceeeceeseeceteeeeneeceteeeenaeenaes 143 Figure 5 22 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Address Page cesceescecseeceeneeceteceeneeeees 145 Figure 5 23 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Data Page eee eeeceencecseeceeeeeceeceeneeenes 146 Figure 5 24 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Bus State Page eee eeeseceseceeneeeeeeeeeeeeees 147 Figure 5 25 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Probe Page 0 ee eeeeeeseeceseeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeees 148 Figure 5 26 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Interrupt Page ee eeeceeeeeeneeceeeeeeneeeeees 149 Figure 5 27 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Count Page 00 eee eeeceeececeeeceeeeecneeeeneeenes 150 Figure 5 28 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Delay Page 00 0 ee eeeceenceeeeeceeeeeceneeeeneeeees 151 Figure 5 29 Condition Dialog Box History Page cee ceeeceesscceeeeeceeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeceaeeeeneecnes 153 Figure 5 30 Condition Dialog Box Entry List Page 0 0 cee eeec
238. ict with other device settings The PC interface card requires one channel of IRQ HF bytes of I O port and H 4000 bytes of memory Restart the host computer Note The drivers selected in Drivers are all started when the host computer is started Accordingly if the host computer is started without a card or if an incorrect driver is installed the corresponding driver cannot start and the service control manager will notify an error but operation can be continued without problems When Using the PC Interface Board Refer to section 3 4 4 PC Interface Board Specifications ISA Bus Specifications and set the operating system environment and install the PC interface board Log on as Administrator Install the provided software select ISA Driver when asked to select a component Restart the host computer 39 RENESAS When Using the LAN Adapter Log on as Administrator Install the provided software select E8000 LAN Driver when asked to select a component Connect the LAN adapter to the target network and turn the LAN adapter on Select SH7751 E8000S Emulator Software Tools LAN Adapter Configuration from Start Programs and start the LAN Adapter Configuration Set the LAN adapter by LAN Adapter Configuration Turn the LAN adapter off and connect the LAN adapter to the target network and turn the LAN adapter on LAN adapter must be turned off even when the network is not changed Restart the host comput
239. ied 58 RENESAS Figure 3 26 CPU Operating Mode Modification Message Mode 2 59 RENESAS 3 7 Troubleshooting 3 7 1 Error Messages from the HDI PC Interface Connection Failure When the HDI cannot detect the PC interface board for the emulator the HDI will display the following error message E8000 Platform N Driver Error Cannot locate ISA interface card Unable to restore previous configuration for Emulator ISA Driver Will attempt to set default values instead Figure 3 27 Error Message on PC Interface Connection Failure The causes of such failures are given below e The address ranges that was set by the switch on the rear panel of the PC interface board is different from that set in the next setting e Another application is using the selected memory area e Settings of the Computer Property dialog box e Settings of the CONFIG SYS file e Settings of the SYSTEM INI file Emulator Connection Failure When the HDI cannot detect the E8000S station the HDI will display the following message box E8000 Platform x N Driver Error Emulator is switched off or not connected Unable to set default configuration for Emulator ISA Driver Figure 3 28 Error Message on Emulator Connection Failure The causes of such failures are given below 60 RENESAS e The AC power cable is not connected to the emulator or the E8000S station power is not turned on e The PC interface board and the E8000S are not
240. iewing Memory The user can view the contents of a memory block in the Memory window For example to view the memory contents corresponding to the external variable array a e Select Memory from the View menu The Open Memory Window dialog box is displayed e Input ain the Address edit box and set the Format combo box as Long Word Open Memory Window Ed Address ee Cancel Format Long word ar Figure 4 15 Open Memory Window Dialog Box e Click the OK button The Long Memory window showing the specified area of memory is displayed Long Memory H O03FFFD8 Data oooo0000 oo00053DC 00002704 00005665 00000DAA 00000421F 00003EAD 00004D1D Ooog02F5A ooodg20DA Figure 4 16 Long Memory Window 84 RENESAS 4 10 Watching Variables As the user steps through a program it is possible to watch the values of variables used in the program For example to check the contents of the long type array a declared at the beginning of a main function use the following procedure e Click the left of array a displayed in the Source window to position the cursor e Click the Source window with the right mouse button and select Instant Watch from a pop up menu The Instant Watch dialog box is displayed Instant Watch Ed Add Watch Figure 4 17 Instant Watch Dialog Box e Click the Add Watch button to add a variable to the Watch Window window Watch Window Oo
241. ify the required conditions on the corresponding pages then click the OK button The Trace Filter dialog box closes and the search results are displayed in the Trace window The trace search conditions that can be specified and the corresponding pages in the Trace Filter dialog box are shown in table 5 76 206 RENESAS Table 5 76 Trace Search Conditions and Pages in the Trace Filter Dialog Box 1 External bus trace information Page Condition Description General Sets trace search range Address Address bus Searches for records in which the value on the address bus matches the specified condition Data Data bus Searches for records in which the value on the data bus matches the specified condition Bus State Bus state Searches for records in which the RD and RDWR signal levels match the specified condition Probe External probe Searches for records in which the external probe signal levels match the specified condition Interrupt External interrupt Searches for records in which the NMI RESET or IRLO to IRL3 signal levels match the specified condition Time Time stamp Searches for records in which the time stamp matches the specified condition time or range 2 AUD trace information Page Condition Description General Sets trace search range AUD Internal Searches for the branch source and destination addresses that match the specified value or range 207 R
242. imask lt mask value gt Values H 0 to H F are specified by lt mask value gt Description This command displays and sets interrupt conditions during emulator command execution and in the command wait state For details refer to section 5 9 Interrupt Function Examples 1 To set nonmaskable external hardware and peripheral module interrupts mask the external interrupt with a level lower than H E IR ENABLE IMASK H E 2 To display the interrupt condition IR The display format is as follows gt IR Interrupt enable imask H E 304 RENESAS Notes e When the continuous trace mode has been selected by the TRACE MODE command a user interrupt cannot be accepted during emulator command execution or in the command wait state e When lt imask gt is omitted H 0 is set All external interrupts are accepted e While the profile data measurement function is enabled non maskable interrupts cannot be specified to be accepted 305 RENESAS 6 2 14 MAP SET MS Command syntax and parameters ms lt start gt lt end gt lt mode gt lt buswidth gt Parameter Type Description lt start gt Numeric Sets the start address in spaces CSO through CS6 in 4 Mbyte units lt end gt Numeric Sets the end address lt mode gt Keyword Sets the memory map mode user Uses user memory does not use the emulation memory emulator Uses emulation memory area read only Protects the emulation memory ar
243. imum time then click the Close button 5 6 2 External Bus Trace Timing The timing for the acquisition of trace information in the trace buffer depends on the memory space being accessed e Normal SRAM ROM and PCMCIA On the last rising edge of the CKIO clock before the current bus cycle ends e DRAM When the CASxx signal is negated e SDRAM On the rising edge of the CKIO clock when the CS signal is asserted In each bus cycle the number of cycles between the end of the previous bus cycle and the end of the current bus cycle is measured An example of a bus trace timing for access to an area of normal SRAM is shown in figure 5 55 CKIO A 31 0 RD D 31 0 Read WEx D 31 0 Write 3 clock cycles Figure 5 55 Bus Trace for Normal SRAM 1 Trace timing for read cycles 2 Trace timing for write cycles A Trace timing for address bus values B Trace timing for data bus values in reading C Trace timing for data bus values in writing 190 ztENESAS Three clock cycles are traced in each bus cycle A An example of a bus trace timing for access to an area of SDRAM is shown in figure 5 56 gt CKIO CSn Row address i An Column address RAS NOS CAS D 31 0 i BS Figure 5 56 Bus Trace for SDRAM 1 B is
244. in the end address range as a numerical or symbolic value End Sets the start address in of the end address range as a numerical or symbolic value Displays the Input Function Range dialog box to which a start address in the end address range is input as a numerical or symbolic value When the setting is made in this dialog box the start address and end address in the end address range are automatically displayed VP_MAP Sets translation of the addresses in Start and End in the Start Address Range and End Address range according to the VP_MAP command s setting for the respective addresses When this option is not set or VP_MAP is invalid no translation takes place Note Efficiency of execution is measured by using the address bus Note that if the end address is specified as an address that is close to the first instruction after a branch instruction or as the address of the slot for a delayed branch instruction the measured results will not be correct 224 RENESAS e Time Out page Use this page to set the timeout value This dialog box is only displayed to allow setting of the conditions for Performance Analysis 1 General Address Time Out Count r Time Out SSS I Don t Care Figure 5 77 Performance 1 Dialog Box Time Out Page Table 5 85 Options of the Time Out Page Option Description Don t Care Selects no timeout value Input area Sets a timeout value as a n
245. in the same way as in mode 1 above except that the execution times of instructions at addresses outside the range that are called from within the specified range are included in the results of measurement The emulator will also measure the maximum minimum execution times over the specified range Set the timeout value and maximum number of passes as the conditions for Performance Analysis 1 Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 3 216 Measurement starts at the lt start address range gt and halts when it reaches the lt end address range gt The execution count is incremented every time the specified lt end address range gt is passed RENESAS e Example of subroutine time measurement mode 1 An example of subroutine time measurement mode will be described below Here the start address is assumed to be H 1000 and the end address to be H 1 FFF When the user program is running the emulator will measure the execution time of the user program in the address range from H 1000 to H 1FFF When the user program jumps to address H 3000 measurement by the emulator will stop When the user program returns from address H 3FFF measurement by the emulator will start again Address H 0000 Address H 1000 Address H 3000 Measurement range Address H OFFF Address H 1FFF Address H 3FFF Figure 5 70 Example of Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 1 e Example of subroutine time measurement mode 2 In subroutine time measurement mode 2
246. ing to the MMU s state when the command is input Physical Space Sets the address space as physical addresses Virtual Space Sets the address space as virtual addresses ASID Sets an ASID value for use when a virtual address is specified This is only enabled when the Virtual Space radio button is selected When a software break is placed it replaces the instruction at the specified address It is only possible to set a software break in the RAM area including the standard emulation memory However it is not possible to set a software breakpoint at an address that satisfies any of these conditions e The address holds H 003B e The address is used as part of a software sequential breakpoint e The address is in any area other than CS areas except the internal RAM area e An instruction which may satisfy Break Condition U4 e The address of the delay slot for a delayed branch instruction Notes 1 When the number of passes is specified emulator firmware stops the program for about 100 ms every time the program passes the address set as a break condition so that it can update its count of passes As a result the program does not operate in realtime When the program passes such an address the emulator executes the instruction at the address as a single step then returns to normal program execution Break Condition U4 becomes invalid during execution of this single step 2 Use software breakpoints f
247. ion To save the session file select Save Session As from the File menu At this time the window for specifying the file name is displayed Input the session file name in the window and click the Save button To load the session file select Load Session from the File menu A session file can be automatically saved and loaded by setting the HDI Options dialog box of Options in the Setup menu To automatically save the session file click on the Save session automatically radio button in the Session page The dialog box for specifying the file at HDI termination is then displayed Specifying the file name enables session information to be automatically saved to the file from the following HDI termination To automatically load the session file enable Load last session on startup check box in the Session page The session information is automatically loaded from the specified file when the HDI is terminated For more details on sessions and a setting method refer to the Hitachi Debugging Interface User s Manual in the CD R 97 RENESAS 98 RENESAS 5 1 Section 5 Emulator Functions Introduction The following is a full description of the emulator s functions including those that were not described in section 4 Tutorial Table 5 1 is a list of the emulator functions that are described in this section Table 5 1 Emulator Functions Section Function
248. ion Description High Sets the high level of this external probe signal as a break condition Low Sets the low level of this external probe signal as a break condition Don t Care Selects no external probe signal state condition 148 RENESAS e Interrupt Page Use this page to specify NMI signal and external interrupt IRLO to IRL3 signal conditions Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Count Delay NMI High C Low Don t Care p ALO mIRLI m IRL2 IRLS C High C High C High C High C Low C Low Low C Low Don t Care Don t Care Don t Care Don t Care Figure 5 26 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Interrupt Page Table 5 34 Interrupt Page Options NMI Group Box Option Description High Sets the high level of the NMI signal as a break condition Low Sets the low level of the NMI signal as a break condition Don t Care Selects no NMI signal state condition IRLO IRL3 Group Box Option Description High Sets the high level of this external interrupt signal as a break condition Low Sets the low level of this external interrupt signal as a break condition Don t Care Selects no external interrupt signal state condition 149 RENESAS f Count Page Use this page to specify a satisfaction count condition Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Count Delay r Count E Don t Care p1 numbers
249. ion settings for Break Condition A are cleared if there are conditions for Trace Condition A those conditions are cleared Select the Condition A page of the Breakpoints window The same setting procedure applies to the Condition B page Figure 5 32 shows an example of the display when three break condition points and one reset point have been specified as Break Condition A 156 RENESAS ConditionB ConditionC ConditionU Point Sequence Condition 4 Sequential Condition 2 address H 2000 3 address H 3000 R address H 4000 Reset All Sancel Apply Help Figure 5 32 Break Dialog Box after Hardware Sequential Break Setting Table 5 40 Condition A B Page Options When a Sequential Break Has Been Specified Option Description Sequential Displays the sequence of break conditions for Break Condition A or B Condition Up to seven points are displayed in the order in which they must be satisfied 1 to 7 Hardware break conditions One reset point is displayed R Reset point setting Edit Modifies the Break Condition A or B setting that was selected in the Sequential Condition list box Clicking this button opens the Condition dialog box Reset All Clears all Break Condition A or B settings in the Sequential Condition list box Click the Edit button to open the Condition dialog box The sequence of hardware break conditions is added by either of the two methods described be
250. ions e The main function generates 10 pieces of random data to be sorted e The sort function generates the array and inputs the random data in the array and sorts the random data in ascending order e The change function inputs the array generated by the sort function and changes the data in descending order Table 4 1 shows the configuration of the sample program Table 4 1 Configuration of the Sample Program Item No Description of File File Name and Directory 1 HEW workspace lt HDI installation folder gt E8000S 7751 TUTORIAL TUTORIAL HWS 2 DWARF2 type load lt HDI installation folder gt E8000S 7751 module file TUTORIAL TUTORIAL DEBUG TUTORIAL ABS 3 S type load module lt HDI installation folder gt E8000S 7751 file TUTORIAL TUTORIAL DEBUG TUTORIAL MOT 4 Source file main lt HDI installation folder gt E8000S 7751 program TUTORIAL TUTORIAL TUTORIAL C 5 Stack information file lt HDI installation folder gt E8000S 7751 TUTORIAL TUTORIAL DEBUG TUTORIAL SNI Notes 1 TUTORIAL ABS can be executed in the big endian To execute TUTORIAL ABS in little endian recompile the file When a file is recompiled addresses may differ from that described in the manual 2 Sample programs were created through HEW v1 2 An older version cannot open the workspace provided with the sample programs In this case create a new workspace 3 The CPU option was SH4 when the sample file was created Optimization wa
251. is omitted enables or disables all current internal breakpoints 281 RENESAS Examples 1 To set internal breakpoint channel 1 to break on the address bus value of H 1000000 lt addropt gt byte data masked with the zero DO bit lt dataopt gt and the write cycle lt r wopt gt BCUS CHANNEL 1 ADDRESS H 1000000 DATA MASK B Q BYTE DIRECTION WRITE 2 To set internal breakpoint channel 2 to break on the address bus value of H 1000000 before it is executed on the program fetch cycle lt addropt gt and an ASID value of H 0 lt asidopt gt BCUS CHANNEL 2 ADDRESS H 1000000 PC ASID H 0O 3 To set internal breakpoint channel 3 to break on the address bus value of H 1000000 with a mask of lower 10 bits on a program fetch cycle after execution and an ASID value of H 10 lt asidopt gt BCUS CHANNEL 3 ADDRESS H 1000000 PCAFTER M1 ASID H 10 4 To set internal breakpoint channel 4 to break on an execution cycle lt accessopt gt and a read cycle lt r wopt gt BCUS CHANNEL 4 ACCESS DAT DIRECTION READ 5 To set internal breakpoint channel 5 to break when the internal I O area is accessed lt ioopt gt BCUS CHANNEL 5 IO 6 To set internal breakpoint channel 6 to break when the LDTLB instruction is executed lt ldtlbopt gt BCUS CHANNEL 6 LDTLB 7 To display the internal breakpoint channel 1 settings BCUD CHANNEL 1 Display gt BCUD CHANNEL 1 Break Condition Ul Enable address H 100000
252. k C passed System defect System defect Are the transmission procedure and speed of the emulator and host computer correct System defect Modify to the correct Connect correctly procedure and speed Figure 3 29 Troubleshooting PAD RENESAS 65 3 7 4 Operating Procedure for the Diagnostic program A description of the diagnostic program is given below When the HDI is started up the following dialog box is displayed HDI IN This is immediatelly initiates the diagnostic program Do you want to initiate the diagnostic program Figure 3 30 Diagnostic Program Initiation Confirmation Dialog Box When the Yes button is clicked the diagnostic program is initiated and the following dialog box is displayed When the No button is clicked the HDI will continue with its operation DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM E8000 TEST amp MAINTENANCE PROGRAM DIAG SYS Version No X XX XX XX XXXX Copyright C Hitachi LTD XXxx Please key in TEST PARAMETER OPERATOR TEST EXECUTE Y N oft COMMAND Po STOP END Figure 3 31 DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM Dialog Box 66 RENESAS Table 3 5 DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM Dialog Box Option Description Display Area Displays the results of testing by the diagnostic program COMMAND edit box Accepts commands for the diagnostic program STOP box Terminates testing by the diagnostic program and
253. k will not occur For data bus condition the valid bus position or address bus value will be changed depending on the data bus width and an endian in the memory area For the relationship between the bus position and the address bus value refer to the hardware manual 329 RENESAS 6 2 21 TRACE_DISPLAY TD Command syntax and parameters td range lt startcycle gt to lt endcycle gt mode lt displaymode gt Description Displays trace information Parameter Type Description lt startcycle gt Numeric Specifies the first cycle value of the range of trace information to be displayed lt endcycle gt Numeric Specifies the last cycle value of the range of trace information to be displayed lt displaymode gt Keyword Specifies the trace information to be displayed bus Bus trace information aud AUD trace information mix Bus trace and AUD trace information internal Internal trace information Examples To display acquired trace information within the range from D 1000 to D O TD RANGE D 1000 to 0 mode bus 330 RENESAS 6 2 22 TRACE _MODE TM Command syntax and parameters e Setting lt option gt e Display Parameter lt tracemode gt tm lt tracemode gt lt bus_time gt lt bus_sdram gt lt bus_cycle gt lt option gt Bus trace Bus trace and AUD trace No specification lt mode gt lt aud_mode gt lt aud_time gt lt aud_type gt lt aud_window_a gt
254. k Condition U has been satisfied BREAK CONDITION SEQUENTIAL U Sequential Break Conditions U1 to U4 have been satisfied BREAK CONDITION SEQUENTIAL UBC Sequential Break Conditions U7 and U8 have been satisfied BREAK CONDITION SEQUENTIAL A Sequential Break Condition A has been satisfied BREAK CONDITION SEQUENTIAL B Sequential Break Condition B has been satisfied BREAK KEY A forced break has been issued via the Stop button or Halt from the Run menu BREAKPOINT The break was triggered by a software breakpoint BREAK SEQUENCE The break was triggered by a software sequential breakpoint ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION A break instruction H 003B has been executed MULTI BREAK Break triggered by the multibreak feature RESET BY E8000S An error has occurred in the user system The emulator has input a RESET signal to the user system and forced the termination of execution STOP ADDRESS Termination was because of a GO command with a break address as an argument SUBROUTINE TIMEOUT The timeout condition specified in Performance Analysis 1 has been satisfied SUBROUTINE COUNT OVERFLOW The maximum number of passes condition specified in Performance Analysis 1 has been satisfied TRACE BUFFER OVERFLOW The break is due to a trace buffer overflow WRITE PROTECT Writing to a write protected area was attempted 125 RENESAS Operating Status Disp
255. ke the settings correctly then click the Next button CPU Operating Mode Memory Type NORMAL NORMAL O nonmas O Nonm O NORMAL v NoRMma O NoRMmaL o cme tte Figure 5 8 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box Memory Type Page 117 RENESAS Table 5 13 Memory Type Page Item CSO Description Indicates the type of memory in area 0 CSO space Select NORMAL initial value BURST ROM or MPX CS1 Indicates the type of memory in area 1 CS1 space Select NORMAL initial value or MPX CS2 Indicates the type of memory and if SDRAM its type and the SDRAM bus width in area 2 CS2 space Select NORMAL initial value SDRAM 16M 1M x 8bit x 2 64M 2M x 8bit x 4 Bus width 32bit SDRAM 128M 4M x 8bit x 4 Bus width 32bit SDRAM 256M 4M x 16 bit x 4 Bus width 32bit SDRAM Other Bus Width 32bit or MPX Cs3 Indicates the type of memory and if SDRAM its type and the SDRAM bus width in area 3 CS3 space Select NORMAL initial value SDRAM 16M 1M x 8bit x 2 64M 2M x 8bit x 4 Bus width 32 bit SDRAM 128M 4M x 8bit x 4 Bus width 32bit SDRAM 256M 4M x 16bit x 4 Bus width 32bit SDRAM Other Bus Width 32bit DRAM EDO DRAM or MPX CS4 Indicates the type of memory in area 4 CS4 space Select NORMAL initial value or MPX CS5 Indicates the type of memory in area 5 CS5 space Select NORMAL initial value BURST ROM MPX or PCMCIA CS6 In
256. l area B Physical end address 1 Virtual area C Physical area C Setting disabled Virtual address Physical address Load module address Load module address Figure 6 1 Address Translation Cancellation Cancels the emulator address translation VP_MAP tables that have been set Display Displays the contents of the emulator address translation VP_MAP tables The display format is as follows gt VD lt VADDR_TOP gt lt VADDR_END gt lt PADDR_TOP gt 01000000 0100FFFF 02000000 01010000 0101 FFFF 03000000 a b c ENABLE da a lt VADDR_TOP gt Virtual start address b lt VADDR_END gt Virtual end address c lt PADDR_TOP gt Physical start address d VP_MAP tables enabled Enable or disabled Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables the settings of the emulator address translation VP_MAP table or indicates the current state The VP_MAP table is initially disabled When the VP_MAP table is enabled load module addresses virtual addresses are translated to the physical address in actual memory When the VP_MAP table is disabled address translation is disabled Address translation is performed for the following commands and functions ASSEMBLE BREAKPOINT BREAKCONDITION_SET BREAKSEQUENCE_SET DATA_CHANGE DATA_SEARCH DISASSEMBLE MEMORY_DISPLAY MEMORY_FILL MEMORY_EDIT FILE_LOAD FILE_SAVE and FILE_VERIFY 339 RENESAS Examples 1 3 4
257. l the PCI interface board into the host computer The installed hardware will be detected and driver installation will start automatically When asked to select how to install the driver select Search for the best driver for your device Recommended then select Specify a location for how to locate the driver Specify lt drive gt 775 I DRIVERS PCMCIA 95 for the search location where lt drive gt is the drive letter for the CD ROM drive Check that E6000 PC Card has been found and complete the driver installation When Using the PC Interface Board Refer to section 3 4 4 PC Interface Board Specifications ISA Bus Specifications and set the operating system environment and install the ISA bus interface board Install the provided software select ISA Driver when asked to select a component Note An ISA driver to run under Windows Me is not available When Using the LAN Adapter Install the provided software select E8000 LAN Driver when asked to select a component Connect the LAN adapter to the target network and turn the LAN adapter on Select SH7751 E8000S Emulator Software Tools LAN Adapter Configuration from Start Programs and start the LAN Adapter Configuration Set the LAN adapter by LAN Adapter Configuration Turn the LAN adapter off and connect the LAN adapter to the target network and turn the LAN adapter on LAN adapter must be turned off even when the network is not changed Note When usin
258. lator state from parallel mode to user program execution mode END 297 RENESAS 6 2 10 EXECUTION_MODE EM Command syntax and parameters e Setting em lt time_count gt lt timeout gt lt multi_break gt lt reset_signal gt lt busrequest gt lt rdy_signal gt lt nmi_signal gt lt sleep_signal gt lt trigger_bcb gt lt ubc gt e Display em Parameter Type Description lt time_count gt Keyword Specifies the execution time measurement unit time 52us 52 us 52 0833333 us unit initial value time 1 6us 1 6 us 1 627604167 us unit time 20ns 20 ns unit default lt timeout gt Keyword Sets the timeout detection time tout 100us approximately 100 us unit initial value tout 1 6ms approximately 1 6 ms unit tout 13ms approximately 13 ms unit tout 210ms approximately 210 ms unit lt multi_break gt Keyword Enables or disables the multibreak function the emulator can simultaneously stop the execution of user programs in other emulators by using external probe 1 mb enable Enables multibreak mb disable Disables multibreak initial value lt reset_signal gt Keyword The user must enable or disable RESET power on reset signal input res enable Enabled initial value res disable Disabled lt busrequest gt Keyword Enables or disables the input of the bus mastership request signal breq enable Enabled initial value breq disable Disabled
259. lay While the user program is in execution the MPU s operating status is monitored and displayed on the HDI window s status bar This function allows the user to observe the progress of the program The display is only updated when the status changes Table 5 19 is a list of the operating status messages Table 5 19 Operating Status Display Display Meaning PC XXXXXXXX During execution of the user program the address from which operations are fetched is displayed here Reset The MPU has been reset The RESET signal is low Running Execution of the user program has been initiated This message is displayed once the execution has been started or restarted Note that this message is deleted when PC xxxxxxxx starts to be displayed Sleep The MPU is in its sleep state Standby The MPU is in its standby state TOUT A xXxxxxxxx The value displayed is the value on the address bus The bus termination period has exceeded the time specified as Bus timeout in the Configuration dialog box VCC Down Vong Power voltage is 2 65 V or less The MPU is not operating correctly this message is only displayed when the user clock has been selected RDY A xxxxxxxx The RDY signal is low The value displayed is the value on the address bus This is not displayed during refresh cycles BREQ The BREQ signal is low Note Includes the case when memory access is to cached memory and is thus not via the external bus 126
260. le of the use of Performance Analysis is described below Performance Analysis x Pa Condition 1_ mode time name main start H O end H 66 time 0 0 1 0 count D 1 2 mode time2 name sort start H 68 end H 128 3 mode time3 name change start H 68 to H 128 end H 12a to H 18a 4 By Performance3 Figure 5 73 Performance Analysis Dialog Box Select 1 from the Condition list then click the Edit button The Performance 1 dialog box will be displayed Set the conditions for measuring performance then click the OK button The individual pages of the Performance to 8 dialog box are explained in table 5 81 220 RENESAS Table 5 81 Pages of the Performance 1 to 8 Dialog Box Page Description General Sets the measurement mode Address Sets conditions for the address range Time Out Sets a timeout value When the user program is running in the address range specified by the user the emulator will compare the measured time with the timeout time specified by the user When timeout value setting lt measured time the user program emulation will break the timeout break function While timeout value setting gt measured time the emulator will measure the user program s execution time Count Sets a maximum number of passes Note These settings are only available in Performance Analysis 1 Each page is described in detail below e General page Use this page to set the measurement
261. log boxes 5 2 2 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box Use this wizard style dialog box to set the MPU s operating mode This dialog box has three pages and they are listed in table 5 11 Changing the settings in the CPU Operating Mode dialog box will invoke the HDI Table 5 11 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box Page Description MD Pin Sets the PCI mode clock input master slave CSO memory type endian CSO bus width and clock mode Memory Type Indicates the type of memory in CSO to CS6 the type of SDRAM in CS2 and CS3 and the bus width of the SDRAM H UDI JTAG Clock Sets the input clock to the H UDI JTAG interface Note Settings made in the CPU Operating Mode dialog box are saved in the emulator and not in the session file The initial values on each page are the values initially installed with the system files If the settings have changed the initial values at initiation are the changed values 114 RENESAS MD Pin Page Use this page to set the PCI mode clock input CSO memory type endian CSO bus width and clock mode Set the conditions on each page as required then click the Next button CPU Operating Mode MD Pin PCI MD10 9 PCI disabled Clock Status MD8 External input clock Master Slave MD7 CSO Memory Type MDE NORMAL Endian MD5 Big v CS0 Bus Width MD 4 3 Bae o Clock Mode MD2 0 Clock Mode 3 gt MD10 MD9 MDS MD MD6 MD5 MD4 MD3 MD2 MD1 MDO
262. low 157 RENESAS a Using the history of hardware break condition settings on the History page Any hardware break condition displayed on the History page of the Condition dialog box can be used as a hardware sequential break condition Click to select a condition from the Condition list on the History page then click the V button the condition is now added to the Sequence list box as No 1 In the same way hardware break conditions Nos 2 to 7 can be added in sequence The order in which the conditions must be satisfied to generate a break is the order in which they were added in the Sequence list box Click the WR button to add a reset point The reset point condition will be displayed to the right of Reset in the Sequence list box Click the OK button to return to the Condition A page and the hardware sequential break conditions will have been set The Sequential Condition list displays the hardware sequential break conditions that have been specified Click the OK button to close the Break dialog box Condition History Entry List address H 1000 address H 2000 address H 3000 elete address H 4000 Entry gt Duplicate Condition address H 1000 address H 2000 address H address H 4000 gt l Delete Cancel Help Figure 5 33 Condition Dialog Box History Page 158 RENESAS Table 5 41 History Page Options Option Description Condition Up to 32 conditions can b
263. m again 263 RENESAS 5 16 Input Format 5 16 1 Entering Masks Address bus conditions and data bus conditions can be input with masks Addresses can be masked in bits or in 4 bit units When a bit is masked it always satisfies the condition To specify a mask for an address condition specify the mask value in the Mask area The mask for data conditions is specified in the Data area There is a separate Mask list on the Data page of the Break Condition U1 dialog box To specify any further mask specify for the digits to be ignored Examples of mask specification is shown below Table 5 110 Address Mask Specification No Input Value Mask Unit Example Masked Bits 1 Binary 1 bit B 01101 Masks bits 0 to 2 2 Hexadecimal 4 bits H F50 Masks bits 0 to 11 264 RENESAS 5 17 Source Window Expanded Function 5 17 1 Setting BP Column In the HDI software breakpoints can be set cancelled or displayed and software sequential breakpoints can be displayed or cancelled in the BP column of the Source window Software breakpoints can be set or cancelled by selecting a program PC breakpoint with the left hand mouse button and double clicking in the BP column or by placing the cursor at the line where the breakpoint was set and press the F9 key This function is the same as for the BP columns in the Disassembly and Labels windows The contents of the items displayed in the BP columns are shown in table 5 111
264. made by you for a third party DISCLAIMER HITACHI MAKES NO WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ORAL OR WRITTEN EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THEREOF WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT IN NO EVENT SHALL HITACHI BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM ANY DEFECTIVE EMULATOR PRODUCT THE USE OF ANY EMULATOR PRODUCT OR ITS DOCUMENTATION EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY STATED OTHERWISE IN THIS WARRANTY THIS EMULATOR PRODUCT IS SOLD AS IS AND YOU MUST ASSUME ALL RISK FOR THE USE AND RESULTS OBTAINED FROM THE EMULATOR PRODUCT RENESAS State Law Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may have other rights which may vary from state to state The Warranty is Void in the Following Cases Hitachi shall have no liability or legal responsibility for any problems caused by misuse abuse misapplication neglect improper handling installation repair or modifications of the emulator product without Hitachi s prior written consent or any problems caused by the user system All Rights Reserved Thi
265. me entries have no notes 6 1 2 Format Symbols used in the command format have the following meanings lt gt Contents of lt gt are parameters Parameters enclosed by can be omitted lt gt The parameter shown in the left lt gt can be expressed in the format in the right lt gt l One or both can be selected non exclusively Either of two or one can be selected exclusively The parameters of each command are explained in the tables in section 6 2 267 RENESAS 6 1 3 Parameter Type Input 1 Numerical parameters Numerical parameters must be supplied as binary octal decimal or hexadecimal numbers symbols or expressions A symbol can consist of up to 32 characters Operators e g and can be used to delimit expressions 2 Keyword parameters The bold faced characters in the tables for each command are the strings that are input as keyword parameters Only the listed strings can be used If a string that is not listed is input an error will occur 3 String parameters String parameters are used to input mask data and file names When using strings to mask data specify H hexadecimal or B binary at the head of the data as the radix and specify for the digits to be masked No Input Value Mask Unit Example Masked Bits 1 Binary 1 bit B 01110 Masks bits 0 to 2 2 Hexadecimal 4 bits H 000F50 Masks bits 0 to 7 6 1 4 Examples The examples show how to input the
266. mode General Address Time Out Count Subroutine time measurement mode 1 Subroutine time measurement mode 2 Subroutine time measurement mode 3 Name _main Figure 5 74 Performance 1 Dialog Box General Page 221 RENESAS Table 5 82 Options on the General Page Option Description Subroutine time measurement mode 1 Selects subroutine measurement mode 1 Subroutine time measurement mode 2 Selects subroutine measurement mode 2 Subroutine time measurement mode 3 Selects subroutine measurement mode 3 Name Sets a name for the address range to be measured e Address Page Set conditions for the address range on this page The format varies according to the subroutine measurement mode selected on the General page The format of the Address page is shown below When Subroutine time measurement mode 1 2 is selected Set the start and end addresses General Address Time Out Count r Subroutine Address Start Ho ge l End H66 L a P YP MAP Figure 5 75 Performance 1 Dialog Box Address Page 222 RENESAS Table 5 83 Options on the Address Page When Subroutine time measurement mode 1 2 is Selected Option Description Start Sets a start address as a numerical or symbolic value End Sets an end address as a numerical or symbolic value Displays the Input Function Range dialog box in which a start address is
267. more than 255 clock cycles is displayed here Only one of Time Stamp or Clock can be displayed at a time Source The corresponding line of source code Clicking in the Source column activates the Source window and jumps to the corresponding line The contents of the source column are not displayed in external bus trace Note E8000S will be displayed if cycles are invalid in items R W to PRB 200 RENESAS AUD Trace Display Select AUD trace in the Display combo box to display AUD trace information The range for display can be specified by setting the start and end pointers in units of branch instructions instruction pointers under Start and End on the General page of the Trace Filter dialog box The header for AUD trace display is the same as that of external bus trace display Trace 707 records no filter ojx R W IRL NMI RES SLP VCC PRB 000006 MEMORY W 00002001 eb 000005 MEMORY R 00002801 a9 000004 MEMORY W 00002801 a9 000003 S TRACE 00000848 ffffffas 000002 BRANCH 0000084c BRA L00 12 DESTINATION 00000810 MOV L R1l RO 000001 BRANCH 0000081c BRA L01 12 DESTINATION 00000830 BSR S01 12 000000 BRANCH 00000830 BSR S01 12 ad DESTINATION 00000850 RTS v Figure 5 61 Trace Window AUD Trace Display The items shown in table 5 72 are displayed as AUD trace information in the Trace window Table 5 72 AUD Trace Information Items and Display Format in Tr
268. n Table 3 2 lists the switch setting states The switch setting at emulator shipment is No 4 memory area H D0000 to H D3FFF PC interface board Enlarged front view Rotary switch Figure 3 12 PC Interface Board Switch Table 3 2 Switch Settings for Memory Areas Switch Setting Memory Area Switch Setting Memory Area 0 H C0000 to H C3FFF 8 H E0000 to H E3FFF 1 H C4000 to H C7FFF 9 H E4000 to H E7FFF 2 H C8000 toH CBFFF A H E8000 to H EBFFF 3 H CC000 to H CFFFF B H EC0O0O0 to H EFFFF 4 setting at shipment H D0000 to H D3FFF C Not used 5 H D4000 to H D7FFF D Not used 6 H D8000 to H DBFFF E Not used 7 H DC0O0O0 to H DFFFF F Not used Note When C to F of the switch are set memory areas cannot be allocated Set one of 0 to B 44 RENESAS Installing the PC Interface Board A WARNING Always switch OFF the personal computer host computer and peripheral devices connected to the personal computer before installing the PC interface board Failure to do so will result ina FIRE HAZARD and will damage the personal computer interface board and peripheral devices or will result in PERSONAL INJURY Remove the cover of the personal computer and install the PC interface board in the ISA bus specification extension slot Tighten the screw after confirming that the PC interface cable can be connected to the board PC interface cable Personal computer case PC interface board ISA bus spe
269. n U1 to U4 are ignored The performance analysis conditions are ignored The MPU internal performance analysis conditions are ignored The trace acquisition conditions are ignored The trace halt mode is not available MPU internal and AUD trace information is not acquired The settings of Buffer Over Flow in the Trace Acquisition dialog box Trace Mode page are ignored The settings of the Trace Acquisition dialog box AUD Internal Mode page are ignored Memory accesses such as display and modification in the Memory or Disassemble window are prohibited When an area with write protection is allocated in the emulation memory a break does not occur even if the memory contents are modified by the user program The contents of the Aum window are not updated Notes 1 Profile data measurement will stop due to a break caused by the PC condition Only program fetched address is specified on the Address page in the Break Condition U dialog box for internal break Break Condition U Even if profile data measurement is restarted it will stop again due to the same condition In this case cancel the PC condition and restart profile data measurement 2 The settings for internal break Break Condition U1 to U8 and Break Condition U8 gt U7 for internal sequential break remain effective 3 When the standby mode is entered due to user program execution do not use the profile data measurement functions 240 RENES
270. n an address in the range above Start or that is selected by Mask is accessed Range The condition is satisfied when an address in the range set as Start End is accessed VP_MAP Selects translation of addresses in the range from Start to End according to the VP_MAP command Addresses are not translated when this option is not set or when VP_MAP is invalid Start Sets the start of the range of address bus values as a number or a symbol End When Range is selected sets the end of the range of address bus values as a number or a symbol Outside Range The condition is satisfied at any address that is not in the range above Start or an address selected by Mask or in the range set as Start End Non user mask Selects no mask condition User mask Sets mask conditions Mask Set required values for bits and select bits to be masked after selecting Address and User mask The Range condition will be satisfied regardless of any values set as part of the mask The Mask setting is disabled if Range is selected as the type of address condition 145 RENESAS b Data Page Use this page to specify a data bus condition Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Count Delay T Outside Range Figure 5 23 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Data Page Table 5 31 Data Page Options Option Description Don t Care Selects no data condition Data Se
271. n the Break point list box Reset All Clears all software breakpoints Click the Add button on the Point page to open the Break Point dialog box Specify the breakpoint s address the number of passes and memory space for the specified addresses then click the OK button Address F ee SETA Value H C000040 Count Number D numbers Normal C Physical Space Virtual Space ASID D 255 Figure 5 14 Break Point Dialog Box Address Page The display returns to the Point page The Break point list box now displays the specified address and memory space Click the OK button to close the Break dialog box 132 RENESAS Table 5 23 Break Point Dialog Box Options Option Value Description Sets the breakpoint s address as a numeric or symbolic value Count Number Sets a number of passes A break occurs when the breakpoint has been passed the specified number of times The default setting is H 1 Any value from H 1 to H FFFF can be set here Normal Translates addresses according to the current state of the emulator When the VP_MAP table is enabled and the address is within the table s range the address is translated according to the VP_MAP table When the address is beyond the table s range the address is translated according to the MMU s state when the corresponding command is input When the VP_MAP table is disabled the address is translated accord
272. n the E8000S default Uses the UBC for Break Condition U7 and U8 as sequential break conditions in the E8000S When conditions are satisfied in the order of U8 and U7 user program execution stops Break conditions must be set for U7 and U8 This command displays and sets debugging conditions while the emulator executes user program 299 RENESAS Examples 1 To display current debugging conditions set during user program execution EM The following shows the display format gt EM Execution Mode Condition A Sequential Not used Condition B Sequential Not used Interval Timer counter 52us Bus timeout 100us Multi break PRB1 Disabled RESET signal Enabled BREQ signal Enabled RDY signal Enabled NMI signal Enabled SLEEP signal Enabled Output trigger TRGB Disabled User break controller Break Condition U7 8 2 To enable the input of the bus mastership request signal for the debugging conditions set during user program execution EM BREQ ENABLE 3 To set the trigger output when the hardware break conditions are satisfied for any of the channels set by Break Condition B or Trace Condition B and to set the execution time measurement unit to 20 ns for the debugging conditions set during user program execution EM TIME 20NS TRGB ALL 300 RENESAS 6 2 11 GO_OPTION GP Command syntax and parameters e Setting gp eml_mode lt eml_mode gt e Display gp
273. n the fly check box of the Configuration dialog box Interrupts during step 246 Whether or not a user interrupt is permitted during single step execution the setting information in the Interrupts during step check box of the Configuration dialog box RENESAS The Memory sheet has the following contents Table 5 100 Memory Sheet Configuration Item Description Target Device Configuration The memory map status of the internal module INTERNAL I O System Memory Resources The remaining capacity of the emulation memory Load Memory Areas The address range of the load module that was loaded The Events sheet has the following content Table 5 101 Events Sheet Configuration Item Description Resources The number of effective breakpoints that have been set 247 RENESAS 5 11 Trigger Output During execution of the user program the emulator outputs a low level pulse from the trigger output probe under the following two conditions e Trace condition satisfaction e Hardware break condition satisfaction Using this pulse as an oscilloscope s trigger input signal makes it easy to adjust the user system hardware For example the waveform produced when the user program goes to a specified point can be viewed When the trigger output is specified by using TRGB of the Execution Mode2 option of the Configuration dialog box a low level pulse is output from the trigger output pin
274. nabled Break Condition U5 and U6 cannot be used as break Set Break Condition U5 when the internal I O access and Break Condition U6 to trace the LDTLB instruction execution Break Condition U1 and U4 are used as start and end conditions for measurement with the PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS_I_SET command When used for the start and end conditions Break Condition U1 and U4 do not operate as break conditions 283 RENESAS 6 2 3 Hardware Sequential Break Specification Command CSQ e Setting CONDITION_SEQUENCE CSQ e Display CONDITION_SEQUENCE CSQ Command syntax and parameters e Setting csq lt type gt lt action gt e Display csq lt type gt Parameter Type Description lt type gt Keyword Sets hardware sequential break type a b Specifies Condition A B lt action gt Keyword Enables or disables hardware sequential function off No sequential specification break Sequential break trace Sequential trace stop Description e Setting This command specifies hardware sequential break or sequential trace stop which are the conditions set by the user in hardware break condition Break Condition A B or trace condition Trace Condition A B The user must set the conditions by using the BCS or TAS command e Display This command displays the conditions currently set Examples 1 To specify Break Condition A as sequential break CSQ A BREAK 2 To specify Trace Condition B as sequential trace stop CSQ B TRACE 3 To ca
275. nal I O area 3 For data bus condition the valid bus position or address bus value will be changed depending on the data bus width and an endian in the memory area For the relationship between the bus position and the address bus value refer to the hardware manual 278 RENESAS 6 2 2 Internal Break Commands BCUS BCUC BCUD BCUE e Setting BREAKCONDITION_U_SET BCUS e Cancellation BREAKCONDITION_U_CLEAR BCUC e Display BREAKCONDITION_U_DISPLAY BCUD e Enable Disable BREAKCONDITION_U_ENABLE BCUE Command syntax and parameters e Setting beus channel lt channel_number gt lt option gt lt option gt e Cancellation bcuc channel lt channel_number gt e Display beud channel lt channel_number gt e Enable Disable bcue channel lt channel_number gt lt mode gt Parameter Type Description lt channel_number gt Numeric Sets an internal break Break Condition U channel number The channel number that can be specified depends on the lt ubc gt setting with the EXECUTION_MODE command When lt ubc gt is set to ubc user 1 to 6 can be specified for the channel number and when set to ube bcu or ube sbcu 1 to 8 can be specified For BCUS commands items that can be as lt option gt depend on the channel number For the lt option gt parameter see the description of the BCUS command lt option gt parameters 1 lt addropt gt lt dataopt gt lt asidopt gt or lt r wopt gt lt accessop
276. nal memory board is used the emulation memory must be set on 8 Mbyte boundaries 4 Nine cycles or more are required as wait state cycles for access to areas to which emulation memory is allocated Use the bus state controller to insert nine or more cycles for access to such areas 5 When emulation memory is allocated to two areas the bus state controller settings should be such that the bus width is the same for both areas 375 RENESAS E 3 User Interface 1 The pins listed in table E 1 are occupied solely by the emulator and are not connected to the user system Table E 1 Pins Occupied Solely by the Emulator No Signal Name No Signal Name 193 XTAL2 5 TDI 194 EXTAL2 199 TRST 245 ASEBRK BRKACK 249 VDD PLL2 246 TDO 250 VSS PLL2 1 TMS 251 VDD PLL1 2 TCK 252 VSS PLL1 2 The delay times on the timing of the RESET NMI RDY and BREQ signals when they are input to the MPU from the user system as shown in figure E 2 are because this connection for these signals is via logic on the evaluation chip board 376 RENESAS Table E 2 Delay Time for Signals Connected via the Evaluation Chip Board Signal Name Delay Time ns RESET 18 6 NMI 17 6 RDY 5 0 BREQ 5 0 E 4 Performance Measurement Function Conditions for the use of the performance measurement function must be specified for the external bus If the internal bus is specified measurement of time is not possible E 5 Hardware Break Function
277. nce Analysis window Performance Analysis Address Not Used Display type Subroutine address list no information Figure 5 69 Performance Analysis Window In the Performance Analysis window the user is able to assign any of eight independent channels To set a condition click Edit in the pop up menu of the Performance Analysis window to produce the Performance to 8 dialog box 215 RENESAS Measurement Mode Measurement modes are explained in table 5 79 Table 5 79 Measurement Modes Measurement Mode Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 1 Description Measures the execution time and number of passes through the subroutine over the specified address range Measurement starts with the execution of the subroutine within the address range is suspended when execution moves outside the specified range and is restarted when execution returns to the specified address range of the subroutine The execution count count of the number of passes is incremented every time the lt end address gt of the specified address range is passed The execution times of instructions at addresses outside the range that are called from within the specified range are not included in the results of measurement Set the conditions in the Performance 1 to 8 dialog box Set the timeout value and maximum number of passes as the conditions for Performance Analysis 1 Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 2 Measurement is executed
278. ncel hardware sequential specification of CONDITION A CSQ A OFF 4 To specify the contents set for CONDITION A CSQ A The display format is as follows gt CSQ A Break Condition A Sequential 284 RENESAS Notes e The emulator clears all conditions set to Break Condition A B and Trace Condition A B when the user specifies break or trace in CSQ Therefore the user should set Break Condition A B or Trace Condition A B for hardware sequential break or trace sequential stop after CSQ if necessary e The user cannot use this command to enable or disable sequential hardware breaks during user program execution 285 RENESAS 6 2 4 Software Break Command BP BC BD BE Setting BREAKPOINT BP Cancellation BREAKPOINT_CLEAR BC Display BREAKPOINT_DISPLAY BD Enable or Disable BREAKPOINT_ENABLE BE Command syntax and parameters Setting bp lt address gt count lt count gt space lt space gt asid lt asid gt Cancellation be lt address gt space lt space gt asid lt asid gt Display bd Enable or Disable be lt address gt space lt space gt asid lt asid gt lt mode gt Parameter Type Description lt address gt Numeric Sets breakpoint address When the user sets an odd address the emulator will round it down to an even address lt count gt Numeric Sets the breakpoint pass count within the range from H 1 to H FFFF When the user does not specify the pass count the setting will be
279. nd SLEEP signals is enabled Execution Mode2 Sets the conditions for the output of a trigger when a break occurs sequential conditions Condition A and Condition B trace break or unused and use of the user break controller for sequential conditions Loading flash memory Enables or disables downloading to flash memory CPU Operating Mode Sets and displays the MPU operating mode Each page of the Configuration dialog box is described below 103 RENESAS General Page Use this to select the MPU driving clock and specify the emulation mode enabling disabling of memory access during emulation whether or not interrupts are accepted during emulation with step execution and setting conditions relating to memory and produce a dialog box for the setting of driver software General Execution Model Execution Mode Loading flash memory CPU Operating Made CPU SH 751 Clock Emulator Clock 27 8MHz v Emulation mode Normal hs IV Prohibit RAW on the fly J Interrupts during step Memory area Normal Physical Virtual 45 0 Emulator ISA Driver Driver Figure 5 2 Configuration Dialog Box General Page Table 5 4 General Page Option Item Description CPU Displays the target device Clock Selects the clock for supply to the MPU For details on initial values refer to section 5 15 Controlling and Checking the State of MPU Emulator clock
280. nd steps into the called function and stops at the first line of the called function e To step into the sort function select Step In from the Run menu or click the Step In button P in the toolbar W tutorial c Oy x Line Address BP Source 33 000024ca afi j 000024e6 Break sort a 000024f6 min a 0 000024fa max a 9 000024fe min 0 00002502 max 0 00002506 change a 00002516 min a 9 0000251a max a 0 0000251e while 1 long t int i j k gap 00002534 gap 5 00002538 while gap gt 0 0000253c for k 0 k lt gap k 00002544 for i k gap i lt 10 i i gap 00002550 for j i gap j gt k j j gap 0000255c if a j gt a j gap 00002574 alj 0000257e alil alitqapl Figure 4 23 Source Window Step In The highlighted line moves to the first line of the sort function in the Source window 89 RENESAS 4 11 2 Executing the Step Out Command The Step Out command steps out of the called function and stops at the next line that called the function in the program e To step out of the sort function select Step Out from the Run menu or click the Step Out button P in the toolbar Source long j int i 000024aa for i 0 i lt 10 i jf 000024b2 j rand 000024c2 if j lt Of 000024c6 j lt j 000024ca 000024e6 000024fa 000024fe 00002502 max 0 00002506 change a 00002516 min a 9 0000251a max a 0 0000251e
281. ndow MPU Internal Trace Display The items shown in table 5 73 are displayed as MPU internal trace information in the Trace window 203 RENESAS Table 5 73 MPU Internal Trace Information Items and Display Format in Trace Window Item Description and Format No Line number in the Trace window Label Label name R W to PRB Instruction pointer a The location of the instruction relative to the last branch instruction on which internal trace acquisition stopped Values other than for the pointer to the last instruction are negative Dxxxxxx Branch source and destination instructions are displayed but the pointer value is only displayed for the branch source instruction However if the branch source instruction has not been acquired the pointer value is displayed for the branch destination instruction alone R W to PRB MPU Internal trace type b BRANCH Branch source address DESTINATION Branch destination address I O Internal I O access LDTLB LDTLB instruction access R W to PRB 32 bit address c When the trace type is BRANCH or DESTINATION it is the branch source or destination address When the trace type is I O it is the accessed internal I O address When the trace type is LDTLB it is the LDTLB instruction address R W to PRB When the trace type is BRANCH or DESTINATION it is the opcode d When the trace type is I O it is the data written to or read from the internal I O address as
282. ndow of ojx w 0x003fffd8 T tlong 10 H 00000000 Ox003fffd8 H 00000daa Ox003fffdc H 000020da H 00002704 H 00002f5a H 00003ead H 0000421f H 00004did H 000053dc px003fffel Ox003fffe4 Ox003fffe8 Ox003fffec OxO003f f f 0 OxO003 ff 4 OxO003 ff 8 H 00005665 H 00005665 Ox003ffffc Ox003fffd0 Se et et Se Et St Ge Gs fl 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 ax t i 3 Figure 4 27 Watch Window Window Variable max Modified 92 RENESAS 4 11 3 Executing Step Over Command The Step Over command executes a line that calls a function as a single step e Before executing the Step Over command execute two steps up to a line that calls the change function by using the Step In command twice W tutorial c OF x Line Address BP Source 28 000024aa for i 0 i lt 10 i 000024b2 j rand 000024c2 if j lt Ojf 000024c6 j 3 000024ca a i j 000024e6 Break sort a 000024f6 min 000024fa mnax 000024fe min 00002502 max 00002516 min 0000251a mnax 0000251e while 00002530 _sort void sort long a long t int i j k gap 00002534 gap 5 00002538 while gap gt 0 0000253c for k 0 k lt gqap k f Figure 4 28 Source Window Before Step Over Execution 93 RENESAS e Select Step Over from the Run menu or click the Step Over button qp in the toolbar
283. ng an interrupt process so the measurement results may change when the emulator displays the results of measurement 320 RENESAS 6 2 18 REFRESH RF Command syntax and parameters rf Description Updates the HDI memory information Examples To update the HDI memory information RF RENESAS 321 6 2 19 STATUS STS Command syntax and parameters sts Description Displays status information for the emulator For details on its contents refer to the System Status window in section 5 10 Displaying Various Information Examples To display status information for the emulator STS Display gt STS Emulator Status Connected To CPU PCI MD10 9 Clock Status MD8 Master Slave MD7 CSO Memory Type MD6 Endian MD5 CSO Bus Width MD4 3 Clock Mode MD2 0 CSO Memory Type CS1 Memory Type CS2 Memory Type CS3 Memory Type CS4 Memory Type CS5 Memory Type CS6 Memory Type H UDI JTAG Clock User system MD10 0 Clock source Run status Cause of last break Run Time Count Condition A Sequential Condition B Sequential Interval Timer counter Bus timeout Multi break ESET signal REQ signal DY signal I signal EEP signal PRB1 nuz ovy 7 322 SH7751 Emulator SH7751 PCI disabled External input clock aster NORMAL Big 32 Bit Clock Mode 3 NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR Leo 7ff Emulator Clock Break BREAKPOI
284. ngeopt gt Break Condition U1 and U4 are used for start and end conditions PAIS CHANNEL 2 MODE TM CLOCK BUS RANGE U 3 To clear the performance condition set to channel 2 PAIC CHANNEL 2 4 To clear all performance conditions PAIC 5 To initialize the results of measuring performance PAI MODE INIT 6 To initialize the results of measuring performance set to channel 2 PAI CHANNEL 2 MODE INIT Notes e When the user specifies the start and end PC values to measure performance the emulator will use the internal break function to set the start and end PC values therefore the emulator will not be able to use the MPU s internal break function e When the emulator measures a result of six or more digits for PAI and PAI2 and when the user specifies RATE1 and RATE2 the emulator will display the following PAII PAT2 o e When this command sets clears or initializes the performance measurement conditions the emulator cannot guarantee the settings of the internal break e When the emulator stops the execution of the user program due to the satisfaction of break conditions before the emulator reaches the measurement end condition the emulator will measure the performance from the start condition until when execution breaks e When the emulator accepts interrupt while the user is executing an emulator command or while the emulator is waiting for the user to enter a command the emulator will keep on measuring performance duri
285. ngs given here virtual addresses correspond to physical addresses as shown in figure 5 91 H O H 12000 H 12FFF H 4000FFF Virtual address Physical address Figure 5 91 Address Translation According to VP_MAP Tables How to translate addresses depends on the settings of the radio buttons of the Memory area group in the Configuration dialog box and MEMORYAREA_SET MAS command The following passages show how addresses are translated in each setting state 252 7tENESAS e When the Normal radio button is selected or when Normal is specified with the MAS command The VP_MAP table takes priority over the TLB When the VP_MAP table is enabled and the specified address is within the VP_MAP table settings the emulator translates the address according to the VP_MAP table If the specified address is beyond the ranges of VP_MAP table settings whether the VP_MAP table is enabled or disabled the emulator translates the address according to the MMU s state e When the Virtual radio button is selected or when Virtual is specified with the MAS command The address is translated according to the TLB If the specified address is outside the TLB table settings a TLB error will occur e When the Physical radio button is selected or when Physical is specified with the MAS command The address is not translated 253 RENESAS Table 5 105 Address Translation Tables VP_MAP MMU Within
286. nie E eE EEE E AEE RE EEE EKE E EA E ERSE 258 5 14 2 Setting Auto update Memory sssesseseeseersseeseseersresrsrerrssertenresrenresrerrnseerreesreer 259 5 14 3 Displaying the Memory cs sesscssessoessessescersoesosersrssossesresssensersasersersessases 260 Controlling and Checking the State of MPU ooo eee eee eeseeeceeeceseceseceseceaeesaesaeeeneseneeees 262 RENESAS 5 15 1 Selecting Clock for the MPU 0 00 eee cee ceeeceeeeeconeenevenevsnsesseessesseessessaeeneeenees 262 5 15 2 Checking the I O signals oe eee ceecseecseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeenaecsaecsaecaeeeeeaeeeaes 262 5 15 3 Checking the Power Supply and Clock State of the User System 263 5 16 Input Format 22 isi ois csl e EEE ee ee RR ee ea iin 264 5 16 1 Entering Masks ccc sstss ces code cesen nnee eea EE EAER E EE AEE E E 264 5 17 Source Window Expanded Function eseseseeseeeeeseeeesressssersesrreersesstrsseessreseereesseesseesse 265 DATA Setting BP ColuM a E a E Re AA ES 265 Section 6 Command Line vac cesisnssascleszatvoissce nates cnnsetedsogual ng nleosiacbousbaserneatesernconies 267 6 1 List Formatsion aip acces pen eek E E sh twecas Anes See ueesdad esate nave EAN 267 6 1 Descriptio sipna een a RERE ER E A E RERE 267 62 Format eneren E E aces eh E E E EA EE EEE 267 6 1 3 Parameter Type Input cscvcssc sccscetsccns cess scan racerne eeose es reena kae R EE 268 GAA Examples esr eea r EE E SAE E E A RE 268 6 2 List of Commands ccccccces
287. nted hereby under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information When exporting the products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document
288. nternal performance function When the user does not specify lt channel_number gt the emulator clears all the set performance conditions Display This command displays the measurement results of the MPU internal performance function The following shows the display format gt PAI MODE RATE RET PATI OARW BUS G 000000000010 PAI2 OA CPU U BREAK CONDITION U1 4 00000000049B a b c d e PAII PAI2 00001 f a PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS_I 1 or PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS_I 2 b Measurement mode c Counting method d Conditions to start and end measurement e Measurement results Ratio of PAI1 and PAI2 results only when the user specifies option RATE1 or RATE2 RATE1 The emulator will display the ratio of PAI results against PAI2 results PAIL PAI2 RATE2 The emulator will display the ratio of PAI2 results against PAI1 results PAI2 PATI Examples 1 To set the following conditions for the channel 1 performance condition lt modeopt gt Number of times all operands are accessed lt clockopt gt Clock is counted by the ratio of the MPU operation clock and bus clock lt rangeopt gt PC values H 1000000 to start and H 1000100 to end measurement PAIS CHANNEL 1 MODE OA CLOCK CPU 319 RENESAS 2 To set the following conditions for the channel 1 performance condition lt modeopt gt Elapsed time cycle lt clockopt gt Clock is counted by the ratio of the MPU operation clock and bus clock lt ra
289. nternal_type 4 Acquires trace information when exception processing occurs internal_type 5 Acquires trace information on normal branch instructions and when exception processing occurs internal_type 6 Acquires trace information on subroutine calls and when exception processing occurs internal_type 7 Acquires trace information on normal branch instructions subroutine calls and when exception processing occurs Description Specifies trace information acquisition mode and displays the mode settings Examples 1 To display the set trace information acquisition mode TM Results gt TM trace_mode ofbreak bus_time 20ns bus_sdram enable mode aud aud_mode realtime aud_time clk aud_type 1 2 To stop the acquisition of trace information and break when the trace buffer overflows 333 RENESAS TM OF BREAK To acquire AUD trace information on memory accesses in read cycles between start address H O and end address H 10 on channel A in full trace mode TM MODE AUD AUD MODE FULL AUD_TYPE 2 AUD _WINDOW_A H O TO H 10 ACCESS R 334 RENESAS 6 2 23 TRACE _SEARCH TS Command syntax and parameters ts range lt startcycle gt to lt endcycle gt lt option gt lt option gt lt option gt lt addropt gt lt dataopt gt lt r wopt gt lt prbopt gt lt irlopt gt lt nmiopt gt lt resetopt gt lt timeopt gt Parameter Type Description lt startcycle gt Numeric Specifies the start cycle value of th
290. nts Contains information on the usage of resources on breakpoints The Session sheet has the following contents Table 5 98 Session Sheet Configuration Item Target System Description Indicates whether the emulator is connected Session Name A session file name Program Name 244 The name of a load module that is loaded RENESAS The Platform sheet has the following contents Table 5 99 Platform Sheet Configuration Item Description Connected To The name of an emulator that is connected CPU The type of object MPU PCI MD10 9 The PCI mode in use Clock Status MD8 The clock input that is selected Master Slave MD7 Whether the emulator is in master or slave mode CSO Memory Type MD6 The memory type that is set for the AREAO area Endian MD5 The endian in use CSO Bus Width MD4 3 The bus width set for the AREAO space Clock Mode MD2 0 The selected clock mode CSO Memory Type The memory type set for the AREAO area CS1 Memory Type The memory type set for the AREA1 area CS2 Memory Type The memory type set for the AREA2 area along with the SDRAM type and SDRAM bus width settings CS3 Memory Type The memory type set for the AREA area along with the SDRAM type and SDRAM bus width settings CS4 Memory Type The memory type set for the AREA4 area CS5 Memory Type
291. nu commands 3 Status bar Indicates the state of the emulator and progress information about downloading 4 Help button Activates the HDI on line help 72 RENESAS 4 3 Setting the Configuration Emulation conditions are set through the Configuration dialog box e Select Configure Platform from the Setup menu to set configuration The Configuration dialog box is displayed Configuration x General Execution Model Execution Modez Loading flash memory CPU Operating Made CPU SH7751 Clock Emulator Clock 27 8MHz T Emulation mode Normal M Prohibit B W on the fly T Interrupts during step Memory area Nomal Physical Virtual 4 Emulator 1S4 Driver Driver Figure 4 3 Configuration Dialog Box For details on the Configuration dialog box refer to section 5 2 Setting the Emulator Operating Conditions Table 4 3 shows the options in the Configuration dialog box and the settings to run the sample program 73 RENESAS Table 4 3 Settings in the Configuration Dialog Box Page Option Value General Emulation clock Clock Emulator Clock 27 8 MHz Emulation mode Emulation mode Normal normal execution Permits or inhibits memory access during Inhibited select the check box emulator execution Prohibit R W on the fly Permits or inhibits interrupts generated Inhibited do not select the check box by command
292. o condensation Storage 35 to 80 RH no condensation Vibration Operating 2 45 m s max Storage 4 9 m s max Transportation 14 7 m s max AC input power Voltage 100 V to 240 V AC 10 Frequency 50 60 Hz Power consumption 200 VA Ambient gases There must be no corrosive gases present RENESAS Details of the operating environment are listed in table 1 2 Table 1 2 Operating Environment Item Operating Environment Host computer IBM PCs and compatible machines that contain Pentium processors 300 MHz or faster is recommended Operating system Windows 95 Windows 98 WindowsNT 4 0 Windows Me or Windows 2000 Minimum memory capacity for 32 Mbytes more than twice the size of the load module is operation recommended Display Resolution better than 800 x 600 SVGA is recommended Empty space in a hard disk Disk capacity required for installation 40 Mbytes or more Take the swap area into account when ensuring that there is enough space on your system more than four times the size of the memory is recommended Supported interfaces ISA bus slot does not support Windows Me and WindowsNT 2000 PCI bus slot PC card PCMCIA and LAN adapter conforming to IEEE802 3 with 10BASE T or 100BASE TX Pointing device such as a mouse A pointing device such as a mouse which can be connected to the host computer and is supported by Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me WindowsNT 4 0 and
293. of software breaks software sequential breaks and hardware sequential breaks are ignored e All trace acquisition conditions are ignored e Itis not possible for the trace acquisition condition to be shifted to the trace halt mode Notes 1 While the user is using this function no other performance functions are available except the MPU internal performance 2 The two types of errors listed below must be considered for measurement A margin of error with 1 resolution a margin of error with 20 ns occurs when the resolution is 20 ns which occur when starting and halting break a user program execution and starting and halting a measurement by specifying the conditions Frequency stability of the crystal oscillating module for measurement 0 01 214 RENESAS 5 8 Performance Analysis Function Performance analysis applies functions of the E8000S station or internal functions of the MPU to the measurement of performance 5 8 1 Measuring with E8000S Station Function The emulator s performance analysis function is for measuring the efficiency of parts of a user program in terms of their execution times against the overall execution time and for measuring the number of times a part of the user program is executed e Setting the Conditions for Performance Measurement In the HDI the user can set the execution efficiency and the execution count through a certain dialog box and display the measured results in the Performa
294. office equipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems medical equipment or systems for life support e g artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations or healthcare intervention e g excision etc and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions un
295. on To specify an external probe signal condition prb lt bit specification gt A bit is specified as follows PRB1 to PRB4 signal bit specification 3 2 1 0 Bit location x x x x Value to be specified Specify 0 low level or 1 high level for x Loep 4 3 2 1 PRB number When is specified the condition applies for any and all bits lt irlopt gt Specifies IRLO to IRL3 signal conditions To specify IRLO to IRL3 signal conditions irl lt bit specification gt A bit is specified as follows To specify bits IRLO to IRL3 3 2 1 0 Bit location x x x x Value to be specified Specify 0 low level or 1 high level for x LIO L 3 2 1 0 IRL number When is specified the condition applies for any and all bits lt nmiopt gt Specifies an NMI signal condition To search through the trace information when the NMI signal is high nmi hi To search through the trace information when the NMI signal is low nmi low lt resetopt gt 336 Specifies a RESET signal condition To search through the trace information when the RESET signal is low reset low RENESAS Parameter lt timeopt gt Description Description Searches through the trace information for the specified period of time To check the trace information at a specific time time lt time1 gt To search through the trace information for a specified range of time time lt time1 gt to lt time2 gt Specify the start of the perio
296. on 5 11 1 Emulation Memory Allocation Function Note When the optional memory board is connected the memory is allocated in 8 Mbytes 4 5 Downloading 4 5 1 Downloading the Sample Program Download the sample program of the ELF DWARF2 format to be debugged e Select Load Program from the File menu The Load Program dialog box is displayed e Click the Browse button The Open dialog box will be displayed e Select the file TUTORIAL ABS and click the Open button Load Program Ed VV Verify Cancel File name D HEW HdiS E 8000557751 tutorialtutorial Debu x Browse T Load only debugging information T Load stack information file SNI file Figure 4 7 Load Program Dialog Box e Click the Open button in the Load Program dialog box The following dialog box will be displayed when the program completes loading In the dialog box the address where the program was loaded is displayed 77 RENESAS HDI i Module name D HEW SHdi5 E 80005477571 tutorial tutorial D ebug tutorial abs Areas loaded 00000000 00000016 00000800 00000083 00001000 00001053 00002000 00002C24 00002C2C 00002037 Figure 4 8 HDI Dialog Box e Click the OK button 4 5 2 Displaying the Source Program The Source window allows the user to display the C C language source program set breakpoints execute the program and select variables so the user can debug a program at the source level
297. on between the evaluation chip board and the user system refer to RENESAS 3 3 3 Connecting the External Probe CAUTION Check the external probe direction and connect the external probe to the emulator station correctly Incorrect connection will damage the probe or connector When an external probe is connected to the emulator probe connector on the emulator station s rear panel it enables external signal tracing and multibreak detection Figure 3 6 shows the external probe connector External probe connector Pint Externak probe ee Pin 2 Pin3 Pina Pins Z Pin6 I x Pin 7 ee Pin 8 Enlarged view Signal Name Remarks Probe input 0 Synchronous break input pin Probe input 1 Probe input 2 Probe input 3 RUN break status RUN state identification signal output pin Trigger output Trigger mode output pin GND GND connection pin Figure 3 6 External Probe Connector 31 RENESAS 3 3 4 Selecting the Clock This emulator supports three types of clock for the MPU a crystal oscillator attached on the evaluation chip board external clock input from the user system and the emulator internal clock The clock is specified with the Configuration dialog box or the CLOCK command Note however when the user system power is turned on while the clock operating mode 7 CKIO input is specified by the emulator the input clock from the MPU is the clock input from the CKIO pin The clock cannot be switche
298. on cannot be used Clear the INTERRUPT command before the profile function is set While the INTERRUPT command setting is enabled the profile data measurement cannot be used Clear the INTERRUPT command setting then specify the profile function Cannot use command when user program executing for profiling While the user program is being executed with the profile data measurement function enabled this command cannot be used Cannot find flash memory tool file The writing and erasing module files are not found Cannot load flash memory tool file 344 The writing and erasing module files cannot be read correctly RENESAS Table 7 2 HDI Error Messages cont Error Message Erasing flash memory time out Description and Solution A timeout has occurred during flash memory erasing The flash memory contents have not been erased correctly Check that the created erasing module is correct and that the flash memory is operating correctly Writing flash memory Command error H XXXXXXXX An error has occurred during flash memory writing Data has not been written to the flash memory correctly Check that the created writing module is correct and that the flash memory is operating correctly trace mode data no change The contents of the Trace Mode page have not been changed Set a condition and click the Apply button no branch window software trace AUD trace AUD Trace radio button has
299. on the emulator the emulator will check whether the user system clock user evaluation chip board crystal oscillator xtal and emulator internal clock signal 27 are supplied correctly Examples 1 To select the user system clock signal CK USER 2 To display the selected clock signal CK The display format is as follows gt CK Clock Emulator Clock 27 8MHz 294 RENESAS Notes When the user is selecting user and the emulator has the following abnormal condition the emulator system program will not run correctly and the emulator will display error message USER SYSTEM NOT READY when the user starts the HDI In this case the user must close the HDI and start it again e user has been selected and the user is using the user system clock but the user system clock is cut off V bvo 1s supplied correctly DDQ 295 RENESAS 6 2 8 DEVICE_TYPE DE Command syntax and parameters de Description This command displays the selected target device Examples To display the selected MPU DE The display format is as follows gt DE Current device SH7751 296 RENESAS 6 2 9 END END Command syntax and parameters end Description This commands returns control to user program emulation when the trace halt state is entered due to the satisfaction of trace conditions This command clears the trace information and the emulator starts to acquire new trace information Example To return the emu
300. ons on the Count Page esse ceeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesesaecsaessaeeseeeaeeees 226 Menu Items for Displaying the Results 0 eeeeeseeeeseeceneceeneeceeeeeeneeceteeeeneeesees 227 Display Format of Results When Address is Selected eee eeeeeeeeeeeees 228 Display Format of Results When Count is Selected eee ee eeeeeeee eee 229 Display Format of Results When Graph is Selected ee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 230 Items Measured by the MPU Internal Performance Function eee eee 232 Further Conditions for Incrementing Items eee eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 234 Windows for Profile Data Measurement ee eeeeeceeeceseceseceeeeseecaeeeaeeeneeeeeees 236 Select Data Dialog Box Options 00 0 ec eceeeeeeeseceseceseceeecaeesaeeeeeseeeeeeeeenenaeees 238 Start and Stop Conditions for Profile Data Measurement eee eeeeeeees 239 Restriction on Emulator Functions When Profiler Is Enabled eee 240 System Status Window Configuration cee eeeesecesecsseceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 244 Session Sheet Configuration ccecccesccesececsseceeececseceeeeeceaeceseeecseeeeeneecnaeeesees 244 Platform Sheet Configuration ec cc ceeceesecsseceeeeeceeeceeceeceaeeesneecaeeeeneesnaeeesees 245 Memory Sheet Configuration 0 0 cece ce eeeeeeeeeceeeceeceseceaecaeceeecaeeeaeeeaeeeneees 247 Events Sheet Configuration ec ceececeecceeccecsseceeececseceeneecaeeeeeeecsaeeeeneecnaeensees 247
301. or GO_TILL GT Executes user program up to temporary breakpoint HALT HA Halts user program HELP HE Displays help for command line and commands ID 6 2 12 ID Displays emulator type and version number INITIALISE IN Initializes a platform INTERRUPT 6 2 13 IR Displays or sets interrupt conditions during emulator command execution and in the command wait state LOG LO Manipulates logging file 270 RENESAS Table 6 1 List of Commands cont Command Section Abbreviation Description MAP_DISPLAY MA Displays memory map information MAP_SET 6 2 14 MS Sets emulator memory map MEMORY_DISPLAY MD Displays memory contents MEMORY_EDIT ME Modifies memory contents MEMORY FILL MF Fills the memory with the specified data MEMORY_MOVE MV Moves memory block MEMORY_TEST MT Tests memory block MEMORYAREA_SET 6 2 15 MAS Sets and displays memory space for use in commands such as load verify save memory display and memory modification QUIT QU Terminates HDI PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS 6 2 16 PA Displays measurements of emulator performance PERFORMANCE_CLEAR 6 2 16 PC Clears performance conditions that have been set for the emulator PERFORMANCE_SET 6 2 16 PS Sets performance conditions PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS_I 6 2 17 PAI Displays a measurement of the MPU s internal performance PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS_I 6 2 17 PAIC Clears pe
302. or Count maximum number of passes specification is satisfied For details refer to section 5 5 10 Timeout Break Timeout break of Performance analysis Timeout trace stop Acquisition of trace information is terminated mode when the Performance Analysis 1 Time Out specification or Count maximum number of passes specification is satisfied For details refer to section 5 6 1 Timeout Trace Stop Timeout trace of Performance analysis Elapsed time of The execution time over which the condition condition specified as Condition B is satisfied For satisfaction mode details refer to section 5 7 2 Measuring Execution Time between Satisfaction of Specified Conditions Time interval measurement Condition B Break disabled All break functions except the forced break are mode disabled during program execution No break Note Incycle reset mode the RESETP signal is output to the MPU regardless of the MPU s operating state when the time specified by the command has elapsed Figure 5 10 shows the timing with which the TRIG signal is output to the trigger output probe in cycle reset mode 122 RENESAS Time specified by the command gj I 1 TRIG ce I lt __ gt 3 25 us Figure 5 10 Timing for Trigger Signal Output Restrictions on emulation modes are listed in table 5 17 Table 5 17 Restrictions on Emulation Modes Emulation Mode Restrictions Cycle reset mode and e Settings
303. or increments the pass count lt countopt gt when it passes through lt start address range gt and fetches the programs in lt end address range gt Specification mode time3 The user can use channels 1 3 5 and 7 in time measurement mode 3 lt nameopt gt Specifies the subroutine to measure the performance Specification name lt subroutine name gt 311 RENESAS Parameter lt startopt gt Description Specifies the subroutine start address in time measurement modes 1 and 2 Specification start lt address gt lt address gt Address value To specify the start address range in time measurement mode 3 Specification start lt address1 gt to lt address2 gt lt address1 gt Start address numeric lt address2 gt End address numeric lt endopt gt Specifies the end address of the subroutine to measure the performance To specify the end address in time measurement modes 1 and 2 Specification end lt address gt vpmap lt address gt Address numeric To specify the end address range in time measurement mode 3 Specification end lt address1 gt to lt address2 gt vpmap lt address1 gt Start address numeric lt address2 gt End address numeric When the user specifies vpmap the emulator will use VP_MAP to translate the addresses specified in lt startopt gt and lt endopt gt from virtual addresses to physical addresses When the emulator cannot use the VP_MAP it will use th
304. or the Stop At settings allowed in the Run Program dialog box Therefore when 255 software breakpoints have been set any further specification made by using the Stop At item of the Run menu is invalid Ensure that the total number of software breakpoints and settings made by using the Stop At item of the Run menu is 255 or less 133 RENESAS 134 When a disabled breakpoint address is specified as a stop address in the Run Program dialog box the breakpoint becomes enabled after the first time that execution subsequently stops at that address When the content of a software breakpoint address is modified during execution of the user program the following message will be displayed after execution stops BREAKPOINT IS DELETED A xxxxxxxx When the above message is displayed use the Delete All or Disable button in the Breakpoints window to cancel all software breakpoint settings If it is not possible to correctly set a breakpoint when a session file is loaded the breakpoint is registered as DISABLE in the Breakpoints window Software breakpoints are ignored during step execution Do not set a software breakpoint immediately after the delay slot of a delayed branch instruction If this is attempted a slot illegal instruction interrupt will occur when the delayed branch instruction is executed and the break will not occur Do not allow the user program to modify memory at a breakpoint address
305. ore settings for subroutine time measurement mode 3 can only be made on even numbered channels 3 Only channels 1 to 4 can be used to measure the maximum minimum execution times in subroutine time measurement mode 2 Performance Measurement Time To set the time over which the emulator to measure the performance use the The minimum time to be measured by Go command execution of the Execution Model page in the Configuration dialog box The user can select approximately 14 minutes with a sampling interval during execution of 52 us 26 seconds with a sampling interval during execution of 1 6 us or 0 33 seconds with a sampling interval during execution of 20 ns as the maximum time interval over which the emulator is to measure performance The counter used in measurement has 24 bits 219 RENESAS Note The two types of errors listed below must be considered for measurement e A margin of error with 1 resolution a margin of error with 20 ns occurs when the resolution is 20 ns which occur when starting and halting break a user prgram execution and satisfying start and end conditions e Frequency stability of the crystal oscillating module for measurement 0 01 How to Set the Conditions for Measuring the Performance To set the conditions for measuring the performance use the Performance Analysis dialog box that can be displayed by clicking Edit in the pop up menu in the Performance Analysis dialog box An examp
306. orted 13 The test function which appears to be available as Test in the Memory menu is not supported 14 When the Memory window is updated during emulation only the block on a 256 byte boundary that contains the modified address will be updated Other memory contents will not be updated 255 RENESAS 5 13 Stack Trace Function The stack trace function displays the history of function calls The memory contents are displayed in the Stack Trace window by the stack trace function Select Stack Trace from the View menu to open the Stack Trace window E Stack Trace Value func3 short param 3 local 3 funeZ short param Z local 2 funci short Ox00000094 Ox00003ffa Ox00003fd8 short D 3 Ox00003fd4 unsigned long Ox00000072 Ox00003ffa Ox00003fe4 short D 2 Ox00003fe0 unsigned long Ox0000003e param 1 local 1 main start Ox00003ffa Ox00003ff0 short D l Ox00003fec unsigned long Ox00000012 D 103 Ox00003ffa F P L F P L F P L F L short Figure 5 92 Stack Trace Window Table 5 106 Display Format in Stack Trace Window Item Description Kind Type of the symbol F Function P Function parameter L Local variable Name Symbol name Value Value address and type of the symbol Clicking the right mouse button on the window displays a pop up menu which includes the following options
307. ory before downloading to flash memory RENESAS Sample Programs Sample programs are provided in the FMtool folder in the HDI installation folder Refer to these programs when creating user specific programs Table 5 9 Sample Program Specifications Item Description Endian Big RAM area to be used H 0C001000 to H 0C0015BF Start address of writing module H 0C001100 Start address or erasing module H 0C001000 CPU Operating Mode Page Use this page to set and display the details of the MPU s operating mode General Execution Mode Execution Mode2 Loading flash memory CPU Operating Mode PCI MD10 9 PCI disabled Clock Status MD8 External input clock Master Slave MD Master CSO Memory Type MDE NORMAL Endian MD5 Big CSO Bus Width MD 4 3 32 Bit Clock Mode MD2 0 Clock Mode 3 CSO Memory Type NORMAL CS1 Memory Type NORMAL CS2 Memory Type NORMAL CS3 Memory Type NORMAL CS4 Memory Type NORMAL Com RIAA AL Setting Figure 5 6 Configuration Dialog Box CPU Operating Mode Page 113 RENESAS Table 5 10 CPU Operating Mode Page Page Description Item Displays a list of the CPU Operating Mode items Status Displays the current setting for the item Setting Displays the CPU Operating Mode dialog box that is used to change the settings When Finish is clicked in the CPU Operating Mode dialog box the E8000S restarts and the ignores the settings made in other dia
308. ox General Page 0 0 cee eesceceeeeeseeceeeeeeeeceseeeeneeeneees 174 Figure 5 46 Trace Acquisition in Free Trace Mode ou cece eeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeecesecsseesseeaeenaeenes 176 X RENESAS Figure 5 47 Figure 5 48 Figure 5 49 Figure 5 50 Figure 5 51 Figure 5 52 Figure 5 53 Figure 5 54 Figure 5 55 Figure 5 56 Figure 5 57 Figure 5 58 Figure 5 59 Figure 5 60 Figure 5 61 Figure 5 62 Figure 5 63 Figure 5 64 Figure 5 65 Figure 5 66 Figure 5 67 Figure 5 68 Figure 5 69 Figure 5 70 Figure 5 71 Figure 5 72 Figure 5 73 Figure 5 74 Figure 5 75 Figure 5 76 Figure 5 77 Figure 5 78 Figure 5 79 Figure 5 80 Figure 5 81 Figure 5 82 Figure 5 83 Figure 5 84 Figure 5 85 Figure 5 86 Trace Acquisition in Trace Stop Mode 0 0 ee eeeeeeeceesceeeeeseceeceseceaecsaeceeeneeenes 177 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Condition A Page cee eesceeeseeeseeceeeeeeneeeeees 179 Trace Condition A1 Dialog Box General Page cee eeeceeseeeeseceteeeeneeeeees 180 Configuration Dialog Box Execution Mode2 Page 000 0 ceececeseceereeeneeeeeneees 183 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Trace Mode Page eesseseeeseeceeeeeneeeeees 184 Example of Range Trace Mode eeceeceecceseceseceseceeeceecaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeseaeeaees 185 Configuration Dialog Box General Page eee eeeceeceesseceeeeeceeceeneeenaeeeeeeers 188 Trace Mode Page Bus Trace Group BOX eeeceeeseceeeceeneeceeeeeeneeceeeeeneeees
309. pecified conditions Trigger output A pulse is output from the trigger pin when the specified conditions are satisfied Timeout trace stop Trace acquisition stops when the timeout condition specified for Performance Analysis 1 has been exceeded Note Can be specified for Trace Conditions A and B but not for Trace Condition C Free Trace Mode Trace information is acquired continuously from the start of user program execution until any of the break conditions is satisfied The free trace mode is the default when no trace condition is specified User program Program flow Trace memory gt Break condition is satisfied Ez Figure 5 46 Trace Acquisition in Free Trace Mode 176 2tENESAS Trace Stop Mode a Overview Trace acquisition stops when the specified conditions are satisfied User program Program flow Trace memory Trace condition is satisfied Realtime emulation continues Ra No break occurs Figure 5 47 Trace Acquisition in Trace Stop Mode In this mode execution of the user program will not be suspended but the emulator enters the trace halt mode The trace stop conditions are shown in table 5 56 These are AND conditions Table 5 56 Trace Stop Conditions Condition Description Address bus The condition is satisfied when the value on the address bus or in the program counter matches the specified value
310. ply an incorrect power voltage Use only the provided AC power cable Use only the specified type of fuse RENESAS Warnings on Emulator Usage Warnings described below apply as long as you use this emulator Be sure to read and understand the warnings below before using this emulator Note that these are the main warnings not the complete list Vi A WARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES or PARTS Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator product or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST RENESAS CAUTION Place the emulator station and EV chip board so that the trace cables are not bent or twisted A bent or twisted cable will impose stress on the user interface leading to connection or contact failure Make sure that the emulator station is placed in a secure position so that it does not move during use nor impose stress on the user interface 7tENESAS VII CAUTION This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance wi
311. ponents against the component list Component list See section 3 2 install Acrobat Reader Install the Reader only when it is necessary Connect the emulator See sections 3 3 1 to 3 3 6 See section 3 4 1 for Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me Set up the emulator See section 3 4 2 for WindowsNT 4 0 See section 3 4 3 for Windows 2000 Turn the emulator Install the system program See section 3 5 Start the HDI and check the operation of the emulator See section 3 6 Figure 3 1 Emulator Preparation Flow Chart 21 RENESAS 3 2 Installing the Acrobat Reader Acrobat Reader 5 0 is required to view the online manual Acrobat Reader is provided on the CD R of this product The installation of Acrobat Reader is described below If you have already installed Acrobat Reader do not carry out this procedure Install the CD R of this product in the CD ROM drive Click Run from the Start menu Specify ArS500enu exe in Pdf_Read English directory in the Run dialog box D 7751 Pdf_Read English Ar500enu exe then click OK button Install according to the instructions displayed in the screen 3 3 Emulator Connection The following description is given on emulator connection 3 3 1 Connecting the Device Control Board At shipment the device control board is packed separately from the E8000S station Connect the devic
312. quential breakpoints that have been set BREAKSEQUENCE_DISPLAY 6 2 5 BSD Displays software sequential breakpoints that have been set BREAKSEQUENCE_ENABLE 6 2 5 BSE Enables or disables software sequential breakpoints that have been set BREAKSEQUENCE_SET 6 2 5 BSS Sets software sequential breakpoints CHECK 6 2 5 Checks the state of each pin for the MPU CLOCK 6 2 7 CK Sets and displays the CLOCK signal for the MPU CONDITION_SEQUENCE 6 2 3 CSQ Sets hardware sequential break RENESAS 269 Table 6 1 List of Commands cont Command Section Abbreviation Description DEVICE_TYPE 6 2 8 DE Displays the type of a currently selected device DISASSEMBLE DA Disassembles program and displays the result END 6 2 9 END Returns to user program execution when the emulator enters the trace hold state because trace conditions have been satisfied ERASE ER Clears the contents of the Command Line window EVALUATE EV Calculates expression EXECUTION_MODE 6 2 10 EM Sets and displays debugging conditions during user program execution FILE_LOAD FL Loads object program file FILE_SAVE FS Saves the contents of memory as a file FILE_VERIFY FV Compares the contents of a file with memory GO GO Executes user program GO_OPTION 6 2 11 GP Sets and displays the emulation mode during user program execution GO_RESET GR Executes user program from reset vect
313. r a reset point Examples 1 To set address bus values from H 10027C to H 100304 as the address condition and the write cycle as the read write cycle condition of Trace Condition A on channel 2 range trace TAS A CHANNEL 2 TYPE RANGE ADDRESS H 10027C TO H 100304 DIRECTION WRITE To set a value of H 4750 as the condition for the data bus and the read cycle as the read write cycle condition of Trace Condition B on channel 4 trace stop TAS B CHANNEL 4 TYPE STOP DATA H 4750 DIRECTION READ To set a value of H 11111111 as a data condition and external probe 4 low external probe 3 high external probe 2 low and external probe 1 high as the external probe conditions of Trace Condition A on channel 5 trace stop TAS A CHANNEL 5 TYPE STOP DATA H 11111111 PRB 0101 To set the low NMI as the NMI signal condition for Trace Condition B on channel 7 trace stop TAS B CHANNEL 7 TYPE STOP NMI LOW To set bus value with mask H 1000 as the address condition for Trace Condition B on channel 1 trace stop TAS B CHANNEL 1 TYPE STOP ADDRESS MASK H 1000 To set address bus values outside the range from H 100000 to H 1001C0 as the address condition for Trace Condition B on channel 3 trace stop TAS B CHANNEL 3 TYPE STOP ADDRESS H 100000 TO H 1001CO NOT To display settings for Trace Condition B on channel 3 TAD B CHANNEL 3 gt TAD B CHANNEL 3 Trace Condition B3 Enable type stop address H 100000 to H 1001c0O no
314. r r When setting a break condition string channel number specify 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 When setting a hardware sequential break specify p or r p Sequential point r Reset point lt mode gt Keyword Sets whether to enable or disable break conditions enable Enables break conditions disable Disables break conditions 273 RENESAS Description of the bcs command lt option gt Specify one or more conditions Parameter Description lt addropt gt Specifies address condition To specify an address break condition address lt address gt not vpmap To specify an address range break condition address lt address1 gt to lt address2 gt not vpmap To mask address address mask lt maskdata gt not vpmap lt address gt Address numeric lt address1 gt Start address numeric lt address2 gt End address numeric lt maskdata gt Specifies mask value Add not to specify an address or range outside which the user program should break However do not add not when specifying c for lt type gt Add vpmap to the specification to break the user program at the address translated by the VP_MAP table If VP_MAP is disabled or at default the physical address will be used lt dataopt gt Specifies data condition This parameter can be used when lt type gt is a or b To specify the data condition datahi lt datahi gt datalo lt datalo gt not lt datahi gt lt datalo gt Specify data value numeric
315. r transportation vehicular medical aerospace nuclear or undersea repeater use The prior written approval of Renesas Technology Corporation is necessary to reprint or reproduce in whole or in part these materials If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control restrictions they must be exported under a license from the Japanese government and cannot be imported into a country other than the approved destination Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of Japan and or the country of destination is prohibited Please contact Renesas Technology Corporation for further details on these materials or the products contained therein tENESAS C 7 D mh on lt D D SH7751 E8000S Emulator HS7751EBH81H User s Manual ane Tones Rev 1 0 2002 04 Cautions Hitachi neither warrants nor grants licenses of any rights of Hitachi s or any third party s patent copyright trademark or other intellectual property rights for information contained in this document Hitachi bears no responsibility for problems that may arise with third party s rights including intellectual property rights in connection with use of the information contained in this document Products and product specifications may be subject to change without notice Confirm that you have received the latest product standards or specifications before final design purchase or
316. race record once it has been updated 198 RENESAS External Bus Trace Display Select Bus trace from the Display combo box to display the external bus trace information The range for display can be specified by setting the start and end pointers in bus cycles bus cycle pointers in Start and End on the General page of the Trace Filter dialog box The pointer is a value relative to the location at which the delay condition has been satisfied Bus cycles before the delay condition has been satisfied are indicated by a minus sign while cycles after the condition s satisfaction is displayed with a plus sign BP AB DB R W IRL NMI RES SLP VCC PRB Time Stamp Clock a 000009 00002001 7deb6b4d 4111 ol 1 l l 1111 000H00M00S019965U 000008 00000840 60300009 1111 1111 dOOOHOOMOOSO19966U 000007 00002001 etebtet 1111 1111 000H00M00S019966U 000006 00002801 68a99ed4 1111 1111 000H00M00S019967U 000005 00000844 23000009 1111 1111 oOOHOOMOOSO199670 000004 00000848 00430009 1111 1111 000H0O0M00S019968U 000003 00002801 adi iiia 1111 1111 oOOOHOOMOOSO1S968U 000002 0000084c afe00009 Lili 1111 000H00M00S019969U 000001 00000850 000b0009 1111 1111 000H00M00S019969U 000000 00000810 60120009 1111 1111 000H00M00S019969U y WZ Figure 5 60 Trace Window External Bus Trace Display R R wW R R R Ww R R R PRRPRPRPRPRRPR PRRPRP RPP RRR PRRRPRPRPRPREPR PRRRPRPRPRPRPR The items shown in table 5 71 are displayed as external
317. ration puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better and more reliable but there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them Trouble with semiconductors may lead to personal injury fire or property damage Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs with appropriate measures such as i placement of substitutive auxiliary circuits ii use of nonflammable material or iii prevention against any malfunction or mishap Notes regarding these materials 1 These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the Renesas Technology Corporation product best suited to the customer s application they do not convey any license under any intellectual property rights or any other rights belonging to Renesas Technology Corporation or a third party Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage or infringement of any third party s rights originating in the use of any product data diagrams charts programs algorithms or circuit application examples contained in these materials All information contained in these materials including product data diagrams charts programs and algorithms represents information on products at the time of publication of these materials and are subject to change by Renesas Technology Corporation without notice due to product improvements or other reasons It is therefore recommend
318. re accessed Internal I O access count IOA The number of times the internal I O was accessed Cache miss count DCRW The number of times accesses to data did not hit the cache cache miss EC The number of times accesses to instructions did not hit the cache cache miss TLB miss count DT The number of times read and write accesses to data did not hit TLB TLB miss ET The number of times accesses to instructions did not hit TLB TLB miss Instruction fetch count EF The number of times instructions were fetched to the cache while the cache was valid 10 11 Branch count The number of times branch instructions BF other than with displacement 0 BF S BT S BT other than with displacement 0 BT S BRA BRAF and JMP were encountered BT The number of times the branch instruction was satisfied 12 232 Instruction access count EA The number of times instructions were accessed RENESAS Table 5 91 Items Measured by the MPU Internal Performance Function cont No Item Measurement Mode Description 13 Instruction E The number of times instructions were execution count executed 14 E2 The number of times two instructions were being executed at the same time 15 EFP The number of times FPU instructions were executed 16 ETR The number of times TRAPA instructions were executed 17 In
319. red Display This command displays the result of measuring the subroutine performance The following shows the display format 1 To display an execution time ratio for the program execution state gt PA GRAPH NO NAME MODE RATE __ 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 1 SUBA H D 10 0 2 SUBB 12 D 20 0 ana 3 SUBC B D 30 0 ebb berberine 5 6 7 8 a b c d e TOTAL RUN TIME D 0000H 00M 10S 000020US 250NS a Subroutine number b Subroutine name up to 32 characters can be used c Time measurement mode 11 Time measurement mode 1 12 Time measurement mode 2 I3 Time measurement mode 3 d Displays the execution time ratio numerically e Displays the execution time ratio as a graph f Total execution time Hours H minutes M seconds S microseconds US and nanoseconds NS 313 RENESAS 2 To display subroutine address list 314 gt PA ADDRESS NO NAME MODE ADDRESS 1 SUBA I 00000100 00001 FFO TIME xxxH xxM xxS xxxxxxUS COUNT nnnnnnnn a b c d e f g 2 SUBB 12 00005000 00007FF0 3 SUBC 13 00010000 0001008F h 00020000 00020098 i 5 6 7 8 TOTAL RUN TIME D 0000H 10M 00S 000020US 250NS j a Subroutine number b Subroutine name up to 32 characters can be used c Time measurement mode 11 Time measurement mode 1 I2 Time measurement mode 2 I3 Time measurement mode 3 d Subroutine start address e Subroutine end addre
320. reeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 85 Add Watch Dialog Box eeceeceesseceeeeesseeceseeeeneeceeeecaaeceseeesaeeceeeeeenaeceeeeeeaaeesaes 86 Watch Window Window Displaying the Variable ceeceeseeeeeeceeeeceteeeeneeees 86 Watch Window Window Displaying Array Elements eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 87 Source Window Step Execution ceeceescecseeceeseeceeeeeeneeceaeeeeeeeceaeeesneeceaeeeeaeecsas 88 Source Window Step In cece eeeccesseecsseceececeeeeeeaeeceeeeeaeecnaeeeeeeeceaeeseneecsaeeeeneeceas 89 Source Window Step Out ceeeescecsseceeseeceseeeeneeceseeeeaeeceaceseaeeceaeeeeaeecsaeeeeneeceas 90 Watch Window Window Array a Sorted in Ascending Order cceeeeeeeeeees 91 Source Window Step Out gt Step In ee eee eeeseecsseceeeeeceeeceeeeecseeeeeeeeceaeeeeneeen 91 Watch Window Window Variable max Modified 00 0 eeccccceesseceseeceeeesteeeeenees 92 Source Window Before Step Over Execution 0 eeccesecesseceeeeecteceeneesseeeneeeeees 93 Source Window Step OVE ceeeesseceenceeseceenceceeceeseeceeeeesaeceeeeeceeeeaeeceaeeesaeensees 94 Watch Window Window Array a Sorted in Descending Order eeeeeeeees 94 Locals Window cccccccccesssececsececesssececsesaececseeeecesaececsesaecesseeeeceesaeeecsesaeesseeeeeeees 95 Locals Window Showing Elements of Array a ceeeesceceeeceeeeeceeeceeneeceeeeeneecees 96 Configuration Dialog BOX aeie 102 Configura
321. ress page Table 5 29 Break Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 Dialog Box Pages Page Description Address Sets address bus conditions Data Sets data bus conditions Bus State Sets read write cycle conditions Probe Sets external probe signal conditions Interrupt Sets external interrupt signal conditions Count Sets satisfaction count conditions Delay Sets delay conditions Specify the required conditions on the corresponding pages then click the OK button The Break Condition A7 dialog box closes and the display returns to the Condition A page The specified hardware break conditions will now be displayed as condition 7 in the Condition list box Click the OK button to close the Break dialog box Hardware break conditions for the other channels are specified in the same way The following sections describe the pages of the Break Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 dialog box 144 RENESAS a Address Page Use this page to specify an address bus condition Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Count Delay p Address I Don t Care Address C Range IV VP_MAP Start JH 68 End E 0 M Outside Range Nonusermask User mask Figure 5 22 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Address Page Table 5 30 Address Page Options Option Description Don t Care Selects no address condition Address The condition is satisfied whe
322. results rate1 The emulator will display the ratio of channel 1 results against channel 2 results rate2 The emulator will display the ratio of channel 2 results against channel 1 results init Initializes measurement information Description of the PAIS command Parameter Description lt modeopt gt Specifies performance analysis conditions The user can specify the keywords in the table below mode lt measurement mode gt lt clockopt gt Specifies the clock to use to measure performance cpu The emulator can measure the performance using the MPU operation clock default bus The emulator can measure the performance using the ratio of the MPU operation clock and bus clock lt rangeopt gt Specifies whether to measure performance during GO command execution or between the specified start and end conditions Specify the parameter as follows range g Measures performance during GO command execution default rangeu Specifies Break Condition U1 and U4 for measurement start and end conditions respectively Break Condition U1 and U4 must be specified 317 RENESAS Settings of lt modeopt gt Measurement Item Mode Description Number of operand OARW The number of times cache area was read and access cycles written when the cache area was enabled OARAM Number of times the internal RAM were accessed by the operands OA Number of times an access was made
323. rews of the cables Figure 3 4 Connecting Trace Cables to the E8000S station 28 RENESAS A WARNING At shipment the trace cable screws are colored to prevent an insertion error CN1 red CN2 yellow CN3 blue If the connector is connected incorrectly the connector may be damaged A WARNING Make sure the connector shapes and numbers are correctly matched when connecting trace cables to the station to evaluation chip interface connectors Failure to do so will damage the emulator 4 Connect the trace cables to the station to evaluation chip board interface connectors CN1 CN2 and CN3 on the evaluation chip board Confirm that each trace cable connected to a connector on the E8000S station is also connected to its corresponding station to evaluation chip board interface connector on the evaluation chip board Connect the cables using the same method as in step 3 Figure 3 5 shows how to connect the trace cables to the evaluation chip board interface connectors 29 RENESAS Power supply cable CN7 a Trace cable CN1 E8000S station to evaluation chip board interface CN1 ai AN GND cable Hn 4 Hh MNL Trace cable CN2 Trace cable CN3 E8000S station to evaluation chip board interface CN2 User system E8000S station to evaluation chip board interface CN3 Figure 3 5 Connecting Trace Cables to the Evaluation Chip Board Note appendix C 30 For the connecti
324. rformance conditions _CLEAR that have been set for the internal MPU PERFORMANCE _ANALYSIS_ 6 2 17 PAIS Sets internal MPU performance _SET conditions MPU SH7751 internal function RADIX RA Sets input radix REFRESH 6 2 18 RF Updates the memory information in HDI to reflect the latest state REGISTER_DISPLAY RD Displays MPU register values REGISTER_SET RS Sets MPU register values RESET RE Resets MPU SLEEP Delays command execution RENESAS 271 Table 6 1 List of Commands cont Command Section Abbreviation Description STATUS 6 2 19 STS Displays emulator state information STEP ST Executes in steps specified as instruction units or source line units STEP_OUT SP Executes until the function represented by the address at the program counter has finished STEP_OVER SO Steps over function STEP_RATE SR Sets and displays step execution rate SUBMIT SU Executes emulation command file SYMBOL _ADD SA Sets symbol SYMBOL _ CLEAR SC Deletes symbol SYMBOL _LOAD SL Loads symbol information file SYMBOL_SAVE SS Saves symbol information file SYMBOL _VIEW SV Displays symbol TRACE_DISPLAY 6 2 21 TD Displays the acquired trace information TRACE_MODE 6 2 22 TM Sets or acquires and displays the trace mode TRACE_SEARCH 6 2 23 TS Searches for trace information TRACEACQUISITION_CLEAR 6 2 20 TAC
325. s In addition to the E8000S station the options listed in table 1 6 are also available Refer to each option manual for details on these optional components Table 1 6 Optional Component Specifications Item Model Name Specifications Optional memory board HS8000EMS01H Single board 12 Mbytes For installation on the device control board PC interface board HS6000EII01H ISA bus PCI interface board HS6000EIC01H PCI bus HS6000EICO2H PC interface card HS6000EPI01H PCMCIA bus LAN adapter HS6000ELN01H e TCP IP communications protocol 10BASE T e 100BASE Tx RENESAS Section 2 Components 2 1 Emulator Hardware Components The E8000S emulator consists of an E8000S station an SH7751 device control board an optional memory board and an SH7751 evaluation chip board as shown in figure 2 1 By installing a PC interface board ISA bus PCI bus and PCMCIA bus connectors are available on your host computer the SH7751 E8000S Hitachi Debugging Interface HDI can be used for debugging A LAN adapter can be connected to the E8000S emulator as the network enabling debugging by the HDI For details on the PC interface board option ISA bus PCI bus or PCMCIA bus specifications and the LAN adapter refer to the description notes on each product Optional memory board HS8000EMS01H v4 Device control board HS7750EDD81H PC interface cable option 2 Network LAN adapter option
326. s and button execution related to step Interrupts during step Specifies memory area when accessing Normal memory Memory area Execution Timer resolution The minimum time to 20us Mode1 be measured by Go command execution Timeout Bus timeout 100us Permits or inhibits multi break Multi Inhibited do not select the check box break PRB1 Permits or inhibits the RESET signal to Permitted select the check box be input to the user system RESET signal Permits or inhibits BREQ signal control Permitted select the check box BREQ signal Permits or inhibits the RDY signal input Permitted select the check box RDY signal Permits or inhibits the NMI signal input Permitted select the check box NMI signal Permits or inhibits the SLEEP signal Permitted select the check box input SLEEP signal Execution Specifies the sequential condition Not used Mode2 Sequence Trigger output control 1 at break TRGB No trigger output select the upper Option radio button Whether to use the MPU s on chip user Break Condition U7 and U8 break controller UBC User break controller 74 RENESAS 4 4 Setting the Memory Map In the next step allocate the emulation memory e Select Configure Map from the Memory menu to display the current memory map The Memory Mapping dialog box is displayed From To Mapping Target Device configuration System memory resources INTERNAL 1 0 EQ000000 FFFFFFFF REMAINING EMULATION MEMORY S
327. s not used If a file is recompiled with a different setting addresses may differ from that described in the manual 69 RENESAS 4 The stack information file TUTORIAL SND is necessary for profile data measurement For details refer to section 5 8 3 Profile Data Measurement Function To use this function select the Load stack information file SNI file checkbox in the Load Program dialog box 4 2 Running the HDI e Torun the HDI select the SH7751 E8000S Emulator Software Hitachi Debugging Interface from the Start menu Accessories StartUp p BEMS DOS Prompt QY Windows Explorer Figure 4 1 Start Menu The HDI window as shown in figure 4 2 is displayed Here the Select Session dialog box is displayed Select the target device name of the installed HDI and click the OK button If the emulator mode is not correctly set the HDI will not operate normally In such a case modify the settings of the CPU Operating Mode in the CPU Operating Mode dialog box Table 4 2 lists the setting examples of the CPU Operating Mode when running the sample program 70 RENESAS Table 4 2 CPU Operation Mode Dialog Box Setting Example Page Option Setting Value MD Pin PCI MD10 9 PCI disabled Clock Status MD8 External input clock cannot be selected Master Slave MD7 Master cannot be selected CSO Memory Type MD6 NORMAL Endian MD5 Big CSO Bus Width MD4 3 32 Bit
328. s up The emulator system program performs diagnostic checks of the registers of the emulator When an error is thus detected in the emulator the emulator displays the following error message while the HDI is operating 1 Errors that may occur when registers that control emulation are being tested The emulator control registers are being checked If an error occurs one of the following messages is displayed Error Message INVALID DEVICE CONTROL BOARD Description Another device control board is connected Please check the MPU type and install the suitable emulator system program or exchange the device control board DEVICE CONTROL BOARD DISCONNECTION The device control board is disconnected EVACHIP BOARD DISCONNECTION The evaluation chip board is disconnected Check that the trace cable and power supply cable CN7 is correctly connected XXXXXXXX REGISTER ERROR W DATA xxxx R DATA xxxx An error occurred in the register XXXXXXXxX Name of the emulator internal register where an error occurs BOTRAR ECT BOCNR BOMDCNR BOMASCR B OCECR B1CNR B1MDCNR B1MASCR B1CEC R MAPRO MAPR1 MAPR2 MAPR3 SHARED RAM ERROR ADDR xxxxxx W DATA xxxxxxxx R DATA XXXXXXXX An error occurred in the shared RAM BxTBM ERROR ADDR xxxxxx W DATA xxxxxxxx R DATA XXXXXXXX An error occurred in the trace buffer memory FIRM RAM ERROR ADDR xxxxxx W DATA Xxxxxxxx R DATA XXXX
329. s user s manual and emulator product are copyrighted and all rights are reserved by Hitachi No part of this user s manual all or part may be reproduced or duplicated in any form in hard copy or machine readable form by any means available without Hitachi s prior written consent Other Important Things to Keep in Mind 1 Circuitry and other examples described herein are meant merely to indicate the characteristics and performance of Hitachi s semiconductor products Hitachi assumes no responsibility for any intellectual property claims or other problems that may result from applications based on the examples described herein 2 No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patents or other rights of any third party or Hitachi Figures Some figures in this user s manual may show items different from your actual system Limited Anticipation of Danger Hitachi cannot anticipate every possible circumstance that might involve a potential hazard The warnings in this user s manual and on the emulator product are therefore not all inclusive Therefore you must use the emulator product safely at your own risk HII RENESAS SAFETY PAGE READ FIRST e READ this user s manual before using this emulator product e KEEP the user s manual handy for future reference Do not attempt to use the emulator product until you fully understand its mechanism DEFINITION OF SIGNAL WORDS A This is the safety alert symbol It is u
330. seaeenes 141 Specifiable Hardware Break Conditions 000 0 ec eceecceeceeecesecesecsseceeceetaeeeeeeees 143 Condition A B C Page Options 20 eee eee cseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeaee 144 Break Condition Al to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 Dialog Box Pages 144 Address Page Options cic ccicssectescienssaesenstercsenseistssaseseessnsvonssvnsesestansceesoeesbeosiense 145 Data Page Options ce c cscecccseiess couieeeccansessecbedbese EEE EEEE 146 Bus State Page Options srir iesire terere sercs risiet E e S 147 Probe Page Options rrisensorrsienii tiren epeei en ee i 148 Interrupt Page Options c scsetsetseinsssssesctsosarsetscerecnsvosousnsnsosssedscoanseissapasedsess 149 Count Page Opti ONS kni aor eeaeee eE Era ee E EE a 150 Delay Page Options issiria eiroet 151 Pages of the Condition Dialog BOX esssssesssseesseressssrsrrerrsreerrsrrerssrerrerrsrreresreee 152 History Page Optom s cpscessseiseisessscesessosessesseapeceepobentvensssnsedscdenseissaensesgesy 153 Entry List Page Optrons c s cuss esivessecieveebe shessdbesuaveensebevenbecbestevesoensebocoentons 154 Condition A B Page Options When a Sequential Break Has Been Specified 157 History Page Options 2 0 cscccecesscsstecsccetessessenvebecesvestesasvelbessttesaseesvebesaney 159 Entry List Page Options ssi iscsscsiccteasitgsessacte auhseiseosasesensuessaeasonscsecbunssisaoeesbeobieete 160 Internal Break Conditions 000
331. sed to alert you to potential personal injury hazards Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death A DANGER DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury A WARNING WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury A CAUTION CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury CAUTION CAUTION used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in property damage NOTE emphasizes essential information lt RENESAS A WARNING Observe the precautions listed below Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator product or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST 1 Carefully handle the emulator product to prevent receiving an electric shock because the emulator product has a DC power supply Do not repair or remodel the emulator product by yourself for electric shock prevention and quality assurance Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES or PARTS Always before connecting make sure that pin 1 on both sides are correctly aligned Supply power according to the power specifications and do not ap
332. ss Timeout value Timeout values can be displayed in time measurement modes 1 and 2 when the timeout condition is specified g Counter value Counter values can be displayed in time measurement modes and 2 when count condition is specified h Start address range Time measurement mode 3 i End address range Time measurement mode 3 j Total execution time To display an program execution time and execution count numerically gt PA COUNT NO NAME MODE RATE RUN TIME E COUNT 1 SUBA Il D 10 0 D 0000H 00M 10S 010305US 500NS D 00005 a b c d e f MAX D 0000H 00M 05S 001000US 250NS MIN D 0000H 00M 05S 001000US 250NS g h AVE D 0000H 00M 05S 001000US 250NS i RENESAS 2 SUBB 12 D 20 0 D 0000H 00M 10S 010305US 500NS D 00010 AVE D 0000H 00M 05S 001000US 250NS 3 SUBC 13 D 30 0 D 0000H 00M 10S 010305US 500NS D 00010 AVE D 0000H 00M 05S 001000US 250NS TOTAL RUN TIME D 0000H 00M 08S 029397US 600NS q a Subroutine number b Subroutine name up to 32 characters can be used c Time measurement mode I1 Time measurement mode 1 I2 Time measurement mode 2 I3 Time measurement mode 3 d Displays the execution time ratio numerically e Execution time f Execution count g Maximum subroutine execution time Time measurement mode 2 h Minimum subroutine execution time Time measurement mode 2 i Average subroutine execution time Time measurement mode 2 j Total execution time Examples
333. ssscecsesececsecceceesnececssaaececseceecessaeeecsesaeeecseseesessaeeecseaeeesseneeees 268 6 2 1 Hardware Break Command BCS BCC BCD BCE ssesssssssrssssesseseserressssssee 273 6 2 2 Internal Break Commands BCUS BCUC BCUD BCUE ees 279 6 2 3 Hardware Sequential Break Specification Command CSQ eeceeseeeeteeeneeees 284 6 2 4 Software Break Command BP BC BD BE cc cece ccecsseceeseeceeeesteeeenseeeens 286 6 2 5 Software Sequential Break Command BSS BSC BSD BSE ee 290 6 2 6 CHECK CHECK 0 ccc ccccccccsssececssececeesnececsesaeeecseeeeessaeeecsessececsueeeeessneeeeneaaes 293 62 7 CLOCK CK nienean e a i a E Species 294 6 2 8 DEVICE_TYPE DE 0 ccccccccssccecsssceceesnececsssaecesseeeeenssaeeecseeaeeeseeeeseeaeeeesenaees 296 6029 END END aeron E EE E E N ne 297 6 2 10 EXECUTION_MODE EM 0 cccccccccsccessscceceesececsseceeessaececsesaececseeeeenssneeesnenaes 298 6 2 11 GO OPTION GP Jerca aeiaai Ea ee Ss eee end 301 62 12 ID ID zeroren a aa Ene A EEE E EE AERE 303 6 2 13 INTERRUPT IR ereenn EEA EE A EEES 304 6 2 14 MAP_SET MS cccccccesssscccesssececeeececeeseeecseaaeeecseeeeessaeeecsesaececseeeesesseeeeesenaes 306 6 2 15 MEMORYAREA SET MAS ccccssessessssseceessrsecssceeeesesneeesssnsesssceseesssnsess 308 6 2 16 Performance Command PS PC PA ccccccecsscesssceceesseeecsseaeeeesneeeenssaeeeseeneees 310 6 2 17 MPU Built in Performance Command
334. t To display the settings for Trace Condition A TAD A 328 RENESAS 9 gt TAD A Trace Condition Al Disable Trace Condition A2 Enabl type range address H 10027c to H 100304 direction write Trace Condition A3 Disable Trace Condition A4 Disable Trace Condition A5 Enable type stop data H 11111111 prb 0101 Trace Condition A6 Disable Trace Condition A7 Disable Trace Condition A8 Disable To cancel conditions set as Trace Condition B on channel 2 TAC B CHANNEL 2 10 To cancel all settings for Trace Condition A TAC A 11 To set Trace Condition B as a sequential point at an address bus value of H 100000 when a sequential trace stop condition has already been set TAS B CHANNEL P ADDRESS H 100000 12 To set Trace Condition B as a reset point at an address bus value of H 300000 when a sequential trace stop condition has already been set TAS B CHANNEL R ADDRESS H 300000 13 To display the settings for Trace Condition B when a sequential trace stop condition has been set TAD B gt TAD B Trace Condition B Sequential Enable 1 address H 100000 2 address H 200000 R address H 300000 14 To cancel the settings for Trace Condition B when a sequential trace stop condition has been set TAC B Notes Execution may stop several instructions after the condition is satisfied Address conditions must be set in an external area If it is set in the internal I O area a brea
335. t Sets the bus timeout detection period 100 us in units of approximately 100 us Initial value 1 6 ms in units of approximately 1 6 ms 13 ms in units of approximately 13 ms 210 ms in units of approximately 210 ms Multi break PRB1 Selects whether or not the multibreak function uses external probe 1 to break execution by multiple emulators one after another is enabled during execution Initial value Disabled RESET signal Selects whether or not the input of the RESET signals is enabled Initial value Enabled BREQ signal Selects whether or not the input of the BREQ signals is enabled Initial value Enabled RDY signal Selects whether or not the input of the RDY signals is enabled Initial value Enabled NMI signal input Selects whether or not the input of the NMI signals is enabled Initial value Enabled SLEEP signal Selects whether or not the input of the SLEEP signals is enabled Initial value Enabled 107 RENESAS Execution Mode2 Page Use this page to set the conditions for outputting a trigger when a break occurs to set sequential conditions Condition A and Condition B trace break or unused and to select whether the E8000S uses the user break controller UBC of the MPU Break Condition U7 8 v Figure 5 4 Configuration Dialog Box Execution Mode2 Page 108 RENESAS Table 5 6 Execution Mode2 Page Page Sequence Description Sets a
336. t Target Device configuration System memory resources INTERNAL 1 0 E0000000 FFFFFFFF Map type me Memory x Edt Add _ Beset Resetan Help Figure 5 89 Memory Mapping Dialog Box 249 RENESAS Table 5 102 Configuration Items of the Memory Mapping Dialog Box Option Description From To Mapping Displays memory address ranges and memory type settings Target Device configuration Displays the memory mapping of the internal module INTERNAL I O System memory resources Displays the total and remaining capacities of the emulation memory Map type Selects the map type cannot be specified Edit Allows modification of the memory allocation information selected by From To Mapping by displaying the Edit Memory Mapping dialog box Add Allows the allocation of new memory by displaying the Add Memory Mapping dialog box Reset Clears the memory allocation information selected under From To Mapping Reset All Clears all memory allocation information under From To Mapping Click the Close button to close the dialog box Click Add button to open the Add Memory Mapping dialog box to allocate emulation memory To modify the allocation of emulation memory select the memory contents for modification from From To Mapping then click the Edit button The Edit Memory Mapping dialog box will be displayed Edit Memory Mapping x Memory Mapping H 0
337. t gt 2 to 4 lt addropt gt lt asidopt gt lt r wopt gt or lt accessopt gt 5 lt ioopt gt 6 lt ldtlbopt gt 7 lt addropt gt lt dataopt gt lt asidopt gt lt r wopt gt lt accessopt gt 8 lt addropt gt lt asidopt gt lt r wopt gt lt accessopt gt lt mode gt Keyword Enables or disables internal break enable Enabled disable Disabled 279 RENESAS Description of the bcus command lt option gt Specify one or more conditions Parameter Description lt addropt gt Specifies an address condition To specify an address as a break condition address lt address gt lt addrmask gt To specify the address to be prefetched and generate a break before the corresponding instruction is executed address lt address gt pe lt addrmask gt To specify the address to be prefetched and generate a break after the corresponding instruction is executed address lt address gt pcafter lt addrmask gt lt address gt Address numeric lt addrmask gt Specifies the number of bits to be masked Select one from the following m1 Lower 10 bits m2 Lower 12 bits m3 Lower 16 bits m4 Lower 20 bits When lt addrmasks is not specified no bits are masked dataopt Specifies a data condition To break on a specified 8 bit value data lt data gt byte To break on a specified 16 bit value data lt data gt word To break on a specified 32 bit value data lt data gt long To break on a specified 64 bit
338. t have already been used Exit Windows 4 0 Define the memory area for the PC interface board Select one of the memory areas that correspond to the following PC interface board switch settings and no other devices can access the selected memory area RENESAS If the Intel P amp P BIOS disk is supplied with the host computer define the memory area as follows e Start the host computer with the Intel P amp P BIOS disk e Check the upper memory areas that have already been used with View System Resources e Add Unlisted Card with Configure Add Card Other e Click No in the dialog box displayed because there is no CFG file e Move to the Memory hex list box in the Configure Unlisted Card dialog box e Click the Add Memory button to display the Specify Memory dialog box e Enter a memory area range that is not used by any other device and that corresponds to one of the PC interface board switch settings e Save the file e Exit the current setup program e Shut down Windows 4 0 and turn off the host computer power switch e Restart the host computer 49 RENESAS 3 5 Installing the System Program A description of the installation of the system program is given below The E8000S system program must be transferred to flash memory in the emulator station The emulator cannot be used without the E8000S system program The system programs are stored in SYSTEM under the HDI installation directory T
339. t the frame ground only do not connect the signal ground to the frame ground If it is difficult to separate the frame ground from the signal ground in the user system ground the frame to the same outlet as the 100 V 200 V power supply of the emulator station so that the ground potentials become even If it is difficult to separate the signal ground from the frame ground insert the user system power cable and the emulator s power cable into the same outlet figure 3 9 so that the ground lines of the cables are maintained at the same ground potential Signal line E8000S station Evaluation chip board User system Signal groun Frame ground Ground Figure 3 8 Connecting the System Ground 34 7tENESAS A WARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST The user system must be connected to an appropriate ground so as to minimize noise and the adverse effects of ground loops When connecting the evaluation chip board and the user system confirm that the ground pins of the evaluation chip board are firmly connected to the user system s ground Emulator power User system power supply cable supply cable 100 V to 240 V AC power Figure 3 9 Connecting the Frame Ground 35 RENESAS 3 3 6 System
340. tal oscillator terminals Figure 3 7 Installing the Crystal Oscillator External Clock Use the following procedure to select the external clock 1 Check that the emulator power switch is turned off Ensure that the power lamp on the left side of the E8000S station s front panel is not lit 2 Connect the evaluation chip board to the user system and supply a clock through the EXTAL pin from the user system 3 Turn on the user system power and then the emulator power U the external clock will then be automatically specified by a CLOCK command Emulator Internal Clock Specify 13 13 9 MHz 27 27 8 MHz or 55 55 6 MHz with the CLOCK command Reference When the emulator system program is initiated the emulator automatically selects the MPU clock source according to the following priority 1 External clock when supplied from the user system 2 Crystal oscillator when attached to the evaluation chip board 3 Emulator internal clock 33 RENESAS 3 3 5 Connecting the System Ground CAUTION Separate the frame ground from the signal ground at the user system When the frame ground is connected to the signal ground and the emulator is then connected to the user system the emulator may malfunction The emulator s signal ground is connected to the user system s signal ground via the evaluation chip board In the E8000S station the signal ground and frame ground are connected figure 3 8 At the user system connec
341. ternal interrupt Satisfied when the NMI and IRL signal levels match the specified conditions External probe Satisfied when the external probe PRB signal levels match the specified conditions 185 7tENESAS Trace Conditions A B and C Eight channels for each condition 24 channels in total Range trace conditions that can be specified for Trace Conditions A B and C are shown in table 5 62 Table 5 62 Specifiable Range Trace Conditions Range Trace Trace Condition A Trace Condition B Trace Condition C Condition 1 to 8 1 to 8 1 to 8 Address bus O O O Data bus O O X Read Write O O X External interrupt O O X External probe O O X Note O Can be specified X Cannot be specified 186 RENESAS 2 Setting Range Trace Conditions Trace Condition A1 is taken as an example of setting a range trace condition Place the cursor in the Trace window then click the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu Select Acquisition from the menu and the Trace Acquisition dialog box will appear Select the Condition A page Click condition 1 to select it from the Condition list box Click the Edit button to open the Trace Condition A1 dialog box Select Range range trace mode on the General page The Trace Condition Al to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 dialog box has the tabbed pages listed in table 5 63 However Trace Condition C1 to C8 dialog box has only the General and Address
342. terrupt count INT The number of times normal interrupts i e other than the NMI were encountered 18 NMI The number of times the NMI occurred 19 Cache fill cycles ECF Cycles of instruction cache fill operations 20 count OCF Cycles of operand cache fill operations 21 Elapsed time TM Elapsed time in clock cycles Notes 1 When two instructions are being executed at the same time this is counted in item 13 as the execution of a single instruction Therefore the sum of the numbers produced by 13 and 14 will produce the actual total count 2 Counting of items 13 and 14 may be incremented by from 1 to 3 when an instruction fetch exception instruction address error instruction TLB miss exception instruction TLB protection illegal exception occurs 3 Counting of item 19 is incremented by 2 when two FPU instructions are executed at the same time An FPU instruction is defined as follows an instruction with an instruction code of H Fxxx including the undefined instruction H FFFD LDS Rm FPUL LDS L Rm FPUL LDS Rm FPSCR LDS L Rm FPSCR STS FPUL Rn STS L FPUL Rn STS FPSCR Rn and STS L FPSCR Rn Some items will also be incremented when the conditions listed in table 5 92 are satisfied 233 2tENESAS Table 5 92 Further Conditions for Incrementing Items Item Remarks Operand and instruction access Includes cases where access to operands instructions was counts cancelled because of an exception Instruction ex
343. th the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense VIII RENESAS Preface Thank you for purchasing the emulator for the Hitachi microcomputer SH7751 CAUTION Read section 3 Preparation before Use before using the emulator product Incorrect operation or connection will damage the user system the emulator product and the user program The SH7751 E8000S emulator hereinafter referred to as the emulator is an efficient software and hardware development tool for systems based on Hitachi microcomputer SH7751 By exchanging the device control board and the evaluation chip board this emulator can also be used for systems using other microcomputers The emulator is operated by using the Hitachi Debugging Interface hereafter referred to as HDI This interface program is supported by Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me WindowsNT 4 0 and Windows 2000 This manual describes the emulator functions and operations Please read this manual carefully before use in particular section 1 1 Notes on Usage A CD R for the E8000S emulator is packaged with the evaluation chip board For details refer to section 3 Preparation before Use Related Manuals Description Notes on Using the PC Interface Board HS6000EII01H
344. the Auto update Memory Add dialog box E AUH ON H 00003FD0 32bytes Word bess Data OOO003FDO 0000 20DA 0000 0000 0000 53DC 0000 2704 OOOO03FEO 0000 5665 0000 ODAA 0000 421F 0000 3EAD Figure 5 94 AUM Window 258 RENESAS The AUM window displays the selected ranges of memory and this display is refreshed while the user program is being executed Up to 8 windows 8 points can be displayed in the AUM window 5 14 2 Setting Auto update Memory Points to be set and byte size to acquire Up to 8 points can be set Up to 32 bytes can be acquired from each point Acquisition mode Auto update memory has two acquisition modes e Realtime parallel monitoring mode In this mode the contents of memory are directly acquired and displayed by using the dedicated hardware of the E8000S without halting the user program Therefore it does not affect the emulation Specify this mode by selecting Realtime parallel monitor in the AUM Target Details dialog box Memory access bus widths can be selected from 8 16 or 32 bits e Nonrealtime mode This mode temporarily halts the execution of the user program for the display of the memory contents while it is acquiring memory Since execution of the user program is halted emulation cannot take place in realtime Specify this mode by selecting Non Realtime Memory read in the AUM Target Details dialog box Memory access bus widths can be selected from 8 16 or 32 bi
345. the condition is only satisfied after an instruction fetch from the address specified in Address Address Sets an address bus value as a number or a symbol Mask Masked bits satisfy the break conditions regardless of their values To disable the mask setting select Non User Mask Lower 10bit Masks the lower 10 bits of the input address Lower 12bit Masks the lower 12 bits of the input address Lower 16bit Masks the lower 16 bits of the input address Lower 20bit Masks the lower 20 bits of the input address The pages displayed in the Break Condition U dialog box change according to the address setting When Address is selected setting of conditions in four pages Address Data ASID and Bus State is allowed When Only program fetched address or Only program fetched address after is selected setting of conditions is only allowed on two pages Address and ASID Only these two pages are displayed 166 RENESAS b Data Page Use this page to specify the data bus conditions Address Data ASID Bus State m Data T Don t Care Walue H0 Byte C wod Long C Quad C Nonusermask User mask Figure 5 38 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box Data Page Table 5 48 Data Page Options Option Description Don t Care Selects no data condition Value Sets a data bus value as a number Byte Sets byte data access cycles
346. the number of times conditions are satisfied in terms of the frequency ratio of the MPU and external bus clocks the number of cycles must be measured as clock cycles When the execution of an instruction has been cancelled due to the generation of an exception there are cases where the event is still counted 235 2tENESAS 5 8 3 Profile Data Measurement Function The profile data measurement function acquires the execution time of each function in terms of the ratio between the MPU operating clock and the bus clock This function uses the MPU s on chip counter to measure performance Program execution starts and stops every time a function is called during measurement and therefore the measured results include errors The HDI provides three windows shown in table 5 93 For details of each window refer to Hitachi Debugging Interface User s Manual in the CD R Table 5 93 Windows for Profile Data Measurement Window Description Profile List Displays the address and size of each function the number of times each function is called and the profile data This window is opened by selecting Profile List from the View menu Profile Tree Displays the address size and stack size of each function the number of times each function is called and the profile data The stack size number of function calls and profile data are values when the function is called This window is opened by selecting Profile Tree from the View menu
347. the user sets break or trace condition to Break Condition C or Trace Condition C no condition can be set to PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS that has the same number In other words when the user sets break or trace condition to Break Condition C1 or Trace Condition C1 no condition can be set to PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS1 To set a condition to PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS the user must cancel the settings of Break Condition C or Trace Condition C The emulator increments the pass count when it passes through a subroutine end address Therefore the emulator will display the subroutine execution time and number of times the subroutine was executed for one more than the specified pass count The emulator cannot measure the step execution time 316 RENESAS 6 2 17 MPU Built in Performance Command PAIS PAIC PAT e Setting PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS_I_SET PAIS e Cancellation PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS_I_CLEAR PAIC e Display PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS_I PAD Command syntax and parameters e Setting pais channel lt channel_number gt lt modeopt gt lt clockopt gt lt rangeopt gt e Cancellation paic channel lt channel_number gt e Display pai channel lt channel_number gt mode lt displaymode gt Parameter Type Description lt channel_number gt Numeric Specifies the channel number of a performance analysis condition The user must specify 1 or 2 for the channel number lt displaymode gt Keyword Specifies the display mode for performance analysis
348. then click the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu Select Acquisition from the menu and the Trace Acquisition dialog box will appear Select the Condition A page Trace Mode AUD Intemal Mode Condition A Condition B Condition C Condition 1 type stop address H 0 2 type range direction read Set Condition Figure 5 48 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Condition A Page 179 RENESAS Table 5 58 Condition A B C Page Options Option Description Condition Displays the current settings for Trace Condition A B or C Empty is displayed if there are no settings 1 to 8 Settings for Trace Condition X1 to X8 X A B or C Edit Modifies the Trace Condition A B or C settings selected in the Condition list box Clicking this button opens the Trace Condition Xn dialog box X A B or C n channel number Set Condition Modifies the Trace Condition A or B settings selected in the Condition list box Clicking this button opens the Condition dialog box This option is not displayed on the Condition C page Reset Clears the Trace Condition A B or C settings selected in the Condition list box Reset All Clears all Trace Condition A B or C settings in the Condition list box Click condition 7 to select it from the Condition list box Click the Edit button to open the Trace Condition A7 dialog box General Address Data Bus State Probe Interr
349. tial value Disabled Memory area Selects whether or not physical addresses or virtual addresses are used when memory is accessed Normal When the VP_MAP table is enabled and the address is within the table s range the address is translated according to the VP_MAP table In all other cases address translation is according to the MMU s state Initial value Physical Specifies physical addresses Virtual Specifies virtual addresses ASID Sets an ASID value when virtual addresses are set enabled when the Virtual radio button is selected Drivers Opens the Driver Details dialog box 105 RENESAS Execution Mode1 Page Use this page to set the unit of time for counting by the execution time measurement counter timeout detection period for emulation commands multibreak mode and whether or not the input of the RESET BREQ RDY NMI and SLEEP signals is enabled Figure 5 3 Configuration Dialog Box Execution Mode1 Page 106 RENESAS Table 5 5 Execution Mode1 Page Page The minimum time to be measured by Go command execution Description Sets the minimum time resolution of the counter for measuring execution time and performance of the emulator station 20 ns Measures time in minimum time of 20 ns 1 6 us Measures time in minimum time of 1 627604167 us 614 4 kHz 52 us Measures time in minimum time of 52 0833333 us 19 2 kHz Initial value Bus timeou
350. tion When the user specifies physical the emulator sets breakpoints to physical addresses When the user executes the GO command the emulator first disables the MMU in the MPU and then sets software breakpoints and returns the MMU to the original state When the user specifies virtual the emulator sets software breakpoints to virtual addresses The emulator first disables the MMU in the MPU when the user executes the GO command after the emulator sets software breakpoints the emulator restores the MMU to the original 288 RENESAS state When the user specifies an ASID value the emulator sets breakpoints to the virtual addresses in the virtual space When doing this the emulator modifies the ASID value to the specified value and sets the breakpoints Then the emulator restores the ASID to its original value When the user does not specify an ASID value the emulator sets breakpoints to virtual addresses according to the ASID value that was set by the user at command input When the user specifies neither physical nor virtual and the emulator can use VP_MAP the emulator translates addresses using the VP_MAP If the emulator cannot use the VP_MAP the emulator sets breakpoints to physical or virtual addresses according to the MMU state at command input When the emulator sets breakpoints to virtual addresses the user must set an ASID value of the PTEH register in the MPU at command input When the user sets breakpoints to the cache area t
351. tion Dialog Box General Page eee eeeeeeseeceseceeeeeceeeeeeeeeceaeeeeneeeses 104 Configuration Dialog Box Execution Model Page cee ceeeceeseeeeeneeceteeeeneeeees 106 Configuration Dialog Box Execution Mode2 Page ccc eesceeseeeeeneeceteceeneeeees 108 Configuration Dialog Box Loading flash memory Page eeceesceeeseeeneeees 110 Configuration Dialog Box CPU Operating Mode Page 113 ix RENESAS Figure 5 7 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box MD Pin Page cee eeeeeeeeeeseceereeeneeeeeees 115 Figure 5 8 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box Memory Type Page 0 0 0 eee eee 117 Figure 5 9 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box H UDI JTAG Clock Page ee 120 Figure 5 10 Timing for Trigger Signal Output cece cee ceeecneeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceseesaeenaes 123 Figure 5 11 Breakpoints Window 0 ee eecescesecesecesecssecacecaeecaeeeaeseaeeeeeeeeeeeeseseaeesseesaeenaes 128 Figure 5 12 Example of a Software Break Instruction eee eceeceeeceeecesecesecesecaecneeeneeenes 130 Figure 5 13 Point Page Break Dialog BOX eceeeeceesecsseceeececnseceeeeecaecesneecaeceeeeecnaeeneees 131 Figure 5 14 Break Point Dialog Box Address Page 0 cs ceeeeessecesecesseceeeeecnseceeeeecnaeeenees 132 Figure 5 15 Example of a Software Sequential Break 0 0 eee eee cee ceeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeseenseesaeenaes 135 Figure 5 16 Example of a Software Sequential Break Reset Point Specif
352. tion C Condition U Condition Edit Reset Reset All Bancel Enpi Help Figure 5 36 Break Dialog Box Condition U Page Table 5 45 Condition U Page Options Option Description Condition Displays the current settings for Break Condition U Empty is displayed if there are no settings 1 to 6 Settings for channels U1 to U6 7 and 8 are displayed when the user break controller is used for Break Condition U Edit Modifies the Break Condition U setting selected in the Condition list box Clicking this button opens the Break Condition Un dialog box n channel number Reset Clears the Break Condition U settings selected in the Condition list box Reset All Clears all Break Condition U settings in the Condition list box Click the list entry to select condition 1 in the Condition list box Click the Edit button to open the Break Condition U1 dialog box The Break Condition U1 U8 dialog boxes have the pages shown in table 5 46 164 RENESAS Table 5 46 Break Condition U1 U8 Dialog Box Pages Channel Page Description Break Condition Address Sets address bus or PC conditions U1 U7 Data Sets data bus conditions Bus State Sets read write cycle and access type conditions ASID Sets ASID conditions Break Condition U2 Address Sets address bus or PC conditions to U4 U8 Bus State Sets read write cycle and access type condi
353. tions ASID Sets ASID conditions Break Condition U5 IO Sets internal I O area access break Break Condition U6 LDTLB Sets LDTLB instruction execution break Specify the required conditions on the corresponding pages then click the OK button The Break condition U1 dialog box closes and the display returns to the Condition U page The Condition list box will now display the specified internal break conditions as condition 1 Click the OK button to close the Break dialog box Internal break conditions are specified for the other channels in the same way The following sections describe each page a Address Page Use this page to specify the address bus conditions Address Data ASID Bus State m Address I Don t Care Address Only program fetched address Only program fetched address after Address H A00000B8 Mask Non user mask bi Figure 5 37 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box Address Page 165 RENESAS Table 5 47 Address Page Options Option Description Don t Care Selects no address condition Address Select this button to set the address bus value specified in Address as the condition Only program Select this button so that the condition is satisfied as soon as the value fetched address specified in Address is on the address but before the instruction is fetched from the address Only program fetched address after Select this button so that
354. tions refer to section 5 5 3 Hardware Break The Time page which is displayed when Bus trace or Bus AUD trace is selected and the AUD Internal page which is displayed when AUD trace Bus AUD trace or Internal trace is selected are described in the following passages 208 RENESAS a Time Page Use the Time page to specify time stamp conditions for use in the search for external bus trace information General Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Time Time Stamp I Don t Care Point Range Erom fo fo fo fio H M 5 us ff fo jf Bo H M 5 us Figure 5 65 Trace Filter Dialog Box Time Page Table 5 77 Time Page Options Option Description Don t Care No time stamp condition is set Point Sets the trace search condition to values above the value set as From Range Sets the range set by From to To as a trace search condition From Sets the time stamp value from which the valid range starts as a numerical value decimal When any number is omitted 0 is assumed H hour 0 to 999 M minute 0 to 59 S second 0 to 59 US microsecond 0 to 999999 To When Range is selected sets the time stamp value of the end of the range of valid values as a numerical value decimal When any number is omitted 0 is assumed H hour 0 to 999 M minute 0 to 59 S second 0 to 59 US microsecond 0 to 999999 209 RENESAS
355. to acquire the external bus trace External bus information can be acquired on each bus cycle The settings for external bus tracing can be made in Trace Cycle on the Trace Mode page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box which will be displayed by clicking the Acquisition in the pop up menu of the Trace window Trace Conditions A B and C are available Specify a trace acquisition condition on the Condition A B C page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box which will be displayed by clicking the Acquisition in the pop up menu of the Trace window The trace acquisition modes for external trace are shown in table 5 55 175 RENESAS Table 5 55 Trace Acquisition Modes Acquisition Mode Description Free trace Trace acquisition is continuous from the start of user program execution until any of the trace conditions is satisfied Trace stop Trace acquisition stops when a specified condition is satisfied In this mode realtime emulation will not stop but trace acquisition is stopped and emulation enters the trace halt mode Sequential trace stop An order in which trace conditions must be satisfied can be specified When all of the conditions are satisfied in the specified order trace acquisition will stop Trace stop due to an Trace acquisition stops when the trace buffer in the emulator overflow of trace buffer overflows Range trace Trace information is only acquired during execution that satisfies the s
356. ts The mode and bus width of memory access can be selected through the AUM Target Details dialog box After selection click the OK button AUH Target Details xi C Non Realtime Memory read Bus Width 32 Bit Cancel D P_MAP C Normal Physical Space C Virtual Space Figure 5 95 AUM Target Details Dialog Box 259 RENESAS 5 14 3 Displaying the Memory Display format The auto update memory function allows the display of memory contents in ASCII bit byte word longword or single precision floating point units with or without signs in decimal or hexadecimal Click the right mouse button with the cursor in the AUM window The pop up menu will be displayed Select Edit from the pop up menu to open the Auto update Memory Edit dialog box Select Format in the dialog box to change the display format The display format can also be changed by selecting Format from the pop up menu in the AUM window Display color When Realtime parallel monitor is specified a color is applied to indicate the contents that have been modified since the last update of the display Select Type from the Color group box in the Auto update Memory Edit dialog box When Change is selected as Type modified data will be displayed in color If Gray is selected the modified data will be displayed in the color with the unchanged data displayed in gray It is also possible to specify the foreground
357. ts a value or a mask for data bus bits D31 to DO When a mask is set ona bit that bit always satisfies the condition regardless of its value Outside Range Sets the condition as any value other than those selected by Data The valid bus location and valid address bus differs from the memory area data bus width and endian in data bus conditions For details on valid bus location address bus in data bus conditions refer to the hardware manual 146 RENESAS c Bus State Page Use this page to specify a read write cycle condition Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Count Delay r Read write Read write C Read C wite Figure 5 24 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Bus State Page Table 5 32 Bus State Page Options Option Description Read Write Sets either read or write cycles as the break condition Read Sets read cycles as the break condition Write Sets write cycles as the break condition 147 RENESAS d Probe Page Use this page to specify external probe signal PRB 1 PRB4 conditions Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Count Delay p Probe 3 High High C Low f lt a Don t Care C High Low Low Don t Care Don t Care Probe 1 T Probe 2 eer High C Low Don t Care Figure 5 25 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Probe Page Table 5 33 Probe Page Options Opt
358. tween the HDI and the emulator during HDI start up Exit from the HDI turn on the power supply of the emulator and restart the HDI If this does not solve the problem contact Hitachi s sales department or the agent through whom you purchased the HDI Emulator firmware not ready A message EMULATOR FIRMWARE NOT READY was received from the emulator Exit from the HDI and check that the emulator is operating correctly Emulator timeout A timeout message was detected from the emulator Exit from the HDI and check that the emulator is operating correctly Failed to find matching trace record The searching for the trace information failed because no information is currently displayed in the Trace window This error message is also output when there is no trace information Hardware register read write check error When the HDI was started up an error was detected during checking of the hardware registers of the emulator Exit from the HDI and check that the emulator is operating correctly 343 RENESAS Table 7 2 HDI Error Messages cont Error Message Invalid version number in target configuration Description and Solution The HDI version when the session file was created and the current HDI version differ Do not use a session file for an earlier version System ID error An emulator different from that selected in the Select Platform dialog box is currently connected Check whether the correct E
359. type 6 or aud_type 7 Specification aud_window_a lt start gt to lt end gt access lt access gt lt start gt Start address numerical lt end gt End address numerical lt access gt Read write cycle condition r Read cycle w Write cycle rw Read write cycle RENESAS Parameter Description lt aud_window_b gt Specifies window trace on channel B can be specified when lt aud_type gt is aud_type 2 aud_type 3 aud_type 6 or aud_type 7 Specification aud_window_b lt start gt to lt end gt access lt access gt lt start gt Start address numerical lt end gt End address numerical lt access gt Read write cycle condition r Read cycle w Write cycle rw Read write cycle lt internal_mode gt Specifies the acquisition mode when the MPU internal trace function is used Internal_mode realtime Acquires trace information in realtime mode Internal_mode break Acquires trace information in eight branch instructions and stops Internal_mode continuous Acquires trace information in continuous trace mode When omitted does not acquire MPU internal trace information lt internal_type gt Specifies the acquisition conditions for MPU internal trace modes internal_type 1 Acquires trace information on normal branch instructions internal_type 2 Acquires trace information on subroutine calls internal_type 3 Acquires trace information on normal branch instructions and subroutine calls i
360. uation chip interface connectors in place are also color coded as shown below to reduce the risk of their being inserted into the CNS Blue RENESAS 365 A WARNING Before connecting the trace cables to the evaluation chip board s interface connectors make sure that the numbers match and that they are correctly aligned If cables and connectors with different numbers are connected the result will be a FIRE HAZARD Connecting the cables for tracing trace cables to the emulator Connect the trace cables to the emulator before connecting it to the HS7751EBH81H board Connecting trace cables to the evaluation chip board Connect the cables to the evaluation chip board s connectors Make sure that the interface connector names CN1 CN2 and CN3 on the trace cables emulator and evaluation chip board all match The trace cables and evaluation chip board s interface connectors are color coded red for CN1 yellow for CN2 and blue for CN3 to prevent incorrect connection Connecting the power supply cable to the evaluation chip board Connect power supply cable CN7 of the device control board to connector CN7 on the evaluation chip board The CN7 connector has a special shape to prevent incorrect connection Align the cable to the connector correctly Connect the trace cables to the connectors correctly by holding the HS7751EBH81H board by hand so that the connector is flush with the board and then screw the ca
361. umber When this is omitted the setting is 0 M minutes in the range from 0 to 59 S seconds in the range from 0 to 59 US microseconds in the range from 0 to 999999 Note The maximum measurement time is approximately 14 minutes If the value set is greater than 14 minutes it will be ignored When a time out occurs while the display of the Performance Analysis window is being updated the message RUN TIME OVERFLOW will be displayed 225 RENESAS e Count page Set the value for the maximum number of passes This dialog box is only displayed to allow setting of the conditions for Performance Analysis 1 General Address Time Out Count r Count I Don t Care Figure 5 78 Performance 1 Dialog Box Count Page Table 5 86 Options on the Count Page Option Description Don t Care Selects no maximum number of passes Input area Sets a maximum number of passes as a number A break occurs when the conditions set in the Performance1 dialog box are satisfied the specified number of times The default value is D 1 Any value from D 1 to D 65 535 can be set here Note This condition is detected as an overflow The test takes place when the user program passes through the end address Therefore the execution time and execution count displayed after break due to this setting will represent the number of specified passes plus one When a time out occurs while the display of the Performance Analysis win
362. untopt gt Specifies the pass count until trace acquisition condition is satisfied Valid when lt tracetype gt is stop and lt type gt is a or b To specify a pass count count lt value gt Any value from H 1 to H FFFF can be specified as lt value gt lt delayopt gt 326 Specifies the number of bus cycles to be executed after the trace acquisition condition is satisfied Valid when lt tracetype gt is stop lt type gt is a or b and lt channel_numbers is 7 To specify the number of bus cycles to be executed delay lt value gt Any value from H 1 to H 7FFF can be specified as lt value gt RENESAS Description Setting Specifies a trace acquisition condition Trace Condition A B C Free trace Acquires trace information in all bus cycles when no conditions are set Range trace Acquires trace information in the bus cycles within which the specified conditions are matched For a description of the conditions that can be specified see the description of lt option gt for the TAS command Trace stop When the set condition is satisfied the emulator stops acquiring trace information and the system enters the trace halt state For conditions that can be set see the description of lt option gt for the TAS command Although the user program is still in emulation trace information cannot be acquired in the trace halt state When the trace stop condition is satisfied the following message is displ
363. upt Count Delay pO nme Range Trace Stop Figure 5 49 Trace Condition A1 Dialog Box General Page Select Trace Stop on the General page The Trace Condition Al to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 dialog box has the tabbed pages listed in table 5 59 180 RENESAS Table 5 59 Trace Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 Dialog Box Pages Page Description General Selects the trace mode Address Sets address bus conditions Data Sets data bus conditions Bus State Sets read write cycle conditions Probe Sets external probe signal conditions Interrupt Sets external interrupt signal conditions NMI and IRLO to IRL3 Count Sets satisfaction count conditions Delay Sets delay conditions Specify the required conditions on the corresponding pages then click the OK button The Trace condition A1 dialog box closes and the display returns to the Condition A page The specified hardware trace conditions will now be displayed as condition 7 in the Condition list box Click the OK button to close the Trace Acquisition dialog box Trace stop conditions for the other channels are specified in the same way The options on each page are the same as those of the corresponding Break Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 dialog boxes except the General page For details of the options on each page refer to section 5 5 3 Hardware Break When the trac
364. urement mode 2 13 Subroutine time measurement mode 3 RATE Proportions of execution time as numerical values and on a graph TOTAL RUN TIME Total execution time H hours M minutes S seconds US microseconds NS nanoseconds Resetting Performance Analysis Settings To reset the results of performance analysis select Initialize from the pop up menu of the Performance Analysis window Before the reset the emulator will display a message box to ask you if you want to reset the settings To reset the settings click the OK button Note When using the The minimum time to be measured by Go command execution in the Configuration dialog box to modify the unit for counting by the execution time measurement counter be sure to reset the settings for performance analysis before altering the minimum time interval Otherwise the emulator will continue to use the minimum time interval from before the alteration in measuring the program s performance 230 RENESAS 5 8 2 MPU Internal Performance Function The MPU internal performance function is the measurement of the number of times the conditions listed in table 5 91 are satisfied during execution of the user program This function is only available from the Command Line window Use the commands below to set display initialize and cancel the conditions of performance analysis Set PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS_I_SET command Display and initialize PERFORMANCE_ANALYS
365. use a contact failure or otherwise degraded performance Hold the IC socket in place by hand to prevent the application of pressure due to the force of rotation see figure C 2 Order of Tightening the Screws 362 RENESAS Drive screws in gradually alternating between corners as shown above Figure C 2 Order of Tightening the Screws Top View of the HS7751EBH81H Board d Use spacers and nuts to fix the user system to the HS7751EBH81H board CAUTION Check the location of pin 1 before connecting lf the emulator malfunctions while in use there might be a crack in the soldered connections on the IC socket Check for conduction by using a tester and solder that part again if necessary 363 RENESAS Screws M2 x 10 mm HS7751EBH81H board ry Py Spacer Pin 1 Washer and nut J Figure C 3 Connecting the HS7751EBH81H Board to the User System 364 7tENESAS C 2 Connecting the Cables for Tracing A WARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system or emulator Also the USER PROGRAM being debugged will be LOST CAUTION wrong places Colors to identify trace cables CN1 Red CN2 Yellow CN3 Blue GND cable Top view of the HS7751EBH81H board Trace cable connectors The screws for fixing the trace cables and eval
366. uting applications before uninstalling software Select Settings Control panel from the Start menu Double click the Add Remove Programs icon Select SH7751 E8000 Emulator Software from the list of installed applications and click the Add Remove button The setup program will start and the user can select whether to change modify or remove the installed application Select Remove to uninstall the application Note Some shared files may be found during uninstallation If another HDI can use a shared file do not remove it WindowsNT 4 0 may ask whether to remove the registry information of the driver If another HDI can use the driver do not remove the registry information If another HDI does not work after installing the software reinstall the HDI 3 8 2 Uninstalling the Acrobat Reader Only uninstall the Acrobat Reader if it is necessary Click Settings Control panel from the Start menu Then double click the Add Remove Programs icon Select Adobe Acrobat Reader x x from the list of applications installed and click the Add Remove button Follow the directions on the screen 68 RENESAS Section 4 Tutorial 4 1 Introduction The following describes the main functions of the HDI by using a sample program for sorting random data For more complicated usage refer to section 5 Emulator Functions Here the user system is assumed to be disconnected The sample program performs the following act
367. w is displayed Select Platform sheet from the System Status window System Status Iof xi The Cause of last break line shows that the cause of the break is the breakpoint For details on program execution refer to section 5 3 Realtime Emulation 82 Iten CS4 Memory Type CSS Memory Type CS6 Memory Type H UDI JTAG Clock User system MD10 0 Clock source Run status Cause of last break Run Time Count Condition A Sequential Condition B Sequential Interval Timer counter Bus timeout Multi break PRB1 RESET signal BREQ signal RDY signal Status NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL 2 5MHz 7ff Emulator Clock 27 8MHz Break BREAKPOINT D OOOOH OOM 00S 012944US SSONS Not used Not used ZOns 100us Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Figure 4 13 System Status Window RENESAS 4 8 Reviewing Breakpoints The user can see all the breakpoints set in the program in the Breakpoints window e Select Breakpoints from the View menu The Breakpoints window is displayed The contents of the breakpoint set will be displayed A e will be displayed in the Enable column Breakpoints gt OF x File Line Address Type tutorial c 35 000024E6 Break Point Physical Space Figure 4 14 Breakpoints Window The Breakpoints window also allows the user to change breakpoints set new breakpoints and delete breakpoints e Close the Breakpoints window 83 RENESAS 4 9 V
368. while 1 00002530 _sort void sort long a i long t int i j k gap Figure 4 24 Source Window Step Out 90 RENESAS The data of array a displayed in the Watch Window window is sorted in ascending order Watch Window OF x i Value i Ox003fffd8 f long 10 H o00000000 Ox003f ffd8 long H O00000daa Ox003fffdc long H 000020da Ox003fffe0 long H 00002704 Ox003fffe4 long H O00002f5a Ox003fffe8 long H O00003ead Ox003fffec long long a H 0000421f Ox003fff 0 H 00004d1d Ox003ffff4 long H 000053dc Ox003fff 8 long H 00005665 Ox003ffffc long H 7008ddd Ox003fffd0 long 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 L L d d bad ad bd ee trernas a mM w Figure 4 25 Watch Window Window Array a Sorted in Ascending Order e To execute two steps use the Step In command twice inti tutorial c int i 000024aa for i 0 i lt 10 i 000024b2 j rand 00002402 if j lt 0 000024c6 j j 000024ca afi 3 00002466 Break 000024f6 000024fa 00002502 max 0 00002506 change a 00002516 min a 9 0000251a max a 0 0000251e while 1 00002530 void sort long a long t int i j k gap Figure 4 26 Source Window Step Out gt Step In The value of variable max displayed in the Watch Window window is changed to the maximum data value 91 RENESAS Watch Wi
369. x MHz Emulator internal clock x 13 9 27 8 or 55 6 User clock User system clock signal X TAL Crystal oscillator on the evaluation chip board 104 RENESAS Table 5 4 General Page cont Option Emulation mode Item Description Selects the operating mode for emulation Normal Normal emulation Initial value Cycle Reset x Issues a forced RESET signal to the MPU then continues emulation after a specified interval cycle reset mode x 6 5us 9 8us 50us 100us 500us 1ms 5ms 10ms 50ms 100ms 500ms 1s Break Condition U Uses an internal break Break Condition U Sequential x condition to execute a sequential break x 1 2 3 Timeout break of Trace stops when the Performance Analysis Performance Analysis 1 timeout specification or maximum number of passes specification is satisfied Timeout trace stop of Trace stop when the Performance Analysis Performance Analysis 1 timeout specification or maximum number of passes specification is satisfied Time interval Measurement Measures the execution time over which a Condition B specific condition is satisfied by using Break Condition B or Trace Condition B No Break Emulation with all break conditions disabled Prohibit R W on the fly Selects whether or not to disable access to memory during user program execution Initial value Disabled Interrupts during step Selects whether or not to accept interrupts during step execution Ini
370. your host computer the SH7751 E8000S Hitachi Debugging Interface hereafter referred to as HDI can be used for debugging A LAN adapter allows the connection of the E8000S station to the host computer as a network Connecting the LAN adapter also enables debugging using the HDI For details on PC interface boards available for ISA bus PCI bus and PCMCIA bus specifications and LAN adapter refer to their description notes RENESAS Paa memory board HS8000EMS01H we control board HS7750EDD81H Lh PC interface cable option 2 Network LAN adapter option PC interface cable option d_ PC interface board option a Trace cable E8000S station HS8000EST11H Bf C socket External probe trigger output pins User system Figure 1 1 Emulator for the SH7751 Connected via the IC Socket RENESAS The E8000S emulator provides the following features 1 Realtime emulation of the SH7751 at 167 MHz 2 A wide selection of emulation commands promoting efficient system development 3 4 Efficient debugging enabled by variable break functions and a mass storage trace memory On line help functions to facilitate command usage without a manual 128 k cycles Command execution during emulation for example Trace data display Emulation memory display and modification Performance analysis Measurement of subroutine execution time and count for evaluating the execution

SH7751 E8000S Emulator HS7751EBH81H User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents